Network Instrumentation Module Controller module NX-D15/25/35 User's Manual of Function

Transcription

1 No. CP-SP-1308E Network Instrumentation Module Controller module NX-D15/25/35 User's Manual of Function Thank you for purchasing the NX-D15/25/35. This manual contains information for ensuring the correct use of the NX-D15/25/35. It should be read by those who design and maintain equipment that uses the NX-D15/25/35. It also provides necessary information for installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Be sure to keep this manual nearby for handy reference.

2 NOTICE Be sure that the user receives this manual before the product is used. Copying or duplicating this user s manual in part or in whole is forbidden. The information and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free from inaccuracies and omissions. If you should find an error or omission, please contact the azbil Group. In no event is Azbil Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages as a result of using this product Azbil Corporation All Rights Reserved.

3 Conventions Used in This Manual To prevent injury to the operator and others, and to prevent property damage, the following types of safety precautions are indicated: WARNING CAUTION Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product might result in death or serious injury. Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product might result in minor injury to the user, or only physical damage to the product. In describing the product, this manual uses the icons and conventions listed below. Use caution when handling the product. The indicated action is prohibited. Be sure to follow the indicated instructions. Handling Precautions: Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention to when handling this module. Note: Notes indicate information that might benefit the user. This indicates the item or page that the user is requested to refer to. (1) (2) (3) Numbers within parentheses indicate steps in a sequence or parts of an explanation. "ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3]" represents the ROM version *1 and the module version. *2 Module minor version Module major version Module-compatible version ROM minor version ROM major version *1. ROM versions are used for ROM version management. *2. Module versions are used to manage parameter compatibility. Abbreviations In this manual, some product names are abbreviated as shown below. TC: Controller module DX: Digital/pulse input module DY: Digital output module SV: Supervisor module CA: Communication adapter TA: Terminal adapter CB: Communication box Loader: SLP-NX Smart Loader Package i

4 Safety Precautions Safety precautions are intended to ensure the safe and correct use of this product, to prevent injury to the operator and others, and to prevent damage to property. Be sure to observe these safety precautions. Please make sure you understand the safety guidelines before reading the rest of this manual. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment must be impaired. WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Doing so may result in an electric shock. Be sure to check that the NX-D15/25/35 has been correctly wired before turning on the power. Incorrect wiring of the module can damage it or lead to hazardous conditions. CAUTION To lock or unlock the DIN rail locking tab, use a tool such as a screwdriver. Do not disassemble the NX-D15/25/35. Doing so might cause device failure. Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc. to enter the case. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power supply terminals. Doing so may result in an electric shock. Before wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to disconnect the power. Doing so might cause device failure. Wire the unit in compliance with established standards, using the specified power source and recognized installation methods. Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Make sure that there are no loose connections. Failure to do so might cause overheating or device failure. Do not connect modules whose total power consumption exceeds 70 W. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. Do not supply power to the linked modules from multiple power sources. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. Do not use unused terminals on the NX-D15/25/35 as relay terminals. Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Do not short out the output section. Doing so might cause device failure. Firmly tighten the terminal screws to the torque listed in the specifications. Insufficient tightening might cause fire. If there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge protector to prevent possible fire or failure of the device. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. ii

5 CAUTION Use the module within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications (temperature, humidity, vibration, shock, installation direction, atmosphere, etc.). Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. The NX-D15/25/35 does not operate for about 10 seconds after the power has been turned ON, depending on the settings. Be careful if the output from the module is used as an interlock signal. When discarding the NX-D15/25/35, dispose of it as industrial waste, following local regulations. iii

6 The Role of This Manual A total of 11 different manuals are available for the Network Instrumentation Module. Read them as necessary for your specific requirements. If a manual you require is not available, contact Azbil Corporation or its dealer. Additionally, you can download necessary manuals from " Network Instrumentation Module NX-D15/25/35 Controller Module User's Manual for Installation Manual No. CP-UM-5561JE This manual is supplied with the NX-D15/25/35. Personnel in charge of design and/or manufacture of a system using the NX-D15/25/35 should thoroughly read this manual. It describes safety precautions, installation, wiring, and primary specifications. Network Instrumentation Module NX-CB1 Communication Box User s Manual for Installation Manual No. CP-UM-5558JE This manual is supplied with the NX-CB1. Personnel in charge of design and/or manufacture of a system using the NX-CB1 should read this manual thoroughly. It describes safety precautions, installation, wiring, and primary specifications. Network Instrumentation Module NX-DX1/DX2 Digital Input/Pulse Input Module User s Manual for Installation Manual No. CP-UM-5560JE This manual is supplied with the NX-DX1/DX2. Personnel in charge of design and/or manufacture of a system using the NX-DX1/DX2 should read this manual thoroughly. It describes safety precautions, installation, wiring, and primary specifications. Network Instrumentation Module NX-S11/12/21 Supervisor Module User s Manual for Installation Manual No. CP-UM-5557JE This manual is supplied with the NX-S11/12/21. Personnel in charge of design and/or manufacture of a system using the NX-S11/12/21 should thoroughly read this manual. It describes safety precautions, installation, wiring, and primary specifications. Network Instrument Module NX-DY1/2 Digital Output Module User s Manual for Installation Manual No. CP-UM-5564JE This manual is supplied with the NX-DY1/2. Personnel in charge of design and/or manufacture of a system using the NX-DY1/2 must thoroughly read this manual. It describes safety precautions, installation, wiring, and primary specifications. Network Instrumentation Module NX-D15/25/35 Controller Module User's Manual for Function Manual No. CP-SP-1308E This manual. Personnel who are using the NX-NX-D15/25/35 for the first time or who are in charge of hardware design and/or maintenance of a control panel containing the NX-D15/25/35 should read this manual thoroughly. This manual describes the hardware, surveys the NX-D15/25/35 and other products used with it, explains installation, wiring, and troubleshooting, and gives hardware specifications. iv

7 Network Instrumentation Module NX-DX1/DX2 Digital Input/Pulse Input Module User's Manual for Function Manual No. CP-SP-1323E Personnel who are using the NX-DX1/DX2 for the first time or who are in charge of hardware design and/or maintenance of a control panel containing the NX-DX1/DX2 should read this manual thoroughly. This manual describes the hardware, surveys the NX-DX1/DX2 and other products used with it, explains installation, wiring, and troubleshooting, and gives hardware specifications. Network Instrumentation Module NX-S11/12/21 Supervisor Module User's Manual for Function Manual No. CP-SP-1324E Personnel who are using the NX-S11/12/21 for the first time or who are in charge of hardware design and/or maintenance of a control panel containing the NX-S11/12/21 should read this manual thoroughly. This manual describes the hardware, surveys the NX-DX1/DX2 and other products used with it, explains installation, wiring, and troubleshooting, and gives hardware specifications. Network Instrumentation Module User s Manual Network Design Version Manual No. CP-SP-1313E Personnel who are in charge of design of a network using the Network Instrumentation Module should read this manual thoroughly. It describes how to design a network and gives examples. Network Instrumentation Module Smart Loader Package SLP-NX Installation Guide Manual No. CP-UM-5559JE This manual is supplied with the SLP-NX Smart Loader Package and describes installation of the software on a personal computer. Network Instrumentation Module Smart Loader Package SLP-NX User s Manual Manual No. CP-UM-5636E This manual is included in the SLP-NX Smart Loader Package as a PDF file. Personnel in charge of design or configuration of a system using Network Instrumentation Modules should read this manual thoroughly. The manual describes the software that is used to configure Network Instrumentation Modules with a computer. The manual describes installation of the software into a personal computer, operation of the personal computer, various functions, and setup procedures. v

8 Organization of This User's Manual This manual is organized as follows: Chapter 1. OVERVIEW Chapter 2. INSTALLATION Chapter 3. WIRING Overview, features, model selection guide, and part names and functions. Operating environment and installation procedures. Wiring procedures and precautions, and connection examples. Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Functions necessary for use of the NX-D15/25/35 for control. Chapter 5. OPERATION Setup of the most commonly used functions. Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Setup of functions not related to control. Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Setup of convenient functions. Chapter 8 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication with a host unit, such as a personal computer or PLC, using Azbil Corporations's standard CPL communication and RS-485. Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication with a host unit, such as a personal computer or PLC, using MODBUS and RS-485. Chapter 10. CPL TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication with a host unit, such as a personal computer or PLC, using CPL/ TCP and Ethernet. Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication with a host unit, such as a personal computer or PLC, using MODBUS/TCP and Ethernet. Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA A list of communication data in the memory of the NX-D15/25/35. Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS A list of parameter settings. Chapter 14. TROUBLESHOOTING What to do in case of a problem. Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL Maintenance, inspection, and disposal. Chapter 16. SPECIFICATIONS General specifications, performance specifications, external dimensions, and optional parts. Appendix Function block diagrams, standard s, standard numerical s, and explanations of characters and terms used in the manual. vi

9 Contents Conventions Used in This Manual Safety Precautions The Role of This Manual Organization of This User's Manual Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-1 Overview and Features Overview Features Model Selection Table Controller module Communication box Communication adapter, terminal adapter Names and Functions of Parts Controller module Communication box Communication adapter Terminal adapter Operation Modes Operation modes Loop modes Chapter 2. INSTALLATION Installation location Terminal block installation and removal Module linkage Mounting method Installing the main body on the base Chapter 3. WIRING 3-1 Wiring Precautions Wiring precautions Recommended Cables Terminal Connections Terminal Wiring Diagram Terminal Connections Power supply wiring Noise countermeasures Power supply design PV Input Connections PV input (PV1) PV input (PV2) PV input (PV3) PV input (PV4) vii

10 MFB input (MFB1) MFB input (MFB2) Transistor and Digital Output Connections Transistor output Digital output (optional) Connection with a Solid-State Relay (SSR) Analog Current Output Connections Analog current output (AOC) Connection example with the AVP Analog Voltage Output Connections Analog voltage output (AOV) Current Transformer Input Connections Current transformer (CT) inputs (optional) Digital Input (DI) Connections Digital input (optional) Ethernet Connections Loader Cable Connections RS-485 Communication Connections Noise Generation Sources and Noise Suppression I/O Isolation Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration Bank and settings How to Set the Input Type (PV Input) Bank and settings Input type Valid range types Setting method How to Set Range-Related Items Bank and settings How to Set the Range for Proportional Band How to set the linear scaling How to set square root extraction How to set the PV filter How to change the alarm setting LSP Functions SP system group LSP PID group definition SP group No SP low and high limits LSP ramp RSP ramp How to Set the Decimal Point Position Bank and settings How to Set the Loop Control Action Bank and settings viii

11 4-7 How to Set Outputs (continuous output and time proportional output) Output types and applications Continuous output settings Time proportional output settings ON/OFF control settings ON/OFF output settings How to Set Position Proportional Output Loop settings (for position proportioning) Position proportioning settings PV channel settings for MFB OUT/DO settings Default settings for position proportional output models Settings Control method selection Dead zone Long life Auto-tuning Motor wiring and operation with auto-tuning Input errors and line break Monitoring during operation Wiring to a motor Connection example with the ECM Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-1 Operation Displays PWR, RUN, MOD, COM, NST, FAIL PV 1 to OP1 to F0 to Display when power is turned ON LED lighting pattern under special conditions Button functions Loop Mode Bank and settings (loop mode switchover) Bank and settings (for MANUAL) Bank and settings (for READY) Bank and settings (for RSP) How to Change Control Mode and Parameters Capability architecture of the SLP-NX How to change parameters How to Manually Output the MV (AUTO/MANUAL) How to Change to the Remote SP (RSP/LSP) How to Stop Control by Switching RUN to READY How to Start the Auto Tuning How to Change the SP Changing the SP used Changing the SP group selection ix

12 5-9 How to Change the PID Changing the PID setting Executing auto-tuning How to Change the Event Action Point PID Control Bank and settings PID control initialization Heat/Cool Control Bank and settings ON/OFF Control Bank and settings Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-1 How to Use Events Banks and settings Example: PV high limit alarm (activated if an error occurs) Event operation type, direct/reverse, hysteresis, main setting, and sub-setting. 6-3 Loop/channel definition setup Event standby and EVENT state at READY Event decimal point ON delay and OFF delay Latch How to Use Internal Contact Input Setting Example 1: RUN/READY mode selection from the digital input Example 2: SP group selection from the digital input Operation type Input type Loop/channel definition Weighting How to Use Digital Output Bank and setting Example: Turning on DO1 if a PV1 high limit error occurs Output type Latch How to Use the Multi-SP Bank and settings Features Example: Multi-SP is used with two LSP groups How to Change the LSP with Constant Ramp Banks and settings Conditions for ramp start Conditions for ramp start at PV How to Change the RSP with Constant Ramp Banks and settings Conditions for ramp start Conditions for ramp start with PV used as a start point x

13 6-7 Current Transformer (CT) Input Measurable current values Banks and settings Data items for monitoring CT operation Waiting time for CT measurement Number of CT turns Number of CT power line passes Heater burnout detection current value Minimum current defined as overcurrent Minimum current defined as short-circuit Hysteresis: Delay time Condition for restoring status before measurement Timing for updating CT current measurement Continuous current measurement cycle How to detect current high/low limit errors How to detect heater burnout How to detect overcurrent How to detect short circuit How to measure the secondary current of a thyristor power regulator How to measure current of time proportional output of the module using a solidstate relay (SSR) How to measure current of time proportional output of a device other than the module using a solid-state relay (SSR) Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-1 Loop control (algorithm) Banks and settings MV if PV is Abnormal Banks and settings Example MV Change Limit Banks and settings Example MV Branching Output Loop mode diagram Banks and settings Example Energy Saving Time Proportioning Banks and settings Master/Slave selection Time proportional slave channels Example Energy saving delay time Phase Shift Approximation by Linearization Table xi

14 Approximation by linearization table of output Banks and settings Example Magnitude correlation of breakpoint A setting is not the numerical order A options of the adjacent breakpoints are the same AT (Auto Tuning) Banks and settings AT progress Example Example Zone PID Banks and settings Example Cold Junction Compensation Banks and settings Logical Operations Processing sequence for logical operations Banks and settings Example Latch UFLED Banks and settings Lighting status Start Delay at Power ON Banks and settings User-Defined Bit Example User-Defined Numbers Example Data Transfer Function between Modules Banks and settings Reception Monitoring and Communication Timeout Banks and settings Transmission timeout between modules Signal to supervisor module timeout (standard bit 1982) Cycle Setup Banks and settings Input Assignment Function Banks and settings Just-FiTTER Banks and settings SP Lag Banks and settings Internal Cascade Control Internal cascade control elements Scaling Internal cascade control setting methods IDLE/SV Communication Error Operation Banks and settings xii

15 7-24 Fixed Value Output Banks and settings Example Zener Barrier Adjustment and Wiring Resistance Correction Banks and settings Adjustment procedure Setting adjusted values Clearing adjusted values RSP Tracking Setting bank and setting data fields Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-1 Outline of Communication Features Settings Communication procedures Message Structure Message Structure Data link layer Application layer Description of Commands Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command) Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command) Fixed length random data read command (RU command) Fixed length random data write command (WU command) Continuous data read command (RS command) Continuous data write command (WS command) Definition of Data Addresses Numeric Representation in the Application Layer Hexadecimal Decimal List of Termination Codes End code of the read command End code of the write command Reception and Transmission Timing Timing specifications for instruction and response message RS-485 driver control timing specifications Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-1 Outline of Communication Features Settings Communication procedures Message Structure Message Structure Command type xiii

16 Exception code No. of data records Description of Commands Multiple data record read command (03H) Multiple data record write command (10H) One data item write command (06H) Numeric Representation ASCII hexadecimals RTU hexadecimals Specifications Shared with CPL Communications Function RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses RS-485 driver control timing specifications Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-1 Outline of Communication Features Settings Communication procedures Communication procedure for standard TCP/IP sockets Message Structure Message Structure Data link layer Application layer Description of Commands Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command) Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command) Fixed length random data read command (RU command) Fixed length random data write command (WU command) Continuous data read command (RS command) Continuous data write command (WS command) Definition of Data Addresses Numeric Representation in the Application Layer Hexadecimal Decimal List of Termination Codes End code of the read command End code of the write command Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 11-1 Outline of Communication Features Settings Communication procedures Communication procedure for standard TCP/IP sockets Message Structure xiv

17 Message Structure Exception code No. of data records Description of Commands Application section Multiple data record read command (03H) Multiple data record write command (10H) data record write command (06H) Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Chapter 14. TROUBLESHOOTING Alarm codes and corrective actions If a touch panel (etc.) does not respond after module replacement If the module can no longer communicate with a device using the MODBUS/TCP protocol Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL 15-1 Maintenance and Inspection Module Replacement Replace the entire base section (using Ethernet communications) Replace the entire base section (using a loader cable) Replacing leaving the base section as-is Disposal Chapter 16. SPECIFICATIONS 16-1 SPECIFICATIONS Module specifications PV input Behavior if a PV input error occurs Behavior if an MFB input error occurs Transistor output (position proportional control models) Analog current output Analog voltage output Current transformer input (optional) Digital output (optional) Digital input (optional) conditions Operating conditions xv

18 Transportation conditions Other Communication specifications Communication availability Communication box (sold separately, model No.: NX-CB1 ) Communication adapters (sold separately, model no.: NX-CL1, NX-CR1 ) Terminal adapters(sold separately, model nos.: NX-CL1, NX-CR1 ) Connector caps (sold separately, model nos.: (male), (female)) External Dimensions Controller module Communication box Communication adapter Terminal adapter Appendix Appendix-1 Function Block Diagrams Appendix-1 NX-D15/25/35 basic function block diagram...appendix-1 Processing procedure...appendix-2 PV input process block diagram Appendix-3 SP process block diagram Appendix-4 SP process block diagram (internal cascade)...appendix-5 PID control process block diagram (direct or reverse action)...appendix-6 PID control process block diagram (heat/cool control) Appendix-7 Internal contact input process block diagram...appendix-8 Event process block diagram Appendix-8 Continuous output process block diagram Appendix-9 Position proportional output process block diagram...appendix-9 OUT/DO output process block diagram appendix-10 MV branching output process block diagram...appendix-11 Appendix-2 Bits and Numbers...Appendix-12 bits...appendix-12 numbers...appendix-13 Appendix-3 Ring Communication Status (Network Status)...Appendix-14 Ring communication status appendix-14 Ring communication status confirmation method by communications...appendix-16 Ring communication status reflected timing when the power is turned ON....Appendix-17 Appendix-4 ROM Version History Appendix-19 ROM version 1.00 [1_0_0] (support start date: March 2010)...Appendix-19 ROM version 2.00 [1_0_1] (support start date: August 2010) Appendix-19 ROM version 2.01 [1_0_1] (support start date: November 2010)......Appendix-20 ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] (support start date: April 2011)...Appendix-20 Version 3.00 [1_0_3] (support start date: December 2011)...Appendix-21 Appendix-5 Abbreviations and Terms Appendix-22 xvi

19 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-1 Overview and Features Overview Linked by Ethernet, Network instrumentation Modules make distributed instrumentation, high-speed communications, less wiring, and less engineering work all possible at the same time. Modules also create value for customers by offering reduced environmental impact, superior product quality, and higher productivity. The NX-D15/25 and the NX-D35 are distributed multi-channel controllers that can execute PID control for up to 4 loops or 2 loops, respectively. Features High-speed communication capabilities Ethernet hardware Each module is equipped for Ethernet communications. When Network Instrumentation Modules are not only linked but also distributed, greatly reduced wiring is possible by using a daisy chain configuration. Each module also has an RS-485 communications function. Network Instrumentation Modules provide high-speed communication with host systems, programmable logic controllers (PLCs), display devices, etc. A network equipped with Network Instrumentation Modules can be upgraded to use Azbil Corporation s monitoring/control system. Distributed layout With Ethernet connections, there is no difference in function between distributed and contiguous layouts. Redundant communications Either ring or non-ring connection is possible on an Ethernet network. Hardware Control functions Engineering Tool Small but mighty Compact body ( mm) Easy assembly A module consists of a base, a body, and a terminal block. Modules can be easily installed and removed without tools. Contiguous modules or distributed layout Input/output signals can be shared between modules, whether they are physically contiguous or in a distributed layout. Standalone modules Each module contains its own power supply, control, and communication functions. So module use is efficient even if not many channels are used. Moreover, this module design saves space. One module can execute PID control for up to 4 loops (NX-D15/25) or 2 loops (NX-D35). Full multi-range input provides multiple range selections for thermocouple, resistance temperature detector (RTD), DC, and DC voltage. Cascade control (NX-D25/35) and heating/cooling control can be selected in control mode. Control output can be allotted for control of multiple devices. As an option, 4-channel models can additionally be equipped for current transformer input, digital input, or digital output. Network Instrumentation Modules can also provide logical operation processing for digital inputs, digital outputs, internal events, etc. Data transfer function allows operation input/output between modules. The SLP-NX Smart Loader Package (sold separately) is available. The SLP-NX allows a PC to access multiple modules simultaneously via Ethernet. Consequently, control, setup, and monitoring can be executed for multiple modules at the same time, reducing engineering time. 1-1

20 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-2 Model Selection Table Controller module Basic Model No. NX- Type D15 D25 D35 Ring connection N R Wiring method T Channels Output Type Option *1: The NX-D15 cannot be used for multi-loop cooperative control. *2 : 2 channels, output type M, S, G, and option 4 are not available for the NX-D15/25. *3: 4 channels are not available for the NX-D35. *4: If the output type is T or M, option 4 is not available. Additional Outcome Description Network Instrumentation Module Controller module ±0.3% FS, 500 ms sampling*1 Controller module ±0.3% FS, 200 ms sampling Controller module ±0.1% FS, 100 ms sampling Non-ring communications Ring communications Screw terminal block 2 2 channels*2 4 4 channels* 3 T Transistor output C Analog current output D Analog voltage output M Transistor output (for position proportional control)*2 S Isolated analog current output* 2 G Isolated analog voltage output* 2 0 None 1 4 current transformer (CT) inputs 2 4 digital outputs 3 4 digital inputs *4 4 4 digital outputs (for position proportional control)*2 0 None D With inspection report Y With traceability certificate T Tropicalization treatment K Anti-sulfuration treatment B Tropicalization treatment + inspection report L Anti-sulfuration treatment + inspection report Communication box Basic Ring Ring Type model No. connection connection NX- CB1 N R N R Ports Option Additional Description Network Instrumentation Module 4-port switching hub Chain non-ring connection (using side connector) Chain non-ring connection (using side connector) Non-ring connection between chains (using front port) Non-ring connection between chains (using front port) 04 4 ports 0 RJ-45 O None D With inspection report T Tropicalization treatment K Anti-sulfuration treatment B Tropicalization treatment + inspection report L Anti-sulfuration treatment + inspection report Communication adapter, terminal adapter Basic Model No. Type Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Additional Description NX- Network Instrumentation Module *1 CL1 Communication adapter for left side *1 CR1 Communication adapter for right side *1 TL1 Terminal adapter for left side *1 TR1 Terminal adapter for left side 0 None 0 None 00 None 0 None 0 None D With inspection report T Tropicalization treatment K Anti-sulfuration treatment *1: Left and right are defined as seen when viewing the front of the B Tropicalization treatment + inspection certificate module after mounting. L Anti-sulfuration treatment + inspection report 1-2

21 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-3 Names and Functions of Parts Controller module Body Main body display parts differ according to model number (function). LED operation lamp PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL PV1 to PV4 operation lamp OP1 to OP4 operation lamp F0 operation lamp F1 to F9 operation lamp Push button PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL NX-D25N Loader jack Connection terminal (Terminal block) LOCK Base Close-up RS-485 cutoff switch: Used to disconnect the connection with the right side module of RS-485 communication. Connected (default) 1 2 Side connector: Used to connect modules. Power terminal: 1: DC24V(+) 2: DC24V( ) Not connected DIN rail stopper: Used for fixing to the DIN rail RS-485 communication terminal: A 3-wire system RS-485 communication terminal. 4: DA(+) 5: DB( ) 6: SG 1-3

22 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW Communication box Body LED operation lamp PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 4 Ethernet ports 1 to 4 Link/ACT operation lamp Ethernet ports 3 and 4 NST operation lamp Maintenance jack: (For manufacturer maintenance) For internal use at Azbil. Cannot connect to the SLP-NX Smart Loader Package. Ethernet ports 1 to 4 Ports for connecting ethernet cables. Use ports 3 and 4 to set a ring connection. Base Side connector: Used to connect modules. DIN rail stopper: Used for fixing to the DIN rail Power terminal: 1: DC24V (+) 2: DC24V ( ) RS-485 communication terminal: A 3-wire system RS-485 communication terminal. 4: DA (+) 5: DB ( ) 6: SG * Connect to the module on the right side. 1-4

23 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW Communication adapter Port for left-side connection Ethernet connection port: A port for connecting an Ethernet cable. Side connector: Needed to connect Ethernet signals. DIN rail stopper: Used for fixing to the DIN rail. Port for right-side connection 1-5

24 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW Terminal adapter Port for left-side connection Return connector: Needed for chain connection ring communication. It is fitted to the terminal adaptor. Side connector: Needed to connect Ethernet signals. DIN rail stopper: Used for fixing to the DIN rail. Port for right-side connection RING 1-6

25 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-4 Operation Modes Operation modes The following shows the state transitions in operation mode. Device operation mode RUN IDLE RUN: Module operation status (all functions) IDLE: Module input/output, control action, etc. are stopped. * Calculations are not executed in IDLE mode. The result of the last calculation is retained. * Analog current/voltage output is 0.0% of the output range (zero output range) in IDLE mode. However, if the output type for IDLE/SV com error op is set to 0 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Preset.), 1 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Through.) and 2 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Bumpless.) the preset output (%) is generated. * Digital/transistor output is off in IDLE mode. However, if the output type for IDLE/SV com error op is set to 0 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Preset.), 1 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Through.) and 2 (When IDLE: Preset. When SV comm. error: Bumpless.), the set output (ON/OFF) is generated. * IDLE mode is compatible with ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later. Note If controller modules are executing multi-loop cooperative control with the supervisor module, they are under the control of the supervisor module. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) If the supervisor module is in IDLE mode, controller modules under its control are also in IDLE mode in conjunction with the SV module. The mode changes to IDLE in the following cases: AL88 (base EEPROM error), AL53 (base-body communication settings mismatch), and AL54 (base-body model No. mismatch). (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) The mode is IDLE while parameters from the loader are being written. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) * However, the module is rebooted in the following cases. If the module and the project have different parameter settings for the cycle period. If a module is added or removed from the supervisor module's control. Chapter 16, Communication operations under various types of status (page 16-8). Versions earlier than ROM version 2.01 [1_0_1] initialize PID calculations in IDLE mode. ROM versions 2.01 [1_0_1] and later do not initialize PID calculations in IDLE mode. Desired output types can be set in the Action for IDLE/SV module reception timeout bank. 7-23, IDLE/SV Communication Error Operation (page 7-36). 1-7

26 Chapter 1. OVERVIEW Loop modes The following shows the state transitions in loop mode. RUN + AUTO mode READY + AUTO mode LSP mode RSP mode LSP mode RSP mode AT stop During AT RUN/READY mode selection AT stop AUTO/MANUAL mode selection AUTO/MANUAL mode selection RUN + MANUAL mode READY + MANUAL mode LSP mode RSP mode RUN/READY mode selection LSP mode RSP mode AT stop AT stop RUN: Control execution status READY: Control pause status AUTO: Automatic operation (module automatically determines the MV values) MANUAL: Manual operation (MV is determined manually) LSP: Local SP (control action is based on SP stored in the module) RSP: Remote SP (analog input from an external device is used as the SP) AT: Auto-tuning (PID constants are set automatically using the limit cycle) 1-8

27 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock. CAUTION Use the module within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications (temperature, humidity, vibration, shock, installation direction, atmosphere, etc.). Otherwise, fire or device failure could result. Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or device failure. Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc. to enter the case. They can cause fire or device failure. Installation location During installation, leave clearance of at least 50 mm above and below, 50 mm on the right and left, and 80 mm from the front for air intake, removal, wiring, and maintenance. When mounted, the module should be at least 100 mm away from another module or other device. Do not mount the module above heat-generating equipment like a power generator. Wiring duct, etc. Wiring duct, etc. Wiring duct, etc. 50mm 50mm Module 50mm Wiring duct, etc. 50mm Wiring duct, etc. Front 80mm 50mm Module 50mm Wiring duct, etc. Do not install where exposed to any of the following: High or low temperature or high or low humidity outside the specified ranges Sulfide gas or other corrosive gases Dust or oily smoke Direct sunlight, wind or rain Mechanical vibration or shock outside the specified range High voltage lines, welding machines or other sources of electrical noise High voltage ignition device like a boiler within 15 m Strong magnetic fields Flammable liquid or gas Outdoors I/O common mode voltage to the ground greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 V peak, 60 Vdc 2-1

28 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION Terminal block installation and removal Handling Precautions Do not remove the terminal block except during wiring before the module is installed, or during maintenance. Removal method (1) Slide the lock lever of the terminal block to the left to unlock the terminal block. (2) Remove the terminal block by pulling it out towards you from the bottom. Mounting method (1) Tilt the terminal block and insert the upper side of the terminal block into the groove in the case. (2) Push in the bottom of the terminal block to install. (3) Lock the terminal block by sliding its lock lever to the right. 2-2

29 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION Module linkage This unit can be connected to other modules with the left and right connectors on the base. Wiring can be kept to a minimum because connected modules share power and communications. The connection with the module on the right can be disabled using the RS-485 cutoff switch on the base. Up to 16 modules can be linked. In a distributed layout, if the horizontal length is too long, or if more than 16 modules are connected, divide the modules into two or more groups. Handling Precautions In counting the number of linked modules, the following are not included. Communication adapter Terminal adapter Module 16 modules max. Module 16 modules max. Mounting method Modules must be installed on a DIN rail. After attaching the DIN rail, pull the locking tab out sufficiently and hook the base onto the DIN rail. Next, push the locking tab upwards until it clicks into place. Handling Precautions Link the D15/25/35 to the other modules before mounting it on the DIN rail. Mount the module on a vertical surface with the DIN locking tab facing downward. Top side less than 3 Module Module Module Front side DIN rail stopper Make sure there is less than a 3 opening when attaching the unit. less than 3 2-3

30 Chapter 2. INSTALLATION Installing the main body on the base Handling Precautions The included base and main body must be used as a pair. Fit the hook on the main body into the base first. Not doing so can damage the switch. (1) Fit the hook on the main body into the base. (2) Push the main body onto the base until it clicks into place. (2) Lever (1) Hook To remove the main body from the base, pull it toward you while pressing the lever located near the top. 2-4

31 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-1 Wiring Precautions WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Not doing so may result in an electric shock. Be sure to check that the NX-D15/25/35 has been correctly wired before turning on the power. Incorrect wiring of the module can damage it or lead to hazardous conditions. Do not disassemble the NX-D15/25/35. Doing so might cause device failure. CAUTION Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc. to enter the case of this device. They might cause fire or faulty operation. Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power supply terminals. Doing so may result in an electric shock. Before wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to disconnect the power. Failure to do so might cause device failure. Wire the NX-D15/25/35 in compliance with established standards, using the specified power source and recognized installation methods.. Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Make sure that there are no loose connections. Failure to do so might cause overheating or device failure. Do not use unused terminals on the NX-D15/25/35 as relay terminals. Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Do not short out the output section. Doing so might cause device failure. Firmly tighten the terminal screws to the torque listed in the specifications. Insufficient tightening might cause fire. If there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge protector to prevent possible fire or failure of the device. Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation. 3-1

32 Chapter 3. WIRING Wiring precautions Make sure that the wiring follows regulations for indoor wiring and technical standards for electrical equipment. Do not run wires outside. The equipment could be damaged in the event of lightning. If connecting wires to the power terminals, use crimp terminals with insulating sleeves. Before wiring the module, check the module's model number and terminal numbers from the label on the side of the body. For screw terminal connections, use crimp terminals that are the correct size for M3 screws Be careful not to allow any crimp terminals to touch adjacent terminals. The signal wires and power wires of the module should be at least 60 cm away from other power wires or power sources. Also, do not pass them through the same conduit or wiring duct. If connecting the module to another device in parallel, check the requirements of the device before instrumentation. Pass the lead wire that carries heater current through the current transformer. Do not allow the heater current to exceed the allowable current specified in the specifications. Excessive current might damage the module. To ensure stable operation, this device does not operate for up to 10 seconds after the power has been turned on. However, to satisfy the accuracy specifications, it needs to warm up for at least 30 minutes. After wiring, be sure to check that there are no mistakes before turning the power ON. 3-2

33 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-2 Recommended Cables In the case of thermocouple input, connect the thermocouple wires to the terminals. If the wiring distance is long, or if a thermocouple is connected to terminals, use compensating wires to extend the wiring. Be sure to use a compensating lead wire that is shielded. For inputs and outputs other than thermocouples, use JCS 4364 instrument cable or equivalent. (twisted shielded instrument cable). Recommended cables Function Cable Dimensions Cable length *1 Remarks 500m max. * One twisted pair must be connected Power supply CVV, IV 1.25 mm2 30 m max. PV (TC) JIS C1610 (thermocouple compensating lead wire) 0.65 mm See the PV specifications (wiring resistance effects).* 2 PV (RTD) CVVS 3C, MVVS 3C 1.25 mm 2 See the PV specifications (wiring resistance effects).* 2 DI CVV, IV, KPEV, IPEV, IPEV-S, KPEV-S, MVVS 0.5 to 1.25 mm m max. * 2 DO CVV, IV, KPEV, IPEV, IPEV-S, KPEV-S, MVVS 0.9 to 1.25 mm m max. *2 Other signal wires CVV, IV, KPEV, IPEV, IPEV-S, KPEV-S, MVVS 0.5 to 1.25 mm m max. * 2 Ethernet UPT cable (4P) * 3 Category 5e min. (straight) (both ends ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B) RS-485 IPEV-S 2P*, KPEV-S 2P*, CVV-S 3C, MVVS 3C 0.9 mm mm 2 to terminals DA and DB. One or both wires of the other pair must be connected to terminal SG. *1: The effect of external electrical noise is not considered. *2: Use shielded cables in an environment where there is a large amount of electrical noise. *3: Chapter 2, "Configuration of Ethernet Communications" in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual: Network Design Version (CP-SP-1313E). 3-3

34 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-3 Terminal Connections CAUTION Firmly tighten the terminal screws to the torque listed in the specifications. Insufficient tightening might cause electric shock or fire. Do not use unused terminals on the NX-D15/25/35 as relay terminals. Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or malfunction. Do not short out the output section. Doing so might cause device failure. NX-D15/25/35 terminal connections. For module connections, use crimp type terminals that fit M3 screws. A B Applicable screw size A B Recommended crimp terminal M3 5.8 mm max. 5.5 mm min. V1.25-MS3 (vinyl-insulated) manufactured by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd. Handling Precautions If the module is installed where there is considerable vibration or shock, be sure to use round crimp terminals to prevent wires from coming off the terminals. Be careful not to allow crimp terminals to touch adjacent terminals. The terminal screw tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.7 N m. If 2 crimp terminals are put back-to-back they can be connected to the same terminal screw. 3-4

35 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-4 Terminal Wiring Diagram PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 1 PV 4 1 OP 4 F0 F1 F5 NX-D35N B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA F9 LOCK Terminal code A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA Digital output (for position proportional control) B0 COM Relay B1 OPEN1 Relay B2 CLOSE1 Relay B3 OPEN2 Relay B4 CLOSE2 Digital output B0 COM + Load B1 DO1 + Load B2 DO2 + Load B3 DO3 + Load B4 DO4 Digital input B0 COM B1 DI 1 B2 DI 2 B3 DI 3 B4 DI 4 Current transformer i input CT CT CT CT B0 COM B1 CT 1 B2 CT 2 B3 CT 3 B4 CT 4 Transistor output A0 COM + Load A1 OUT1 + Load A2 OUT2 + Load A3 OUT3 + Load A4 OUT4 Analog current/ voltage output A0 COM + Load A1 AO1 + Load A2 AO2 + Load A3 AO3 + Load A4 AO4 Transistor output Isolated analog current output (for position proportional control) Isolated analog voltage output Relay Relay A0 COM A1 OPEN1 A2 CLOSE1 A0 A1 AO1 - + Load A2 AO1+ Relay A3 OPEN2 Relay A4 CLOSE2 A3 AO2 - + Load A4 AO2+ PV3 DC voltage PV3 DC current PV3 RTD (3-wire system) PV3 thermocouple MFB1 PV4 DC voltage PV4 DC current PV4 RTD (3-wire system) PV4 thermocouple MFB2 V mv B5 + B6 B7 + ma B5 + B5 C B6 B6 B B7 B7 A B5 B6 B7 + CLOSE OPEN B5 B6 B7 T G Y V mv A5 + A5 + A5 C ma A6 A7 + A6 A7 A6 B A7 A A5 A6 A7 + CLOSE OPEN A5 A6 A7 T G Y PV1 DC voltage PV1 DC current PV1 RTD (3-wire system) PV1 thermocouple PV2 DC voltage PV2 DC current PV2 RTD (3-wire system) PV2 thermocouple V mv B8 + B8 + B8 C ma B9 B9 B9 B BA + BA BA A B8 B9 BA + V mv A8 + A8 + A8 C ma A9 AA + A9 AA A9 B AA A A8 A9 AA + 3-5

36 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-5 Terminal Connections Power supply wiring WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Doing so may result in an electric shock. CAUTION Do not allow the total power consumption of all linked modules to exceed 70 W. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation. Wire the power terminal as shown below Instrument power supply DC24V + Handling Precautions Supply power to one of the linked modules only, because they are connected to each other electrically. I/O wiring to the terminal block or elsewhere should be connected directly to the power supply for I/O, not connected via the base unit. Select a power supply that can cover the total power consumption of all linked modules. To comply with UL standards, connect the module to a UL class 2 power supply. 70 W max. 70 W max. Max 70 W Max 70 W DC power supply If a power supply is wired this way, it must supply the power to all linked modules sharing the power line at the base. Do not use this method, otherwise the power consumption of all linked modules could exceed 70 W, or malfunction or accidents may result. DC power source DC power source Connect the DC power source individually as shown below. 70 W max. Max 70 W DC power supply DC power supply If DC power supplies are wired this way, they may be damaged or their service life may be shortened unless the DC power supplies support parallel operation. Check the specifications of your DC power supplies carefully before wiring. DC power source Be sure to supply power from a single DC power supply. 3-6

37 Chapter 3. WIRING Noise countermeasures Supply the power from a single-phase power supply to limit the effects of noise. If there is too much electrical noise from the power supply, add an appropriate isolation transformer to the power supply and use an appropriate line filter. (Azbil Corporation Line Filter Model No.: ) Use a CR filter for quick-rising noises such as impulse noise. (Azbil Corporation CR Filter Model No.: ) Power supply design Handling Precautions After anti-noise measures have been taken, do not bundle primary and secondary power lines of the isolation transformer together, and do not put them in the same conduit or duct. The required power supply capacity for a module varies depending on the module configuration. For this reason, the required power supply capacity must be calculated and checked. The procedure for power supply design is shown below. (1) Calculate the total consumption current of the modules that will be used. (2) Determine the power supply capacity required, considering inrush current and derating. The design of the power supply is described below. How to calculate the power consumption Modules are connected to the instrument power supply (24 Vdc) via side connector. The power consumption for each module is shown in the table below. Calculate the total power consumption from the number of modules used. Module Type (model No.) Power consumption (W) Power ON inrush current Remarks Controller module D15, D25, D35 4 W max. 20 A max. Under operating conditions Digital input module DX1, DX2 4 W max. 20 A max. Under operating conditions Digital output module DY1, DY2 4 W max. 20 A max. Under operating conditions Supervisor Module S11, S12, S21 4 W max. 12 A max. Under operating conditions Communication box CB1 4 W max. 10 A max. Under operating conditions Communication adapter CL1, CR1 Power supply not required Terminal adapter TL1, TR1 Power supply not required How to select the required power supply capacity Calculate the required power from the table above, derate the calculation according to the ambient temperature and the load factor, and select the power supply. Handling Precautions Select a power supply that is sufficient for the power ON inrush current (under operating conditions). Without derating according to the load reduction factor and the ambient temperature, the service life of the power supply may be shortened. For details, contact the manufacturer of your power supply device. 3-7

38 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-6 PV Input Connections Handling Precautions Do not apply a voltage exceeding the rated power of this product. Excessive voltage could result in device failure. Pay attention to the output polarity when wiring. Use shielded cables (shielded compensating lead wires for thermocouple). If the RTD has 3 wires labeled A, B, and B, connect wire A to the module s terminal A, one B wire to terminal B, and the other B wire to terminal C. If using Zener barriers for the RTD, adjust them before use. 7-25, Zener Barrier Adjustment and Wiring Resistance Correction (page 7-40) MFB input is available only for NX-D35 models with an output type of M (transistor output for position proportional control) or with option 4 (4 digital outputs for position proportional control). PV input (PV1) Thermocouple RTD DC voltage (mv) DC voltage (V) DC voltage (ma) PV input (PV2) Thermocouple RTD DC voltage (mv) DC voltage (V) DC voltage (ma) PV input (PV3) Thermocouple RTD DC voltage (mv) DC voltage (V) DC voltage (ma) PV input (PV4) Thermocouple RTD DC voltage (mv) DC voltage (V) DC voltage (ma) 3-8

39 Chapter 3. WIRING MFB input (MFB1) B5 T CLOSE MFB OPEN B6 B7 G Y MFB input (MFB2) CLOSE MFB OPEN A5 A6 A7 T G Y 3-9

40 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-7 Transistor and Digital Output Connections Handling Precautions If an inductive load (such as a motor) is used, connect the diode in parallel with the load. Pay attention to the external power supply polarity when wiring. Do not connect or disconnect a load while the power is bing supplied to the module. Doing so might cause the module or load to be faulty Transistor output External power source DC5 to 24V + Load + Load A0 A1 A2 COM( ) OUT1 OUT2 + Load + Load A3 OUT3 A4 OUT4 Digital output (optional) External power source DC5 to 24V + Load + Load B0 B1 B2 COM( ) DO1 DO2 + Load + Load B3 DO3 B4 DO4 3-10

41 Chapter 3. WIRING Connection with a Solid-State Relay (SSR) Select a transistor output model or a digital output model. (See the model selection table.) Use a constant-current SSR. Use an external power source that has enough amperage to fully drive the SSR. Check the following concerning the module to be used. 1. The amperage of the external power source is greater than the SSR input currents (max. and total) of the modules connected in parallel. Also, the total current is within the allowable output current of the module. 2. For the external power source, the SSR input voltage and transistor output (digital output) of the module are within the range of the external power source allowable voltage. Connection example with Azbil PGM10F External power source Rated power supply voltage: Select a DC5 to 24V unit DC5 to 24V 100mA max. COM( ) A0 A1 OUT1 12mA max. + PGM10F + PGM10F I_total,max =12mA N units Parallely-connected units N: DC4.5 to 30V 12mA max. Total current cannot exceed 100mA, 8 units max DC4.5 to 30V 12mA max. SSR Connection No. of devices per output Remarks Azbil PGM10F Parallel 8 max. When the input current is 12 ma max. Azbil PGM10N Parallel 10 max. When the input current is 10 ma max. Omron G3PA Parallel 14 max. When the input current is 7 ma max. Omron G3PA Parallel 14 max. When the input current is 7 ma max. 3-11

42 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-8 Analog Current Output Connections Handling Precautions Analog current output (AOC) Output type C Do not connect or disconnect a load while the power is being supplied to the module. Doing so might damage the module or load. The input impedance and wiring resistance of other modules must be within the allowable load resistance of the module. Up to 2 crimp terminals can be connected to the COM terminal of the module. If wiring 4 channels, use an external terminal block. Load Load Load Load DC4 to 20/0 to 20mA, 300Ω max. Output type S Load Load DC4 to 20/0 to 20mA, 600Ω max. 3-12

43 Chapter 3. WIRING Connection example with the AVP300 (output type C ) The module has an allowable load resistance of 300 Ω which can guarantee a maximum current of 22 ma. The module can be connected to the AVP300 (input impedance: 300 Ω) if the following condition is satisfied. Maximum current (load resistance + wiring resistance) < 6.6 V *Greater than [300 Ω 22 ma = 6.6 V] Connection example with the AVP300 Cable length: 100m AVP300 Input impedance : 300Ω Wiring resistance: Wiring a 34Ω/km cable 100m would equal a wiring resistance of 6.8Ω (both ways). If the maximum current < 21.5 ma = 6.6 V/( ), connection is possible. Hot Connection (output type S ) Before wiring the NX-35 (output type S ) with 100 Ω or less. Be sure to turn the power off. Failure to do so might cause other outputs. SW 100 Ω V Load V SW ON 3-13

44 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-9 Analog Voltage Output Connections Handling Precautions Analog voltage output (AOV) Output type D Do not connect or disconnect a load while the power is bing supplied to the module. Doing so might cause the module or load to be faulty The input impedance of other modules must be within the allowable load resistance of the module. Up to 2 crimp terminals can be connected to the COM terminal of the module. If wiring 4 channels, use an external terminal block. Load Load Load Load DC0 to 5/1 to 5/0 to 10/2 to 10V, 4kΩ min. Output type G Load AO1 Load AO2 DC0 to 5/1 to 5/0 to 10/2 to 10V, 4kΩ min. 3-14

45 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-10 Current Transformer Input Connections Handling Precautions Use shielded cables. Current transformer (CT) inputs (optional) Do not connect or disconnect a load while the power is bing supplied to the module. Doing so might cause the module or load to be faulty Up to 2 crimp terminals can be connected to the COM terminal of the module. If wiring 4 channels, use an external terminal block. Measuring current range: AC0.4 to 50.0A (800 turns, 1 turn penetration) SSR, etc. Load SSR, etc. Load SSR, etc. Load SSR, etc. Load 3-15

46 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-11 Digital Input (DI) Connections Handling Precautions Digital input (optional) Use shielded cables. The module's digital inputs use a built-in power supply. Use dry contacts for external contacts. Use contacts that can be normally opened/closed when terminal current flows during short-circuit or open terminal voltage is applied. Up to 2 crimp terminals can be connected to the COM terminal of the module. If wiring 4 channels, use an external terminal block. Connection: Dry contact or transistor (sink type) Open terminal voltage: DC5V±10% Terminal current (during short-circuit): 5.6 ma typical 3-16

47 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-12 Ethernet Connections Refer to the following for details on ethernet communications: 1-3, Explanation of Module Features and Chapter 2, Configuration of Ethernet Communications in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version (CP-SP-1313E). 3-17

48 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-13 Loader Cable Connections Loader jack Loader cable Plug Handling Precautions Use a USB loader cable only. Firmly insert the plug into the loader jack. When removing or inserting the loader cable, hold the plug. Do not pull the cable. Do not apply force to the loader cable or plug in any direction while the cable is connected. Doing so might damage the loader cable or loader jack, or affect the functions or performance. Note Refer to the following for details on the loader cable: 2-5, Configuration With Other Devices in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version (CP-SP-1313E). 3-18

49 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-14 RS-485 Communication Connections Do wiring for MODBUS CPL RS-485 as shown below. This unit DA (+) DB ( ) SG RS-485 Handling Precautions Connect a terminating resistor (150 Ω ±5 %, 1/2 W min.) to both end of the communication path. However, if any device that does not allow a terminating resistor is connected to the same communications line, follow the instructions on that device. Be sure to connect the SG terminals to each other. Failure to do so might cause unreliable communications. Use twisted pair cable for communications wiring. Note For more details on RS-485 connections, refer to the following for details: Chapter 3, Configuration of Serial Communications in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version (CP-SP-1313E). 3-19

50 Chapter 3. WIRING Combining with 5-wire system modules Terminating resistor This unit or 3-wire system unit (slave station) DA (+) DB ( ) SG FG Master station RDA RDB SDA SDB SG Shield FG Terminating resistor Shield Shield 5-wire system unit (slave station) SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG 5-wire system unit (slave station) SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG Handling Precautions If the transmission line includes any module which accepts no terminating resistor (Azbil Corporation s SDC15/25/26/35/36 or DMC10), do not connect any terminating resistor to the external or communication lines of the NX-D15/25/35. FG is not available for the module. 3-20

51 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-wire system Terminating resistor This unit or 3-wire system unit (slave station) DA (+) DB ( ) SG FG Master station DA Shield DB SG Shield This unit or 3-wire system unit (slave station) DA (+) DB ( ) SG FG Shield This unit or 3-wire system unit (slave station) DA (+) Terminating resistor DB ( ) SG FG Handling Precautions If the transmission line includes any module which accepts no terminating resistor (Azbil Corporation s SDC15/25/26/35/36 or DMC10), do not connect any terminating resistor to the external or communication lines of the NX-D15/25/35. FG is not available for the module. 3-21

52 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-15 Noise Generation Sources and Noise Suppression The following are typical noise generation sources: 1. Relays and contacts 2. Solenoid coils and solenoid valves 3. Power lines (especially 90 Vac or higher) 4. Inductive loads 5. Motor commutators 6. Phase angle control SCR 7. Radio communication equipment 8. Welding machinery 9. High-voltage ignition devices Effective measures for noise suppression are shown below. 1. A CR filter is effective for quick-rising noises such as impulse noise. Recommended CR filter: Azbil Corporation's model No A varistor is effective for noises with high crest values. Recommended varistor : Azbil Corporation's model No (for 100 V), (for 200 V) Handling Precautions Take great care when using a varistor because it causes a short circuit when faulty. 3-22

53 Chapter 3. WIRING 3-16 I/O Isolation The solid line indicates isolation from the rest of the circuit. Power supply (Including side connector * 1 ) Logic circuit Loader jack RS-485, side connector, Ethernet communication * 1 Display (LEDs, switches, etc.) Current transformer input (ch1 to 4) Transistor output (ch1 to 4) * 2 Analog current output (ch1 to 4) Analog voltage output (ch1 to 4) Digital output (ch1 to 4) * 2 Digital input (ch1 to 4) PV input (ch1) PV input (ch2) PV input (ch3), MFB(ch1) PV input (ch4), MFB(ch2) Side connector ring communication * 1 Output type S, G Logic circuits Loader jack RS-485, Ethernet communications through side connector * 1 Displays (led, switch, etc) Current transformer inputs (ch1 to 4) PV input (ch1) PV input (ch2) PV input (ch3), MFB(ch1) Power supply (including side connector)* 1 PV input (ch4), MFB(ch2) Ring communications through side connector * 1 Digital outputs (ch1 to 4) Digital inputs (ch1 to 4) Analog current/voltage outputs (ch1) Analog current/voltage outputs (ch2) *1. Power, side-connector ring communications, and RS-485/side-connector Ethernet communications are isolated from each other. *2. Position proportional control models are included. 3-23

54

55 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration Select basic settings for loop configurations that directly affects PID control. Configure the following items. Number of PID control loops RSP (enable or disable) MV branching output (enable or disable) Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details Default User level Basic Setup Loop type See the tables below 22: 4 loops (NX-D15/25) 1: 2 loops (NX-D35) Multi-function Handling Precautions Unused PV inputs (PVs not listed in the table below) can be used with a monitor (basic) per PV (input channel) or with a standard numerical code per PV. The manipulated variable (MV) of the PID is fixed at 0.0 %. Loop functions such as RUN/READY, AUTO/MANUAL, and AT, etc. do not work. Loop type Loop type Loop type 0: 1 loop Loop 1 PV1 P I D 9: 2 loops (RSP) PV1 RSP(PV3) PV2 RSP(PV4) Loop 1 P I D Loop 2 P I D 26: 4-loop (RSP) + MV branching output Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned PV1 RSP PV2 RSP PV3 RSP PV4 RSP Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 P P P P I I I I D D D D : 2 loops 2: 1 loop (RSP) 5: 2 loops (1 loop with RSP) Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop 1 MV1 PV1 PV2 P I D PV1 RSP(PV3) PV2 P I D P I D MV1 MV2 Loop 2 PV1 RSP(PV2) P I D MV1 Loop 2 P I D 21: 3 loops 22: 4 loops 23: 3 loops + MV branching output MV1 PV1 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Loop 1 P I D MV1 P I D Loop 2 MV2 PV2 PV3 Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 P I D MV1 P I D P I D MV2 MV2 P I D P I D MV3 PV1 PV2 PV3 Loop 3 P I D MV3 P I D P I D MV4 27: 1-loop (Internal cascade with RSP) 28: 1 loop (internal cascade with RSP) + 2 loop (RSP) 29: 2-loop (Internal cascade with RSP) MV branching output 1 Master PV (PV1) Loop 1 P I D 1 Loop 2 MV1 Master PV (PV1) Loop 1 Master PV (PV1) Loop 1 PID1 Loop 2 Assigned RSP PID2 Assigned RSP PID2 MV2 Slave PV (PV2) PV (PV3) Loop 3 P I D 3 Slave PV (PV2) MV branching output 4 MV4 Assigned PV Assigned RSP (PV4) RSP Loop 4 P I D 4 MV2 MV3 MV4 Assigned RSP Slave PV (PV2) Master PV (PV3) Loop 3 Assigned RSP Slave PV (PV4) 8: 2 loops (RSP) + MV branching output MV1 MV2 PV1 RSP(PV3) PV2 RSP(PV4) Loop 1 Loop 2 P P I I D D 24: 4 loops + MV branching output MV branching output 1 MV1 Loop 1 P I D Loop 2 P I D MV branching output 4 Loop 3 MV4 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 P I D Loop 4 P I D Loop 2 P I D 1 PID2 MV2 Loop 4 P I D 3 PID4 MV4 MV branching output 1 MV branching output 4 MV branching output 1 MV branching output 4 MV1 MV4 MV1 MV4 4-1

56 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Maximum No. of available functions for each loop type (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later versions) (" " means N/A.) Loop type Number of loops RSP Heat/Cool control Position proportioning Cascade control MV Branching Output Compatible model No D15/25/ (D15/25), 2 (D35) D15/ D25/ D Note 1: MFB input is available only for NX-D35 models with an output type of M ( transistor output for position proportional control) or with option 4 (4 digital outputs for position proportional control). Note 2: To use position proportional output, settings other than the loop type setting are needed. 4-8, How to Set Position Proportional Output (page 4-19) Note 3: Cascade control is available for NX-D25/35 only. Maximum No. of available functions for each loop type (ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] and later versions) (" " means N/A.) Loop type Number of loops RSP Heat/Cool control Position proportioning Cascade control MV Branching Output Compatible model No D15/

57 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-2 How to Set the Input Type (PV Input) Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Input-output PV input Range type See the tables below Simple Multi-function Decimal point position Loop type Thermocouple: 0 to the No. of digits after the decimal point (corresponding to the resolution) RTD: 0 to the No. of digits after the decimal point position (corresponding to the resolution) Linear: 0 to 4 0: Celsius ( C) 1: Fahrenheit ( F) 2: Kelvin (K) Simple Multi-function Simple Multi-function Input type Thermocouple Range type Sensor type Range Resolution 1 K 200 to C 1 C 2 K 0 to 1200 C 1 C 3 K 0.0 to C 0.1 C 4 K 0.0 to C 0.1 C 5 K 0.0 to C 0.1 C 6 K to C 0.1 C 7 K to C 0.1 C 8 J 0 to 1200 C 1 C 9 J 0.0 to C 0.1 C 10 J 0.0 to C 0.1 C 11 J to C 0.1 C 12 E 0.0 to C 0.1 C 13 E 0.0 to C 0.1 C 14 T to C 0.1 C 15 R 0 to 1600 C 1 C 16 S 0 to 1600 C 1 C 17 B 0 to 1800 C 1 C 18 N 0 to 1300 C 1 C 19 PL II 0 to 1300 C 1 C 20 WRe to 1400 C 1 C 21 WRe to 2300 C 1 C 22 Ni-Ni, Mo 0 to 1300 C 1 C 23 PR to 1900 C 1 C 24 DIN U to C 0.1 C 25 DIN L to C 0.1 C 26 Gold/iron- Chromel 0.1 to K 0.1 K The minimum reading for thermocouple B is 20 C. Resistance temperature detector (RTD) Range type Linear Sensor type Range Resolution 41 Pt to C 0.1 C 42 JPt to C 0.1 C 43 Pt to C 0.1 C 44 JPt to C 0.1 C 45 Pt to C 0.1 C 46 JPt to C 0.1 C 47 Pt to C 0.1 C 48 JPt to C 0.1 C 49 Pt to C 0.1 C 50 JPt to C 0.1 C 51 Pt to C 0.01 C 52 JPt to C 0.01 C Range type Sensor type Range 81 DC voltage 0 to 10 mv to +10 mv 83 0 to 100 mv 84 0 to 1 V 85 1 to +1 V 86 1 to 5 V 87 0 to 5 V 88 0 to 10 V 89 2 to 10 V 90 DC electricity 0 to 20 ma 91 4 to 20 ma MFB count value Range type Sensor type Range 75 MFB 100 to 1000 Ω 76 MFB 1000 to 5000 Ω 4-3

58 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Valid range types Model No. Range No. Range type AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 NX-D15 1 to 26 Thermocouple 41 to 52 RTD 81 to 91 Linear 75 to 76 MFB count value NX-D25 1 to 26 Thermocouple NX-D35 Position proportional models NX-D35 Non-position proportional models 41 to 52 Resistance temperature detector (RTD) 81 to 91 Linear 75 to 76 MFB count value 1 to 26 Thermocouple 41 to 52 Resistance temperature detector (RTD) 84 to 91 Linear 75 to 76 MFB count value 1 to 26 Thermocouple 41 to 52 Resistance temperature detector (RTD) 84 to 91 Linear 75 to 76 MFB count value Even if an invalid range is configured, the Al input value is always 0.0. Setting method Note Set the input type according to the order shown below (as needed). (1) Range type (2) Temperature unit (Celsius/Fahrenheit/Kelvin) (3) Decimal point position (4) High and low limits for the alarm (5) If PV, RSP, and AI are assigned, check the control range high and low limits for the proportional band, and the SP high and low limits, and change the settings as needed. For details on the range low and high limits for the proportional band, See 4-3, How to Set Range-Related Items (page 4-5) For the SP low and high limits, See 4-4, LSP Functions (page 4-11) The input indication accuracy may vary depending on the sensor type. Chapter 16, SPECIFICATIONS, PV input (page 16-1) Handling Precautions Correct settings appropriate for the type of the sensor are required. Since incorrect settings cause incorrect PV measurement, an unsafe situation like constant 100 % control output could occur. 4-4

59 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-3 How to Set Range-Related Items Configure the ranges of the input type that was configured according to the instructions in section 4-2, "How to Set the Input Type" (page 4-3). Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop (basic) Range low limit for the proportional band Range low limit used for PID control Range high limit for Range high limit used for PID control proportional band Input-output PV input Alarm setting low limit If the PV is below the setting, under-range is detected. Alarm setting high limit If the PV is over the setting, over-range is detected. Linear scaling low limit Linear signal low limit. (This item must be set only when linear input is selected.) Linear scaling high limit Linear signal high limit. (This item must be set only when linear input is selected.) Multi-function Simple Multi-function Filter 0.00 to s Simple Bias to U Multi-function Ratio to How to Set the Range for Proportional Band Range low and high limits for proportional band are used for PID control. Set the range low and high limits for proportional band as needed according to the PV input range for operation. Execute PID tuning after setting the range for proportional band. If the range is changed, tune the PID again. Setting method Example: Using loop 1 PV in a K thermocouple range of 0.0 to C in the loop control (basic setting) bank, make setting as follows. Item name Settings (Loop 1) Range low limit for proportional band 0.0 (Loop 1) Range high limit for proportional band Note Other than setting the input type as shown in 4-2, How to Set Input Type (page 4-3), set range-related items as needed. Since settings are initialized automatically as in the examples shown below, re-setting is usually not necessary. As shown below, parameters are initialized only when any of the range type, temperature unit or decimal point position is set differently. Initialization is not executed if the same value is set. If the range type is changed to thermocouple/rtd, usually it is not necessary to change settings other than the range type. However, if needed, set the decimal point position, temperature unit, alarm setting high and low limits, range high and low limits for proportional band. 4-5

60 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL If the range type is changed to linear, usually it is not necessary to change settings other than the linear scaling high and low limits. The alarm setting low and high limits are initialized to and respectively. In the range set by user, an alarm occurs if the input is the allowable minimal input or less, or the allowable maximum input or more. If the range type is changed after PV, RSP, and AI are assigned, check the high and low limit settings for the alarm, as well as the control range high and low limits for the proportional band and the SP high and low limits, and change the settings as needed. Parameter initialization when a range type is set Input type Alarm setting high limit/ low limit Range high limit/low limit for the proportional band Decimal point position Thermocouple, resistance temperature Yes* 1 Yes*1 Yes*2 detector (RTD) Linear Yes*3 Yes*4 Yes*5 *1. The default setting varies depending on the temperature unit. *2. The maximum decimal point position is set for the range type and temperature unit. *3. The alarm setting low and high limits are set to and respectively. *4. The current linear scaling high and low limits are set. *5. 1 is set. Parameter initialization when a temperature unit is set Input type Alarm setting high limit/ low limit Range high limit/low limit for the proportional band Decimal point position Thermocouple, resistance temperature Yes* 1 Yes*1 Yes*2 detector (RTD) Linear Yes*3 Yes*4 Yes*5 *1. The default setting varies depending on the temperature unit. *2. The maximum decimal point position is set for the range type. *3. The alarm setting low and high limits are set to and respectively. *4. The currently set linear scaling high limit/low limit are set. *5. 0 is set. Parameter initialization when the decimal point position is set Input type Alarm setting high limit/ low limit Range high limit/low limit for the proportional band Thermocouple, resistance temperature Yes* 1 Yes*1 detector (RTD) Linear Yes*2 Yes*3 *1. The default setting varies depending on the temperature unit. *2. The alarm setting low and high limits are set to and respectively. *3. The currently set linear scaling high limit/low limit are set. 4-6

61 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Parameter initialization when linear scaling is set Input type Range high limit/low limit for the proportional band Linear Yes* 1 *1. The linear range high and low limits are set for the range for proportional band. How to set the linear scaling The linear scaling low limit and high limit are set when the input type is DC voltage or DC current. Set the linear scaling low limit and high limit to suit the output range (engineering range) of the connected module. Setting method Specifications of transmitter Output signal Example: PV1 used with a pressure transmitter connected Setting of this module Output range Folder name Bank name Item name Settings 4 madc 0.0 kpa Input-output PV input Linear scaling low limit (PV1) madc 10.0 kpa PV input Linear scaling high limit (PV1) 10.0 How to set square root extraction Square root extraction is possible when the range type is linear. Square root extraction of normalized input data (0.0 to %) is executed and the results are used for the linear scaling high and low limits. To use square root extraction, set the square root extraction dropout to a value other than 0.0. If not using square root extraction, set the value to 0.0. The dropout function makes the calculation result 0.0 % if the input is smaller than the set value. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Input-output PV input Square root drop out 0.0 to 10.0 No square root extraction if set to 0.0. Multi-function Output after square root extraction (PVout) 100%FS Y= Xin/ Formula: X : PVin (0 to 100% FS of linear range) Output after square root extraction (PVout) = X/ %FS PVin Square root extraction dropout (0.0 to 10.0%) Note If the input is less than 0.0, it is output directly. In ROM versions 2.01 [1_0_1] and later, the square root extraction range is % of the normalized input. In a range of %, input values are output as they are. In ROM versions 2.02 [1_0_2] and later, the square root extraction range is % of the normalized input. 4-7

62 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL How to set the PV filter The PV filter is a first-order lag filter used if the PV fluctuates sharply and repeatedly out of control or if it flutters due to noise, etc. The larger the setting is, the less frequently the PV changes. Under normal circumstances, keep the filter at its initial value of 0.0. PV filter formula OUT = OUT_1 + (IN OUT_1)/(T/Ts + 1) IN: Input to the filter OUT: The current filter calculation output OUT_1: The last filter calculation output T: Filter setting (s) Ts: Sampling cycle (according to the controller setting) How to change the alarm setting The default alarm setting is determined by the input type. In the module, making the PV input range narrow can change the alarm setting. For details on the alarm default settings, refer to the table shown below. Example: Changing the alarm setting of PV1 (K thermocouple 200 to C) 270 C 1360 C Low limit error Alarm setting low limit to high limit determined by the input type High limit error Alarm setting is changed 270 C 1360 C Low limit error Alarm setting low limit to high limit determined by the setting High limit error 80 C Alarm setting low limit 880 C Alarm setting high limit Example: Changing the alarm setting of PV1 (DC voltage, scaling 0 to 1000) Linear scaling low limit to high limit Low limit error 100 Alarm setting low limit to high limit determined by the input type (-10 to +110% of range) 1100 High limit error Low limit error 100 Alarm setting low limit to high limit determined by the setting Alarm setting is changed 1100 High limit error 50 Alarm setting low limit 500 Alarm setting high limit 4-8

63 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Handling Precautions Even if the alarm setting high and low limits are changed to values outside the alarm setting range that is determined by the input type, the alarm settings are not changed. Alarm setting (low limit) Alarm setting (high limit) Low limit error Alarm setting low limit to high limit determined by the input type High limit error Alarm setting low limit determined by the setting Invalid Alarm setting high limit Invalid An alarm AI values are fixed at the default alarm settings as shown below. Note Default alarm settings Thermocouple Range type Sensor type Celsius Default alarm settings Low limit high limit 1 K 270 C 1360 C 2 K 120 C 1320 C 3 K 80 C 880 C 4 K 60.0 C C 5 K 40.0 C C 6 K C C 7 K C C 8 J 120 C 1320 C 9 J 80.0 C C 10 J 60.0 C C 11 J C C 12 E 80.0 C C 13 E 60.0 C C 14 T C C 15 R 160 C 1760 C 16 S 160 C 1760 C 17 B 180 C 1820 C 18 N 130 C 1430 C 19 PL II 130 C 1430 C 20 WRe C 1540 C 21 WRe C 2530 C 22 Ni-Ni, Mo 130 C 1430 C 23 PR C 2090 C 24 DIN U C C 25 DIN L C C 26 Gold/iron-Chromel C 87.0 C 4-9

64 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL RTD Range type Sensor type Celsius Default alarm settings Low limit high limit 41 Pt C C 42 JPt C C 43 Pt C C 44 JPt C C 45 Pt C C 46 JPt C C 47 Pt C C 48 JPt C C 49 Pt C C 50 JPt C C 51 Pt C C 52 JPt C C Linear Range type Sensor type Default alarm settings 81 DC current to (Decimal point position = 1) DC voltage 91 MFB count value Range type Sensor type Default alarm settings MFB to *If the sensor type is MFB, do not change the alarm setting. 4-10

65 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-4 LSP Functions Up to four SP groups can be selected for each loop. Additionally, the number of SP groups can be restricted by setting the "SP system group" in the setup bank. SP system group Select the number of LSP groups for a loop. 6-4, How to Use the Multi-SP (page 6-15) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Setup SP system group 1 to 4 Simple Multi-function LSP Up to 4 LSP groups can be set for a loop. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level SP LSP LSP1 SP low limit to high limit Simple LSP2 Multi-function LSP3 LSP4 PID group definition A PID group No. used for LSP/RSP can be set. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level SP LSP PID group definition 1 (for LSP) PID group definition 2 (for LSP) PID group definition 3 (for LSP) PID group definition 4 (for LSP) RSP PID group definition (for RSP)) 1 to 4 Simple Multi-function 1 to 4 Multi-function SP group No. An LSP group number can be set for each loop. The SP group selection can be changed for loops having 2 or more SP system groups. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level SP SP group selection SP group selection 1 to 4 Simple Multi-function SP low and high limits The SP high and low limits can be set for each loop in order to specify the SP range. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level SP SP configuration SP low limit to U SP high limit (Depends on loop PV/SP decimal point position) Simple Multi-function 4-11

66 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL LSP ramp RSP ramp It is possible to change the SP with a constant SP ramp. For details, refer to: 6-5, How to Change the RSP with Constant Ramp (page 6-17) When the RSP is changed, the SP can be changed with a constant ramp. For details, refer to: 6-6, How to Change the RSP with Constant Ramp (page 6-18) Note LSP (local set point): set point stored in the module. RSP (remote set point): set point given by an external analog input. 4-12

67 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-5 How to Set the Decimal Point Position The decimal point positions of items related to the loop PV/SP can be set. Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) Loop PV/SP decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digits after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Multi-function The decimal point position of this setting is applied to the following displays and setup items: Folder name Bank name Item name Remarks Basic Loop control (basic) Range low and high limits for proportional band SP SP configuration SP low and high limits PID PID Differential 1 to 4 SP LSP LSP1 to LSP4 SP RSP RSP Comm. (device ) PV (loop), SP Basic Comm. (operation) LSP Even when the decimal point position is changed, the settings are not changed. (Within the settable range) Example: (No decimal point one digit after the decimal point) Handling Precautions For the thermocouple and resistance temperature detector (RTD), the number of settable digits for the decimal point position is determined by range type. Refer to the range column of the table in 4-2, How to Set the Input Type (PV Input) n Input types (page 4-2). Use a decimal point position that is within the range determined by the range type. 4-13

68 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-6 How to Set the Loop Control Action Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) Simple Multi-function The basic operation of the PID control is set. Heating: Reverse action (MV decreases as the PV increases. Generally, this action is used for heating control.) 100% MV SP 0% Proportional band PV Cooling: Direct action (MV increases as the PV increases. Generally, this action is used for cooling control.) 100% MV SP 0% Proportional band PV Heating and cooling MV Output (Heat) SP Output (Cool) 100% 0% Proportional band PV 4-14

69 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL ON/OFF action: Reverse action MV ON SP OFF ON/OFF control Differential PV ON/OFF action: Direct action MV ON SP OFF ON/OFF control Differential PV Example: Heating and cooling MV assigned to output In this example, heating MV is assigned to analog current output 1 and cooling MV is assigned to analog current output 2 in loop 1 of an analog current output model. (1) Configure the settings as shown below in the loop (basic) bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) (Loop 1) Control action 2: Heat/Cool Simple Multi-function (Loop 1) Heating/Cooling control dead zone 0.0 Multi-function (2) Configure the settings as shown below in the continuous output bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Inputoutput Continuous output (Continuous output 1) Ourput range 0: 4 to 20 ma Simple (Continuous output 1) Output type 2: Heat MV Multi-function (Continuous output 1) Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1 (Continuous output 1) Output decimal point position 1: 1 digits after the decimal point (Continuous output 1) Output scaling low limit 0.0 (Continuous output 1) Output scaling high limit (Continuous output 2) Output type 0: 4 to 20 ma (Continuous output 2) Output type 3: Cool MV (Continuous output 2) Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1 (Continuous output 2) Output decimal point position 1: 1 digits after the decimal point (Continuous output 2) Output scaling high limit 0.0 (Continuous output 2) Output scaling high limit

70 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-7 How to Set Outputs (continuous output and time proportional output) Setup items vary depending on the type of output and operation method. Output types and applications Output type Transistor Analog current Analog voltage Application Time proportional output (MV) Digital output Continuous output (MV) Transmission output (PV, SP, etc.) Continuous output settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Inputoutput Continuous Output range Analog current output 0: 4 to 20 ma, 1: 0 to 20 ma output Analog current output 0: 1 to 5 V, 1: 0 to 5 V, 2: 0 to10 V, 3: 2 to 10 V Output type* 1 Loop/channel definition * 1 Output decimal point position Output scaling low limit Output scaling high limit Linearization table group definition 0: Fixed at 0 %, 1: MV, 2: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Cool MV (for heat/cool control), 4: PV (loop), 5: SP, 6: Deviation (PV - SP), 7: PV (input channel) n numbers (page App.-13) 0: Invalid 1 to 4: Loop /channel 1 to 4 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point to U (Value assigned to the low limit of the output) to U (Value assigned to the high limit of the output) 0: Disabled, 1: 1group, 2: 2 groups, 3: 3 groups, 4: 4 groups 5: 5 groups, 6: 6 groups, 7: 7 groups, 8: 8 groups Simple Multi-function Multi-function *1: If any of 1 to 6 is set for "output type" on the NX-D35, it is not possible to set 3 or 4 for "loop/channel definition." Each continuous output channel must be configured. Select the analog current and analog voltage ranges in "output range"(item). Set the output type and loop/channel definition. In "output decimal point position" (item), set the decimal point position for the output scaling low and high limits. Scaling output of the settings for the output type can be executed with the output scaling low limit and high limits. Reverse scaling is possible if the high limit is set to be lower than the low limit. The figure below is an example where MV scaling output is executed for analog current output (4 to 20 ma). 110% 100% (20mA) Output 0% (4mA) 10% 0% Low limit 100% High limit MV(%) However, if the output range is 0 to 20 ma, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V, the output is 0 to 110%. 4-16

71 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Time proportional output settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type* 1 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/cool control) n numbers (page App.-13) Simple Multi-function Latch (Invalid setting) Multi-function Time proportional operation type Min. ON/OFF time Time proportional cycle Linearization table group definition 0: Control oriented 1: Actuator-life oriented 0 to 300 ms 0.1 to s 0: Disabled 1: 1group 2: 2 groups 3: 3 groups 4: 4 groups 5: 5 groups 6: 6 groups 7: 7 groups 8: 8 groups Simple Multi-function Multi-function Phase shift 0 to ms 7-6, Phase Shift (page 7-9) Multi-function *1. It is not possible to set any of 8 to 12 for the input type on the NX-D35. If the output type is set to any of 1 to 12, or a standard numerical code, the time proportional output is executed according to the settings of the time proportional cycle. Depending on the time proportional operation type, the time proportional output is executed as follows. If "0: Control oriented" is set, the output may be turned ON twice or more within the time proportional cycle. If "1: Actuator-life oriented" is set, there is no output or the output is turned only once within the time proportional cycle. When setting is 0 ON OFF PID control result Time proportional cycle Time proportional cycle When setting is 1 Time proportional cycle Time proportional cycle ON OFF PID control result The minimum ON/OFF time is valid. However, even if 0 is set, the setting is 1 ms. The latch is invalid. 4-17

72 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL ON/OFF control settings In the case of MV output for ON/OFF control, set as shown below. 5-13, ON /OFF Control (page 5-20) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level OUT/DO output Output type* 1 1: Loop 1 MV 4: Loop 2 MV 7: Loop 3 MV 10: Loop 4 MV Simple Multi-function Latch (Invalid setting) Multi-function Time proportional operation type Min. ON/OFF time Time proportional cycle 0: Control oriented Simple 10 ms (User sets any value) Multi-function 2.0 s Phase shift 0 ms Multi-function PID Differential 1 to to Simple Multi-function *1. It is not possible to set 7 or 10 for the input type on the NX^D35. ON/OFF output settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Inputoutput Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type Latch Time proportional operation type Min. ON/OFF time 0: OFF 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit n bits (page App.-12) 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) (Invalid setting) Simple Multi-function Multi-function Simple Multi-function 0 to 300 ms Time proportional cycle (Invalid setting) Phase shift (Invalid setting) Multi-function Note If any of the standard bit Nos to 2047 is set in the output type, the ON/OFF status of this standard bit is output. Updating of standard bits is excecuted by cycle period. 4-18

73 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 4-8 How to Set Position Proportional Output Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15/25. If either of the following conditions is satisfied, up to 2 outputs for position proportioning can be used. The model No. is NX-D35 and M(transistor output for position proportional control) is selected as the output type. The model No. is NX-D35 and 4 (4 digital outputs for position proportional control) is selected as the option. 1-2, Model Selection Table (page 1-2) This function is available for ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. Loop settings (for position proportioning) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Setup Loop type Any of the following can be used. Do not select any of other settings. If PV3 and PV4 are used for MFB input, they cannot be used as RSP. 1: 2 loops 8: 2 loops (RSP) + MV branching output 9: 2 loops Position proportioning settings Multi-function Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Position proportioning Output type Control method selection Dead zone 0.5 to 25.0 % 0: Stop time proportional control 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV 3: Loop 1 cool MV 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV 6: Loop 2 cool MV 2048 to 3071: depending the standard numerical code 0: MFB control + estimated position control 1: MFB control + close upon line break 2: Estimated position control 3: Estimated position control + position adjustment at power-on Simple Multi-function Long life Auto-tuning Loop assignment Linearization table group definition Fully closed FB value Fully open FB value Full opening time 0: Control oriented 1: Service life oriented 0: Stop 1: Start 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 0: Disabled 1: 1group 2: 2 groups 3: 3 groups 4: 4 groups 5: 5 groups 6: 6 groups 7: 7 groups 8: 8 groups 0 to to to s Multi-function 4-19

74 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL PV channel settings for MFB Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level OUT/DO settings PV input Range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω 76: MFB 1000 to 5000 Ω Decimal point position 0 (Do not change the default setting.) Temperature units 0: Celsius ( C) (Do not change the default setting.) Simple Multi-function Alarm setting low limit (Do not change the default setting.) Alarm setting high limit (Do not change the default setting.) Multi-function Cold junction (No settings) compensation Linear scaling low limit (No settings) Simple Linear scaling high limit (No settings) Multi-function Square root extraction dropout (No settings) Multi-function Filter 0.00 Simple Bias 0.0 (Use the value under normal circumstances. Multi-function Ratio (Use the value under normal circumstances. Linearization table group definition 0: Disabled Multi-function Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Inputoutput Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output 2 Simple Multi-function Latch (No settings) Multi-function Time proportional operation type Min. ON/OFF time Time proportional cycle Linearization table group definition 0: Control oriented (Do not change the default setting.) Simple 10 ms (Do not change the default setting.) Multi-function 2.0 s (Do not change the default setting.) 0: Disabled Multi-function Phase shift 0 s (Do not change the default setting.) Multi-function 4-20

75 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Default settings for position proportional output models Default setting for loop configuration Folder name Bank name Item name Default Basic Setup Loop type 1: 2 loops Default settings for position proportioning (position proportioning 1 and 2) Folder name Bank name Item name Default Basic Position proportioning Output type Position proportioning 1 1: Loop 1 MV Position proportioning 2 4: Loop 2 MV Control method selection 0: MFB control + estimated position control Dead zone 10.0 % Long life 0: Control oriented Loop assignment Position proportioning 1 1: Loop 1 Position proportioning 2 2: Loop 2 Linearization table group definition 0: Disabled Default settings for MFB input ranges (for PV 3 and PV 4) Folder name Bank name Item name Default Inputoutput PV input Range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω Decimal point position 0: No decimal point Temperature units 0: Celsius ( C) Alarm setting low limit (Do not change the default setting.) Alarm setting high limit (Do not change the default setting.) Cold junction compensation (No settings) Linear scaling low limit (No settings) Linear scaling high limit (No settings) Square root extraction dropout (No settings) Filter 0.00 Bias 0.0 (Do not change the default setting.) Ratio (Do not change the default setting.) Linearization table group definition 0: Disabled Default setting for loop (input assignment) for PV 3 and PV 4 Folder name Bank name Item name Default Basic Loop Input assignment AI assignment 0: Celsius ( C) (Do not change the setting.) If using PV 3 and PV 4 as MFB inputs on a position proportional control model, use channels 3 and 4 assigned to AI with the above settings. Default settings for UFLED 7-12, UFLED (page 7-21) 4-21

76 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Default settings for the NX-D35 _ M (position proportional control model) Folder name Bank name Item name Default OUT/DO output OUT 1 output type 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 OUT 2 output type 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 OUT 3 output type 16: Opening output for position proportional output 2 OUT 4 output type 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 DO 1 output type 1088: Event 1 DO 2 output type 1089: Event 2 DO 3 output type 1090: Event 3 DO 4 output type 1091: Event 4 PV input PV 3 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω PV 4 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω Default settings for the NX-D35 _ 4_ (position proportional control model) Default settings for the NX-D35 _ C4_ (position proportional control model) Folder name Bank name Item name Default Inputoutput Folder name Bank name Item name Default Inputoutput OUT/DO output OUT 1 output type 1088: Event 1 OUT 2 output type 1089: Event 2 OUT 3 output type 1090: Event 3 OUT 4 output type 1091: Event 4 DO 1 output type 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 DO 2 output type 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 DO 3 output type 16: Opening output for position proportional output 2 DO 4 output type 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 PV input PV 3 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω PV 4 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω Inputoutput Continuous output OUT 1 Output type 1: MV Loop/channel definition 1: loop 1/channel 1 OUT 2 Output type 1: MV Loop/channel definition 2: loop 2/channel 2 OUT 3 Output type 0: Fixed at 0 % OUT 4 Output type 0: Fixed at 0 % OUT/DO output DO 1 output type 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 DO 2 output type 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 DO 3 output type 16: Opening output for position proportional output 2 DO 4 output type 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 PV input PV 3 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω PV 4 range type 75: MFB 100 to 1000 Ω 4-22

77 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Settings Do the following operations. If using MFB input, configure the PV input range type corresponding to the motor resistance. Execute auto-tuning using for the universal monitor of the loaderafter connecting the external device. If needed, configure other settings. Usually, it is not necessary to change the default settings. Control method selection 0: MFB control + estimated position control If MFB input is normal, control the motor using the current MFB value. If MFB input is abnormal, control the motor using the estimated MFB value. This status is called estimated position control For example, if the motor brings the feedback potentiometer to a worn position, MFB input changes suddenly. The module detects this sudden change as abnormal and estimates the correct MFB position. In addition, the motor is also controlled using the estimated MFB value if an MFB error (AL21/AL23), a PV hight limit error (AL05/AL07), or a PV low limit error (AL06/AL08) occurs. Under estimated position control, the difference between the actual valve opening and the estimated MFB value increases gradually. Thus, the module corrects errors by opening or closing the valve fully so that closing output and opening output are always ON when MV 0.0 % and MV %, respectively. However, if the MV setting is limited within a range of 0.1 to 99.9 % for the MV low/high limit or broken line function, or if MV is less than 0.0 % or more than %, no correction is made. The following factors can be considered as cases of the problem. Valve opening adjustment failure Worn feedback potentiometer or insufficient resolution Incorrect MFB wiring Note Whether estimated position control is executed or not can be confirmed with standard bit (1792 to 1919): MFB1 estimating, or MFB2 estimating. Estimated position control is assigned to UFLED before shipment from the factory. 5-1, Operation Displays n F0 to 9 (page 5-2) Handling Precautions If using this function, execute auto-tuning. 1: MFB control + close upon line break Stops control by closing the valve if MFB is disconnected. Handling Precautions If using this function, execute auto-tuning. 4-23

78 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL 2: MFB control + estimated position control Estimated position control is always executed. Regardless of MFB wiring, this function controls the motor using the estimated MFB value. If using this function, set the full opening time correctly. None of MFB error (AL21/AL23), PV hight limit error (AL05/AL07), and PV low limit error (AL06/AL08) occurs. When the MV is 0 % or %, the module closes or opens the valve forcibly to narrow the difference between the actual valve opening and the estimated MFB value. 3: Estimated position control + position adjustment at power-on This function turns on the opening output for the full opening time when the power is turned on so that the estimated MFB (0.0 %) and the valve opening match. The rest of operation is the same as that of "2: MFB control + estimated position control." If using this function, set the full opening time correctly. 4-24

79 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Dead zone If "long life" is set to 1 (Service life oriented), the dead zone can be neither set nor displayed. It is set as the dead zone between valve opening and closing for position proportional control. As a setting guideline, the minimum value of the dead zone is a value at which the motor stops hunting while the dead zone is being changed during constant manual output. If the settings have little margin, the motor will be working all the time resulting in a shorter motor life. The default setting is 10.0 %. Using these notes as guidelines, configure the settings taking control results and the motor life into account. Dead zone closing output ON * * MFB(%) opening output ON Control output(%) * A quarter of the dead zone setting value Long life Note In the case of setting 1 (Service life oriented), the settings of "MV increase change limit," "MV decrease change limit," and "Dead zone" are ignored and the optimal value for "Service life oriented." In the case of setting 1 (Service life oriented), even if the settings of "MV increase change limit," "MV decrease change limit," and "Dead zone" are written to parameters, they are not applied to operation. Auto-tuning If selecting "0: MFB control + estimated position control" or "1:MFB control + close upon line break" for "Control method selection," be sure to set auto-tuning. If autotuning is executed, the fully open FB value, fully closed FB value, and full opening time are automatically set. Handling Precautions Auto-tuning can be executed for our ECM3000 Control Motor only. For some other motors, auto-tuning may be impossible. How to set the auto-tuning (1) Set "0: MFB control + estimated position control" or "1:MFB control + close upon line break" for "Control method selection." (2) Write 1 (start) to the auto-tuning using the universal monitor of the loader. (3) The auto-tuning starts. Closing output turns ON. The motor begins to close the valve. If counting becomes stable, fully closed tuning is complete and its count value is written to the fully closed FB value. Open output turns ON. The motor begins to close the valve. If counting becomes stable, fully open tuning is complete and its count value is written to the fully open FB value. The time that was required to fully open the fully closed valve is written to the fully open FB value. However, even if the time exceeds s, it is displays as s. 4-25

80 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Note If stopping tuning, write 0 (stop) to the auto-tuning using the universal monitor of the loader. In the case of the following, each adjusted value returns to the previous (unadjusted) state with error AL22 (MFB1 adjustment error) or AL24 (MFB2 adjustment error). AL22 or AL24 is deleted from the display only if the next auto-tuning is normally complete or the power is reset. The difference between fully open and closed counts is less than 300. The time that is require to fully open the fully closed valve is less tha 5 s. When MFB1 input error (AL21) or MFB2 input error (AL23) occurs. The time that is required for stable MFB counting exceeds Incorrect wiring for MFB or opening/closing output (But all problem wiring cannot be detected.) For the default settings of the fully closed FB value, fully open FB value, and full opening adjustment time, see the table shown below. Item name Default Fully closed FB value Fully open FB value Full opening time 39.0 Handling Precautions If the power is turned off during auto-tuning for position proportional control, auto-tuning is not resumed when the power is turned on again. Regardless of AUTO/MANUAL, RUN/READY, or LSP/RSP mode, auto-tuning for position proportional control can be executed. Motor wiring and operation with auto-tuning There are 2 wiring methods between the module and motor: normal wiring and reverse wiring. In normal wiring, the motor rotates clockwise (cw) if control output of the controller increases. If reverse rotation of the motor is desired for control for cooling, etc., there are the following 2 methods. Switching the control direction on the controller with no change in wiring Employing reverse wiring The module can switch the control direction (direct/reverse). If wiring between the module and motor is normal, trouble shooting is easier in both control directions. Thus, it is recommended for users to use normal wiring as much as possible. 4-26

81 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL As shown below, an example of wiring between ECM3000 and the module. Normal wiring Reverse wiring This unit This unit A1 A0 A2 B7 B5 B6 A1 A0 A2 B7 B5 B Y T G Y T G R L R L CW CCW CW CCW CW Open CCW Close CW Open CCW Close Motor Motor Operation during auto-tuning in normal wiring CW : Clock Wise ( ) CCW : Counter Clock Wise ( ) The module has a function to detect incorrect wiring of the motor, MFB line break, or short-circuit. Input errors and line break (page 4-29) As well as normal wiring, revers wiring is regarded as normal and no alarm is activated. In addition, in the case of "0: MFB control + estimated position control" for "Control method selection," if MFB is disconnected, operation is continued. The blow table shows that how MFB1 operation on the NX-D35 with output type M ( transistor output for position proportional control) varies depending on wiring if auto-tuning is applied to the motor (the setting is 1: Start). The motor starts at the fully closed position (limit of counterclockwise direction). Conditions are OUT/DO output: default, OUT1: opening, OUT2: closing. In the table, PV3 values are examples. An alarm is displayed after the valve is fully open or closed. The MFB status can be checked as the status of the following items. An example of MFB1 is shown below. Each status of position proportioning can be confirmed with communication addresses or standard bits. Monitoring during operation (page 4-29) Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Motor rotation Remarks direction CCW If OUT2 terminal is ON and the motor rotates counter clockwise, terminals 1 and 2 on the motor are in normal wiring. CW Operation during auto-tuning in normal wiring Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Motor rotation direction CW CCW Remarks If OUT2 terminal is ON and the motor rotates clockwise, terminals 1 and 2 on the motor are in reverse wiring. 4-27

82 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Alarms due to incorrect wiring and their causes Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Motor rotation direction Alarm display Cause CCW AL22 G n Y: Reverse connection CW Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Motor rotation Alarm display direction CCW None However, the CW MBF value and valve opening do not match. Cause T n G: Reverse connection Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Decreasing and increasing are uncertain. (The motor rotation direction changes before the valve is fully open or closed.) Motor rotation direction Alarm display Cause CCW AL22 or None T n Y: Reverse connection CW Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Motor rotation direction Alarm display Cause CW AL22 1 n 2: Reverse connection CCW Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Becomes stable after increasing (2000 g 4000) Becomes stable after decreasing (4000 g 2000) Motor rotation direction Alarm display Cause CW AL22 1 n 2: Reverse connection CCW and T n G: Reverse connection Operation during autotuning Closing Opening OUT terminal status OUT1 terminal status (open) = OFF OUT2 terminal status (closed) = ON OUT1 terminal status (open) = ON OUT2 terminal status (closed) = OFF PV3 (MFB count value) Decreasing and increasing are uncertain. (The motor rotation direction changes before the valve is fully open or closed.) Motor rotation direction Alarm display Cause CW AL22 or None 1 n 2: Reverse connection CCW T n Y: Reverse connection 4-28

83 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Input errors and line break The following alarms are activated if an input error or line break occurs. MFB1 error MFB1 error nput error G line break Y /T line break High limit error : AL21 and AL05 AL21 and AL06 AL21 and AL05 Low limit error : AL21 and AL06 High limit error : AL23and AL07 AL23 and AL08 AL23 and AL07 Low limit error : AL23 and AL08 Monitoring during operation The following values and status can be monitored. Chapter 12, LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA, Appendix-2, Bits and Numbers numerical codes (folder name: numerical code, bank name: Numbers: ) MFB1 opening (including estimation), MFB2 opening (including estimation) MFB1 opening (actual value), MFB2 opening (actual value) numerical codes (folder name: numerical code, bank name: Numbers: ) MV for Position proportioning 1 MV for Position proportioning 2 bits (folder name: bit, bank name: Bits: ) MFB1 G line break, MFB2 G line break MFB1 Y line break, MFB2 Y line break MFB1 T/multiline break, MFB2 T/multiline break MFB1 input error (AL21), MFB2 input error (AL23) MFB1 in auto-tuning, MFB2 in auto-tuning MFB1 in estimating MFB2 in estimating MFB1 input error (AL22), MFB2 input error (AL24) MFB1 Open, MFB2 Open MFB1 Closed, MFB2 Closed Wiring to a motor Do correct wiring so that the valve starts opening when the the terminal that sends signals for opening is energized. (Wire correctly so that the valve starts to close when the terminal that sends signals for closing is energized.) For details, refer to the user's manual of the motor. Chapter 3, WIRING Handling Precautions Do not run wires for motor relay contacts and for MFB input through the same conduit or duct. Otherwise, module malfunction or failure could result due to motor noises. 4-29

84 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Connection example with the ECM300 As shown below, an example of wiring between ECM3000 and the module. If the NX-D35 has the default settings, wiring varies depending on the model number as shown below. For instrumentation with the ECM3000, be sure to see the user's manual for the ECM3000. Motor wiring for output type M ( transistor output for position proportional control) M Wiring of position proportioning 1 ECM3000 For ECM3000, the wiring is L: CCW and R: CW. For details, refer to the user's manual of ECM L R G Y T PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 1 PV 4 1 OP 4 F0 F1 F5 F9 NX-D35N B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA A0 A1 OPEN A2 A3 CLOSE A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA LOCK M Wiring of position proportioning 2 ECM3000 For ECM3000, the wiring is L: CCW and R: CW. For details, refer to the user's manual of ECM L R G Y T PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 1 PV 4 1 OP 4 F0 F1 F5 F9 NX-D35N B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA A0 A1 A2 A3 OPEN A4 A5 CLOSE A6 A7 A8 A9 AA LOCK 4-30

85 Chapter 4. FUNCTIONS NECESSARY FOR CONTROL Motor wiring for option 4 (4 digital outputs for position proportional control) M ECM L R G Y T Wiring of position proportioning 1 OPEN PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 1 PV 4 1 OP 4 F0 F1 F5 F9 For ECM3000, the wiring is L: CCW and R: CW. For details, refer to the user's manual of ECM3000. CLOSE NX-D35N B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA LOCK M ECM L R G Y T Wiring of position proportioning 2 PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL 1 PV 4 1 OP 4 F0 F1 F5 F9 For ECM3000, the wiring is L: CCW and R: CW. For details, refer to the user's manual of ECM3000. OPEN CLOSE NX-D35N B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA LOCK 4-31

86

87 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-1 Operation Displays There are LED indicators and a button on the front of the body. There are 2 types of LED blinking: fast blink (0.2 s cycle) and slow blink (1.4 s cycle). PWR, RUN, MOD, COM, NST, FAIL Lighting patterns of the LEDs on the top are shown and described in the table. LED name Color Lighting status Description PWR Green Lit Power-on OFF Power is off RUN Green Lit RUN mode (normal operation mode) Fast blink Slow blink OFF Operation mode is RUN, and loop mode is READY for 1 loop or more IDLE mode (operation mode) Modes other than the above MOD Orange Fast blink Parameters from the loader is being written. OFF Normal operation mode COM Green Lit The module's own Ethernet packets are being received. OFF No module's own Ethernet packets is received. NST* 1 Orange Lit Chain connection with non-ring communications. Fast blink Chain ring connection disconnected (ring disconnected somewhere) Slow blink Chain ring connection disconnected (ring disconnection between the own node and adjacent node ) OFF Ring communications in chain connection is normal. FAIL Red Lit Hard failure Slow blink Soft failure OFF No errors *1: The status of ring communications can also be checked from host communications. Appendix-3 Status of Ring Communication (Net Status) (page App-14). PV 1 to 4 Lighting patterns of LEDs PV 1 4 on the middle are shown and described in the table below. LED name Color Lighting status Description PV1 Green Fast blink Ch. 1 PV input: Range high or low limit error OFF Ch. 1 PV input: Normal, or not used PV2 Green Fast blink Ch. 2 PV input: Range high or low limit error OFF Ch. 2 PV input: Normal, or not used PV3 Green Fast blink Ch. 3 PV input: Range high or low limit error OFF Ch. 3 PV input: Normal, or not used PV4 Green Fast blink Ch. 4 PV input: Range high or low limit error OFF Ch. 4 PV input: Normal, or not used 5-1

88 Chapter 5. OPERATION OP1 to 4 Lighting patterns of LEDs OP1 4 on the middle row are shown and described in the table below. LED name Color Lighting status Description OP1 Green Lit Transistor output ch.1: ON OFF Analog current output ch. 1, or analog voltage output ch. 1 OP2 Green Lit Transistor output ch. 2 ON OFF Analog current output ch. 2, or analog voltage output ch. 2 OP3 Green Lit Transistor output ch. 3 ON OFF Analog current output ch. 3, or analog voltage output ch. 3 OP4 Green Lit Transistor output ch. 4 ON OFF Analog current output ch. 4, or analog voltage output ch. 4 F0 to 9 It is possible to set the lighting condition and pattern only for the normal lighting of the LED (F0) on the right end of the middle row and LEDs (F1 9) on the bottom row. An initial value is shown as an alarm or event. LED name Color Folder name Bank name Item name Settings F0 Red Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047: bit code Default Position proportional output 1792 (Representative of all alarms) Default Position proportioning 1792 (Representative of all alarms) UFLED settings Lighting status 0: Off 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) 1: Lit 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) F1 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1088: Event : Event 1 UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F2 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1089: Event (MFB1 OPEN) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F3 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1090: Event (MFB1 CLOSE) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F4 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1091: Event (MFB1 OPEN) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F5 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1092: Event (MFB1 CLOSE) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F6 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1093: Event (MFB1 in estimating) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 5: Slow blink F7 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1094: Event (MFB2 in estimating) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 5: Slow blink F8 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) Communicating Communicating UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 3 (Fast blink) 3 (Fast blink) F9 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1968 (Parameter error) 1968 (Parameter error) UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 3 (Fast blink) 3 (Fast blink) 5-2

89 Chapter 5. OPERATION Display when power is turned ON When the power is on, first, LEDs are lit as shown in the table below. And then indicate the state of operation. Order LED lighting status ( : Lit, : Off, : Flashing, : Depends on the status) Top LEDs PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL Middle LEDs PV1-4 OP1-4 F0 Bottom LEDs F1-9 Status or process 1 Power-off 2 Shortly after power-on 3 LED lighting test (0.5 s) 4 LED lighting test (0.5 s) 5 EEPROM read stability 6 Start of operation 7 Operation display LED lighting pattern under special conditions (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later versions) LED lighting status ( : Lit, : Off, : Slow blink, : Fast blink, : Depends on the status) Top LEDs PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL Middle LEDs PV1-4 OP1-4 F0 Bottom LEDs *1: Chapter 14, TROUBLESHOOTING F1-9 Status or process Module LED lighting function If set using the SLP-NX. When one of the below alarms is activated* 1 AL83: EEPROM not initialized AL84: MAC address error AL85: RAM read/write error AL86: EEPROM read/write error AL87: Base EEPROM read write error AL99: ROM error When one of the below alarms is activated* 1 AL88: Base EEPROM error AL97: EEPROM error(parameter error) When one of the below alarms is activated* 1 AL 54: Base-body model No. mismatch or Ethernet congestion occurring Ethernet congestion occurs in the network. If the congestion continues, check for wrong connections in the network. When one of the below alarms is activated* 1 AL53: Base/module communication setting mismatch 5-3

90 Chapter 5. OPERATION (ROM versions 2.02 [1_0_1] and later versions) LED lighting status ( : Lit, : Off, : Slow blink, : Fast blink, : Depends on the status) Top LEDs PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL Middle LEDs PV1-4 OP1-4 F0 Bottom LEDs F1-9 Status or process Module LED lighting function Wink function If specified with the SLP-NX. Base EEPROM read write error Communication is failed between the body and base, or the base has fatal damage. Turn the power off and then on again. If the error recurs, replace the module. Base EEPROM incompatibility The connected base is not supported. Turn the power OFF and ON again. If the error recurs, recover the base EEPROM using the button. If it is not successful, replace the module. Wrong module insertion The model numbers of the body and the base do not match. Make sure that the inserted module has the correct model No., and then turn the power OFF and ON. If the error recurs, recover the base EEPROM using the button. Ethernet congestion occurs in the network. If the congestion continues, check for wrong connections in the network. Base EEPROM error The body and base parameter information do not match. Turn the power OFF and ON again. If the error recurs, recover the base EEPROM using the button. Button functions The base EEPROM can be recovered using the button. Order LED lighting status ( : Lit, : Off, : Slow blink, : Fast blink, : Depends on the status) Top LEDs PWR RUN MOD COM NST FAIL Middle LEDs PV1-4 OP1-4 F0 Bottom LEDs 1 Normal operation i (Press the button) 2 All top LEDs are off. i (2 seconds elapsed) 3 All top LEDs are lit. i (Release the button) 4 Normal operation F1-9 Status or process The base EEPROM recovery means the elimination of a mismatch between the body and the base when there is a wrong module insertion, a base EEPROM error, or base EEPROM incompatibility. 5-4

91 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-2 Loop Mode The data settings related to the operation modes are shown in the table. For an overview of the operation modes, refer to 1-4, Operation Modes (page 1-7). Bank and settings (loop mode switchover) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Monitor Comm. (device) Comm. (operation) Loop modes RUN/READY AUTO/MANUAL 0: RUN 1: READY 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL AT stop/start 0: AT stop 1: AT start LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP Bank and settings (for MANUAL) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop (extended) Output operation at changing Auto/Manual 0: Bumpless 1: Preset Preset MANUAL value 10.0 to (%) Simple Multi-function Bank and settings (for READY) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop output (MV) Output at READY 10.0 to (%) Simple Multi-function Output at READY (Heat) 10.0 to (%) Output at READY (Cool) 10.0 to (%) Multi-function Bank and settings (for RSP) Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level SP RSP RSP Multi-function PID group definition (for RSP) 1 to 4 (group) 5-5

92 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-3 How to Change Control Mode and Parameters To change control modes or parameters, use the SLP-NX (sold separately) or host communications. This section describes how to change control modes or parameters using theslp-nx. Capability architecture of the SLP-NX The SLP-NX has the following capability architecture. Function name Application SLP-NX Used for registration and communication setting for modules, parameter setting, and read/write of data in modules, communications settings, and parameter settings. Universal monitor Monitoring measured values, and checking and changing parameters through communications with modules How to change parameters The following shows how to use the universal monitor for changing parameters. Ethernet or USB loader cable Register the target module, and perform the communication settings and parameter settings. Read/write the communication settings and parameter settings to the module Check the setting status of the measurement value monitor and parameters, and change the settings Start the loader Start the general monitor 5-6

93 Chapter 5. OPERATION How to change settings Example: switching RUN to READY in PID control Note The following is an example. It is not the only way to make the change. (1) Activate the SLP-NX. (2) Open the project stored in the PC as backup. (3) Connect the PC to the module. (Ethernet) (4) To activate the universal monitor, click [Online] [Monitor]. (5) Click the module to be modified on the directory tree of the universal monitor. (6) To activate communications, click [Monitor] [Start]. (7) To display the dialog box, double-click the [READY/RUN] cell for the desired loop in the "numeric monitor [Settings] tab" on of the numeric monitor screen of the universal monitor screen. (8) Change [0: RUN] to [1: READY] using the pull down key and click the [OK] button. 5-7

94 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-4 How to Manually Output the MV (AUTO/MANUAL) The MV can be manually output to each loop using the universal monitor. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Switch AUTO to MANUAL in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor. (3) Change the MV in the " [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor. 5-8

95 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-5 How to Change to the Remote SP (RSP/LSP) For a loop that already has an RSP, it is possible to switch the LSP to RSP or the reverse using the universal monitor screen. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Switch LSP to RSP in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor. Or switch RSP to LSP. 5-9

96 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-6 How to Stop Control by Switching RUN to READY It is possible to switch RUN to READY or in reverse using the universal monitor. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. Switch RUN to READY in the (2) [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor. Or switch READY to RUN. 5-10

97 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-7 How to Start the Auto Tuning It is possible to start/stop the auto-tuning (AT) using the universal monitor. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Make sure that the PV is correct. Make sure that the control function is ready to use in both RUN and AUTO modes. (3) Start the AT in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor.. (4) The auto-tunning stops automatically. To stop the AT while it is running, change the AT mode to AT stop. 5-11

98 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-8 How to Change the SP There are several methods to change the SP of any loop. Changing the SP used It is possible to change the SP of any loop using the universal monitor screen. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Change the LSP in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor screen.. However, if the SP is in RSP mode, it is not changeable. Changing the SP group selection The SP group selection can be changed for loops having 2 or more SP system groups using the universal monitor screen. However, if the SP group selection is executed by internal contact input, it cannot be changed. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Change the LSP number in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor screen. 5-12

99 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-9 How to Change the PID There are 2 methods to change the PID: changing the PID setting and executing the auto-tuning. Changing the PID setting The PID can be changed using the universal monitor. The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the desired loop using the universal monitor screen. (2) Change the PID in the [Settings] tab of the numeric monitor. Executing auto-tuning 5-7, How to Start the Auto Tuning (page 5-11). 5-13

100 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-10 How to Change the Event Action Point The event action point is changed by using the SLP-NX. There are 2 event setting types: event main setting and event sub-setting. Some events have event main setting alone, some have both types. 6-1, How to Use Events (page 6-1) The procedure is as follows. (1) Display the event setting (operating point) bank using the SLP-NX. (2) Change event main setting or event sub-setting. 5-14

101 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-11 PID Control If the control action is set to 0 (reverse action) or 1 (direct action), control is executed as follows. When integral time 0 and derivative time 0, PID control is executed. When integral time 0 and derivative time = 0, PI control is executed. When integral time = 0 and derivative time 0, PD control is executed. When integral time = 0 and derivative time = 0, P control is executed. Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) Loop (extended) Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) Simple Multi-function Initial output of PID control 10.0 to % Multi-function Integral time Decimal point position for integral time/derivative time 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digits after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point PID control initialization 0: Automatic 1: No initialization 2: With initialization (if a different SP is set) PID PID Proportional band 1 (PID group 1) 0.1 to % Simple Integral time 1 (PID group 1) 0 to s 0.0 to s Depends on the integral time/derivative time decimal point position Derivative time 1 (PID group 1) 0 to s 0.0 to s Depends on the integral time/derivative time decimal point position MV low limit 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % MV high limit 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % Manual reset 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % PID group 2 settings Same as PID group 1 above PID group 3 settings PID group 4 settings Multi-function Simple Multi-function Multi-function 5-15

102 Chapter 5. OPERATION PID control initialization If the control method is not in ON/OFF control, it can be displayed/set. If the PID group is changed associated when the SP or SP group is changed, the PV may not change smoothly or overshoot may occur because the MV becomes the low or high limit due to the change. To prevent this, it is useful to initialize the PID control. The initial output of PID control is used for PID control shortly after the loop mode is changed from READY to RUN, or RUN mode is activated when the power is turned on. Note In IDLE mode, the following takes place regardless of the settings. ROM version 2.01 [1_0_1] or earlier: PID is initialized. ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] or later: PID is not initialized. Setting 0 (Automatic) Automatically determines if the PID needs to be initialized when the SP or SP group is changed, and initializes it if needed. Initialization conditions: The absolute value of the deviation is greater than 5% FS before changing the SP. The MV is at the low limit (OL) or high limit (OH) before changing the SP. The module is neither executing SP ramp nor in RSP mode. Setting 1 (Do not initialize) The PID is not initialized when the SP or SP group is changed. This setting is useful if the continuity of the MV is important when the SP or SP group is changed. Setting 2 (Initialize) Always initializes the PID when the SP or SP group is changed. This setting is useful if the module needs to quickly handle the PV according to the increase or decrease of the MV when the SP or SP group is changed. 5-16

103 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-12 Heat/Cool Control If the control action is set to 2: Heat/Cool, the heat/cool control is executed. Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) Loop (extended) Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) Simple Multi-function Heating/Cooling control dead zone Integral time to % 0: No decimal point Multi-function Decimal point position for integral time/ 1: 1 digits after the decimal point derivative time 2: 2 digits after the decimal point PID PID Proportional band 1 (PID group 1) 0.1 to % Simple Integral time 1 (PID group 1) 0 to s 0.0 to s Depends on the integral time/derivative time decimal point position Derivative time 1 (PID group 1) 0 to s 0.0 to s 0.0 to s The range varies depending on the setting of decimal point position for integral time/derivative time. MV low limit 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % MV high limit 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % Manual reset 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % Proportional band for cooling 1 (PID group 1) Multi-function 0.1 to % Multi-function Integral time for cooling 1 (PID group 1) 0 to s 0.0 to s 0 to s The range varies depending on the setting of decimal point position for integral time/derivative time. Derivative time for cooling 1 (PID group 1) 0.0 to s The range varies depending on the setting of decimal point position for integral time/derivative time. Output low limit for cooling 1 (PID group 1) 10.0 to % Output high limit for cooling 1 (PID group 10.0 to % 1) PID group 2 settings Same as PID group 1 above PID group 3 settings PID group 4 settings Handling Precautions MV branching output and heat/cool control cannot be used at the same time. 5-17

104 Chapter 5. OPERATION Heat/cool control calculations are as follows. Heating PID group Cooling PID group Heat/cool switch Constant P, I, D Heat PID group s MV low/high limit Cool PID group s MV low/high limit PV SP PID control (Reverse action fixed) MV (PID control results) Heat/cool output control Heat MV Cool MV Heating/Cooling control dead zone ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later: Heat/Cool control can be used for up to 4 loops. (up to 2 loops for the NX-D35) ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] and later: Heat/Cool control can be used for up to 2 loops. 4-1, How to Set Position Proportional Output (page 4-1). If MV 50%, the heat PID group will be enabled. If MV < 50%, the cool PID group will be enabled. Setting the heat/cool control dead zone determines the relationships between the heating and cooling outputs for the PID control results (MV) % 100.0% 100.0% Dead zone 100.0% Cool MV Heat MV Cool MV Heat MV 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 50.0% 100.0% MV 0.0% 50.0% 100.0% MV Dead zone = 0.0% Dead zone > 0.0% 100.0% Dead zone absolute value 100.0% Cool MV Heat MV 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 50.0% 100.0% MV Dead zone < 0.0% 5-18

105 Chapter 5. OPERATION The figure below shows how the MV high and low limits work. 100% Cooling Output (MV) high limit Cooling MV Heating MV Heating Output (MV) high limit Heating Output (MV) low limit 0% 100% Cooling Output (MV) low limit MV 5-19

106 Chapter 5. OPERATION 5-13 ON/OFF Control If the control action is set to 3: Reverse action (ON/OFF) or 4: Direct action (ON/OFF), the ON/OFF control is executed. The differential can be changed by switching PID groups. Bank and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details User level Basic Loop control (basic) Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) PID PID Differential 1 (PID group 1) 0.0 to Differential 2 (PID group 2) 0.0 to Differential 3 (PID group 3) 0.0 to Differential 4 (PID group 4) 0.0 to Simple Multi-function The figures below show ON/OFF control. ON Differential Differential SP SP PV ON PV Heating control (reverse action) Cooling control (direct action) 5-20

107 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-1 How to Use Events The ON/OFF status of the event is determined according to the conditions for each operation type. The ON/OFF result of the event can be output from the ON/OFF output terminals or digital output terminals. Additionally, the ON/OFF result status of the event can be used as internal contact input. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Event Event config Operation type 0 to 255 Simple Loop/channel definition 1 to 3071 Direct/reverse action: 0: Direct 1: Reverse Standby: 0: No standby 1: Standby 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Operation in READY mode: 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF Decimal point position 0 to 4 Hysteresis: 0 to ON delay 0.0 to s OFF delay time: 0.0 to s Multi-function Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Event Operating point (Event 1) Main setting to Simple (Event 1) Sub-setting to Multi-function Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type 0: OFF 1024 to 2047: bit n bits (page App.-12) Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Time proportional operation type (Invalid setting) Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms Time proportional cycle (Invalid setting) Simple Multi-function Multi-function Simple Multi-function Phase shift (Invalid setting) Multi-function 6-1

108 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Example: PV high limit alarm (activated if an error occurs) The following is an example where the output of OUT 1 is turned ON if the PV of loop 1 exceeds 800 C. In this example, the event function and output function are used. Event configuration setting (Event 1) Event setting (Event 1) Output setting (Output 1) Event function (Event 1) Output function (Output 1) OUT1 Status data such as PV Other functions (1) Configure event 1. In the event configuration bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Event Event config. (Event 1) Operation type 1: PV high limit Simple (Event 1) Loop/channel definition 1 Multi-function (Event 1) Direct/Reverse 0: Direct (Event 1) Standby (Event 1) EVENT state at READY (Event 1) Decimal point position (Event 1) Hysteresis 5 (Event 1) ON delay (Event 1) OFF delay 0: No standby 0: Continuation 0: No decimal point 0.0 s 0.0 s (2) Set the operating point of event 1. In the Operating point bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Event Font setting (operating point) (Event 1) Main setting 800 Simple (Event 1) Sub-setting Setting is not possible. Multi-function (3) Assign the ON/OFF status of event 1 to output 1. In the OUT/DO output bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type 1088: Event 1 Simple Multi-function Latch 0: No latch Multi-function Time proportional operation type (Invalid setting) Simple Min. ON/OFF time 10 ms Multi-function Time proportional cycle (Invalid setting) Phase shift (Invalid setting) Multi-function 6-2

109 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Event operation type, direct/reverse, hysteresis, main setting, and sub-setting According to the operation type, direct/reverse, main setting, sub-setting, hysteresis, and other settings, the operation of the event is as follows: Operation type Operation type set values and meanings Direct action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. Reverse action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. No event 0 Always OFF Always OFF PV high limit 1 PV low limit 2 PV high and low limits 3 HYS ON ON HYS ON Main setting Main setting HYS PV PV ON HYS HYS ON Main setting HYS HYS ON Main setting PV PV ON HYS Deviation high limit Deviation low limit Deviation high and low limits Main setting Sub-setting Main PV setting HYS ON ON HYS SP + main setting ON HYS SP + main setting PV PV ON HYS HYS ON SP + main setting HYS HYS PV SP + main setting ON PV PV ON HYS Deviation high limit (Final SP reference) Deviation low limit (Final SP reference) Deviation high and low limits (Final SP reference) SP high limit 10 SP low limit 11 Main setting 7 Same as the direct action of the deviation high limit when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. 8 Same as the direct action of the deviation low limit when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. 9 Same as the direct action of the deviation high limit when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. SP PV Subsetting Subsetting Main Subsetting PV setting SP Same as the reverse action of the deviation high limit when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. Same as the reverse action of the deviation low limit when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. Same as the reverse action of the deviation high and low limits when the SP ramp is not used. When the SP ramp is executed, the SP is not the current one but the last one. HYS ON ON HYS Main setting ON Main setting HYS SP SP HYS Main setting Main setting SP SP ON 6-3

110 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Operation type Operation type setting Direct action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. Reverse action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. SP high and low limits 12 ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting SP SP MV high limit 13 HYS ON ON HYS Main setting MV Main setting MV MV low limit 14 ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Main setting MV MV MV high and low limits 15 ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting MV MV MFB1 opening high and low limits* 1 16 ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Sub-Setting HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-Setting MFB1 MFB1 MFB2 opening high and low limits* 1 17 ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Sub-Setting HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-Setting MFB2 MFB2 AI high limit 18 HYS ON ON HYS Main setting AI Main setting AI AI low limit 19 ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Main setting AI AI AI high and low limits 20 ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting AI AI numerical code high limit 26 HYS ON ON HYS Main setting Value Main setting Value *1 This function is available for ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. 6-4

111 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Operation type Operation type setting Direct action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. Reverse action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. numerical code low limit 27 ON HYS HYS ON numerical code high and low limits 28 Main setting Main setting Value ON HYS HYS ON Sub-setting Value Main setting HYS Main setting ON Value HYS Sub-setting Value PV change rate 29 ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Sub-setting PV change rate HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub-setting PV change rate High limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV1) Deviation high limit between channels (PV2 - specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV3 - specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV4 - specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV1 - specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV2- specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV3- specified channel) Deviation high limit between channels (PV4- specified channel) Deviation high and low limits between channels (PV1- specified channel) Deviation high and low limits between channels (PV2- specified channel) Deviation high and low limits between channels (PV3- specified channel) Deviationhigh and low limits between channels (PV4- specified channel) The change in PV per cycle (Present PV Previous PV) is used as a comparative value for events. vious PV) is used as a comparative value for The change in PV per cycle (Present PV Pre- events. HYS ON ON HYS Main setting Deviation between channels ON Main setting HYS Deviation between channels ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Sub-setting Deviation between channels Main setting Deviation between channels HYS Main setting Deviation between channels HYS Main setting ON ON HYS Sub-setting Deviation between channels 6-5

112 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-6 Operation type Deviation high limit between channels (PV channel 1 standard numerical code) * 1 Deviation high limit between channels (PV channel 2 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation high limit between channels (PV channel3 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation high limit between channels (PV channel 4 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation low limit between channels (PV channel 1 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation low limit between channels (PV channel 2 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation low limit between channels (PV channel 3 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation low limit between channels (PV channel 4 standard numerical code)* 1 Deviation high and lower limits between channels (PV channel 1 standard numerical codes)* 1 Deviation high and lower limits between channels (PV channel 2 standard numerical codes)* 1 Deviation high and lower limits between channels (PV channel 3 standard numerical codes)* 1 Deviation high and lower limits between channels (PV channel 4 standard numerical codes)* 1 Alarm Status READY (status) MANUAL (status) RSP (status) During AT (status) Operation type setting Direct action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. 61 Alarm (alarm code AL01 to 99) ON when activated, OFF at other times 62 ON in READY mode OFF in RUN mode 63 ON in MANUAL mode OFF in AUTO mode 64 ON in RSP mode OFF in LSP mode 65 ON when AT is executed OFF when AT is stopped During SP ramp 66 ON during SP ramp OFF when SP ramp is not performed or is completed Control action (status) 67 ON during direct action (cooling) OFF during reverse action (heating) *1 This function is available for ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. ON Reverse action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. HYS ON ON HYS Main setting Deviation high and lower limits between channels HYS Main setting Deviation high and lower limits between channels ON HYS HYS ON Main setting Sub-Setting Deviation high and lower limits between channels Main setting Alarm (alarm code AL01 to 99) OFF when activated, ON at other times OFF in READY mode ON in RUN mode OFF in MANUAL mode ON in AUTO mode OFF in RSP mode ON in LSP mode OFF when AT is executed ON when AT is stopped Main setting Deviation high and lower limits between channels HYS ON Deviation high and lower limits between channels HYS Main setting ON HYS Sub-Setting Deviation high and lower limits between channels OFF during SP ramp ON when SP ramp is not performed or is completed OFF during direct action (cooling) ON during reverse action (heating)

113 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Operation type Timer (status) Operation type setting Direct action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. Reverse action l shows a value at which ON/OFF will switch to the other. shows a value after which ON/OFF will switch to the other. 70 The direct and reverse action settings are disabled for the timer event. To use the timer event, it is necessary to set the operation type of the internal contact input to "Timer stop/start selection". Additionally, multiple timer events can be controlled from an individual internal contact input by setting an event No. in the loop/channel definition of the internal contact input. l Setting items ON delay time: A period of time necessary for the event change from OFF to ON after the internal contact input has been changed from OFF to ON. OFF delay time: A period of time necessary for the event change from OFF to ON after the internal contact input has been changed from OFF to ON. l Operation The event is turned ON when the internal contact input ON continues for the ON delay time or longer. The event is turned OFF when the internal contact input OFF continues for the OFF delay time or longer. In other cases, the current status is continued. Internal contact IN ON ON delay OFF delay Event l Notes The default settings of the ON delay and OFF delay before shipment are 0.0s. The default setting of the loop/channel definition of the internal contact input is "0". In this case, all timer events can be stopped or started through one internal contact input. Additionally, when a value exceeding "1" is set for the loop/channel definition, one specified timer event can be stopped or started through one internal contact input. ON Time 6-7

114 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Loop/channel definition setup The content is as follows, depending on the operation type. Loop/channel definition Operation type target number Operation in READY mode* 1 Standby* 2 Define the loop number (1 to 4) of the operation type 1 to 20, 29 to 42 Specify the loop No. (1 to 4) for standby or READY mode. Specify the number (2048 to 3071) of the standard numerical codes 62 to to to 28, 43 to 54 *1. : Continuation/Forced OFF can be selected, : Always Continuation *2. : Standby/No standby can be selected, : Always No standby Event standby and EVENT state at READY "Standby" is a function that does not turn ON the event even though the event satisfies the ON conditions when this unit is turned ON or when the READY mode is changed to the RUN mode. The event is turned ON when the ON conditions are satisfied again once the OFF conditions have been satisfied. "Standby + Standby at SP change" means that the standby is set again when the SP is changed (LSP and SP group) in addition to the standby functions. However, when the same LSP value is written or when the SP value is not changed even though the SP group is changed, the unit does not enter the standby mode. Standby settings Event status at READY 0: None Normal operation READY READY RUN SP 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF OFF Normal operation Normal operation Normal operation 1: Standby OFF OFF OFF (Standby) OFF (Standby) Normal operation 2: Standby when the SP is modified Normal operation Normal operation OFF OFF OFF (Standby) OFF (Standby) OFF (Standby) OFF (Standby) Event decimal point The decimal point position of the main setting and sub-setting of the event setup bank (operating point) and the hysteresis setting of the Event config. bank can be changed. ON delay and OFF delay ON delay is a function that delays the timing at which the event status is changed from OFF to ON. OFF delay is a function that delays the timing at which the event status is changed from ON to OFF. However, note that the operation when the operation type is set to timer event is described on the previous page. 6-8

115 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Latch Select the latch behavior for the event from the following. 0: No latch Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) To release the latch, use one of the following methods. In Setup, set Release all latches to 1 (Release latch). Note: This can be done only through the loader or host communications. In Internal contact IN (digital input), set Operation type to 47 (Release all latches) In Logical operation, set Latch to 0 (No latch). Turn off and turn on the module. 6-9

116 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-2 How to Use Internal Contact Input The internal contact input can take in ON/OFF data, such as the digital input (DI) that is specified in the input type, as internal contact input inside the instrument. The mode selection operation specified in the operation type can be performed with the ON/OFF data in the specified input type. Setting Internal contact IN Example 1: RUN/READY mode selection from the digital input The following is an example where the RUN/READY of loop 1 is changed to READY when the DI 1 terminal status is ON and changed to RUN when the DI 1 terminal status is OFF. Input type setup Terminal status RUN READY OFF ON Internal contact IN RUN/READY selection of loop 1 Operation type setup Loop/channel definition setup Set the RUN/READY mode selection to internal contact group 1. Configure the settings as shown below in the Internal contact IN bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function Internal contact IN (Internal contact IN group 1) Operation type 21: RUN/READY mode selection Simple (Internal contact IN group 1) Input type 1152: DI 1 terminal status Multi-function (Internal contact IN group 1) Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1 (Internal contact IN group 1) Weighting Setting is not possible. 6-10

117 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Example 2: SP group selection from the digital input The following is an example where the multi-sp group (1 to 4) of loop 1 is selected using the DI-1 to DI-2 terminals. DI 1 terminal Weighting = 1 DI 2 terminal Weighting = 2 Multi-SP group 1 Multi-SP group 2 Internal contact IN Multi-SP group 3 Selected SP group Multi-SP group 4 DI 1 OFF ON OFF ON DI 2 OFF OFF ON ON Sum of weights Selected SP group SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 (1) Set the SP system group. Configure the settings as shown below in the Setup (basic) bank. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Setup SP system group 4 Simple Multi-function (2) Set the SP group selection to internal contact input 1 or 2. In the Internal contact IN bank, set two groups of internal contact inputs as described below. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function Internal contact IN (Internal contact IN group 1) Operation type 1: SP group selection Simple (Internal contact IN group 1) Input type 1152 (DI1 terminal status) Multi-function (Internal contact IN group 1) Loop/channel definition 1 (Internal contact IN group 1) Weighting 1 (Internal contact IN group 2) Operation type 1: SP group selection (Internal contact IN group 2) Input type 1153: DI 2 terminal status (Internal contact IN group 2) Loop/channel definition 1 (Internal contact IN group 2) Weighting

118 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Operation type Select the operations that are selected with the internal contact input from "Operation type set values" in the following table. Operation type set values and meanings Loop/channel definition set values and meanings 0: Invalid 1: Position proportioning 1 2: Position proportioning 2 0: No function 0 to 127: Invalid 1: SP group selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 2: PID group selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 3: Fixed value group selection* 4 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 5: Selection of group using linearization for OUT* 1 * 2 0: Invalid 1: Channel 1 2: Channel 2 3: Channel 3 4: Channel 4 5: Channel 5 6: Channel 6 7: Channel 7 8: Channel 8 9 to 127: Invalid 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning * 5 3: Position proportioning 3 4: Position proportioning 9: AI group definition* 3 0: All channels 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 21: RUN/READY mode selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 24: AT start/stop selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 41: Control operation direct/reverse selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 0: All loops 1: Loop 1 2: Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 5 to 127: Invalid 46: Timer stop/start selection 0: All timer events 1 to 24: Event number for timer event 25 to 127: Invalid 47: Release all latches 0 to 127: Invalid *1. This function is not available on the NX-D15. *2. This function is compatible with ROM version 2.00 [1_0_1] and later versions of the NX-D25. *3. This function is compatible with ROM version 2.00 [1_0_1] and later versions of the NX-D15. *4. This function is compatible with ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later versions of the NX-D25/35. *5. This function is compatible with ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later versions of the NX-D35. Input type Use to specify the ON/OFF data that the data internal contact input uses as input. This ON/OFF data shows various kinds of instrument statuses and is called "standard bit". bits (page App.-12) Loop/channel definition Use to specify the target loop or channel for the internal contact input operation. The meaning of the loop/channel definition varies depending on the operation type. Refer to the Operation type table above. Weighting Use to select a group or number in a specific operation type, such as SP group selection or PID group selection. When the input is OFF, the value is "0". When the input is ON, the value is the set value. When the operation type and loop/channel definition use the same internal contact input, the selection is determined by the sum of weighting values as shown in the table below Operation type Sum of weights If needed: 1 or higher SP group selection Group 1 Group with "1" added to the sum of weighting values is selected. PID group selection Group 1 Group with "1" added to the sum of weighting values is selected. Selection of group using linearization for OUT No linearization The group whose number is the same as the sum of the weights is selected. AI group specification Group 1 Group with "1" added to the sum of weighting values is selected. Fixed value group selection Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning No linearization No linearization The group whose number is the same as the sum of the weights is selected. The group whose number is the same as the sum of the weights is selected.

119 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-3 How to Use Digital Output ON/OFF data specified as the output type can be output from the digital output (DO) In addition, ON or OFF status of the digital output can be latched. Bank and setting PV input OUT/DO output Example: Turning on DO1 if a PV1 high limit error occurs The following is an example where if PV1 is C or more a PV1 high limit alarm is output from terminal DO1 to latch ON status. Output type setup PV1 high limit error presence OFF ON OUT/DO output Output is latched. DO1 terminal Latch setup (1) Configure PV1 high limit alarm. In the PV input bank, set as follows. Set the PV1 high limit to the alarm setting high limit. Item name Settings Range type 1: K thermocouple Decimal point position 1: 1 digits after the decimal point Temperature units 0: Celsius ( C) Alarm setting low limit 0.0 Alarm setting high limit Cold junction compensation Use internal compensation Linear scaling low limit Setting is not possible. Linear scaling high limit Setting is not possible. Square root extraction dropout Setting is not possible. Filter 0.00 Bias 0.0 Ratio Thermocouple or mv input burnout 0: Upscale when burnout Linearization table group definition 0: Disabled (2) Set terminal DO1 operation. In the OUT/DO output bank, set as follows. Item name Settings Output type Latch 1824: PV1 high limit error (AL01) 1: Latch when ON 6-13

120 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Output type Specify ON/OFF data to be output from the digital output. The ON/OFF data shows various instrument states and is called "standard bit." Set the standard as an output type. Latch Note For details on standard s, refer to the following: bits (page App.-12) As well as transistor output, digital output can generate time proportional output. 4-7, How to Set Outputs (continuous output and time proportional output) (page 4-16) Select the latch behavior for logical operations from the following. 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) To release the latch, use one of the following methods. In Setup, set Release all latches to 1 (Release latch). Note: This can be done only through the loader or host communications. In Logical operation, set Latch to 0 (No latch). Turn off and turn on the module. 6-14

121 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-4 How to Use the Multi-SP The multi-sp can be set by combining LSP value and PID group definition on an SP group basis. Up to 4 SP groups per loop are provided. You can select one group from these groups and use it for control. Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Multi-SP 4th group Multi-SP 4th group Multi-SP 4th group Multi-SP 4th group SP value PID group No. Multi-SP 2nd group SP value PID group No. Multi-SP 2nd group SP value PID group No. Multi-SP 2nd group SP value PID group No. Multi-SP 2nd group Multi-SP 1st group Multi-SP 1st group Multi-SP 1st group Multi-SP 1st group SP value PID group No. SP value PID group No. SP value PID group No. SP value PID group No. Bank and settings Setup LSP PID SP group selection Features A PID constant group can be specified for each SP group. When selecting an SP group, the PID constants corresponding to the PID group definition set in the SP group are used for the control. When using PID constants common to multiple SP groups, specify the same PID group. Example: Multi-SP is used with two LSP groups The following describes an example where two LSP groups and PID constants of two groups are used with two SP groups in loop 1. (1) Set the SP to two groups using the multi-sp. Configure the settings as shown below in the setup (basic) bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Setup SP system group 2 Simple Multi-function (2) Set data for the SP group. Configure the settings as shown below in the loop 1 LSP bank. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level SP LSP (Loop 1) LSP Simple (Loop 1) PID group definition 1 (for LSP) 1 Multi-function (Loop 1) LSP (Loop 1) PID group definition 2 (for LSP)

122 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL (3) Set data for the PID group. Configure the settings as shown below in the loop 1 PID bank. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level PID PID (Loop 1) Proportional band Simple (Loop 1) Integral time Multi-function (Loop 1) Derivative time 1 30 (Loop 1) MV low limit (Loop 1) MV high limit (Omitted) (Loop 1) Integral time (Loop 1) Integral time (Loop 1) Derivative time 2 25 (Loop 1) MV low limit (Loop 1) MV high limit (Others omitted) (4) Select an SP group. Select an SP group in the SP group selection bank. To select the SP 2 group, configure the setting as described in the table below. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level SP SP group selection (Loop 1) SP group selection 2: Select SP group 2 Simple Multi-function 6-16

123 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-5 How to Change the LSP with Constant Ramp When changing the set value of the LSP or the SP group selection, it is possible to change the SP with a constant SP ramp. New LSP SP change Previous LSP Ramp-up for LSP LSP change Time Previous LSP Ramp-down for LSP New LSP SP change LSP change Time Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level SP SP configuration SP ramp unit SP ramp-up slope for LSP SP ramp-down slope for LSP PV start for LSP 0: No decimal point/s 1: No decimal point/min 2: No decimal point/h 3: 0.1/s 4: 0.1/min 5: 0.1/h 6: 0.01/s 7: 0.01/min 8: 0.01/h 9: 0.001/s 10: 0.001/min 11: 0.001/h OU: No ramp 1 to U (Decimal point position varies depending on the SP ramp unit) OU: No ramp 1 to U (Decimal point position varies depending on the SP ramp unit) 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent PV start Multi-function Conditions for ramp start LSP value is changed. SP group is changed. Mode is changed from RSP to LSP. Conditions for ramp start at PV If any of the following arises, the ramp is started with PV used as the start point instead of the previous SP: The power is turned ON. MANUAL mode is changed to the AUTO mode. READY mode is changed to the RUN mode. The "Loop type" item of the setup bank is changed. Handling Precautions If the module is under any of the following conditions, ramp operation does not start. Additionally, if the module under any of the following conditions during ramp operation, the ramp operation is canceled. MANUAL mode READY mode Ramp operation is prohibited from the internal contact input If the module is under any of the following conditions, ramp operation does not start at PV. A PV input error occurs. PV start for LSP is set to 1 (Prevent PV start). 6-17

124 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-6 How to Change the RSP with Constant Ramp When the RSP is changed, the SP can be changed with a constant ramp. New RSP SP change Previous RSP Ramp-up for RSP RSP change Time Previous RSP Ramp-down for RSP New RSP SP change RSP change Time Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level SP SP configuration SP ramp unit 0: No decimal point/s 1: No decimal point/min 2: No decimal point/h 3: 0.1/s 4: 0.1/min 5: 0.1/h 6: 0.01/s 7: 0.01/min 8: 0.01/h 9: 0.001/s 10: 0.001/min 11: 0.001/h SP ramp-up for RSP OU: No ramp 1 to U (Decimal point position varies depending on the SP ramp unit) SP ramp-down for RSP PV start for RSP OU: No ramp 1 to U (Decimal point position varies depending on the SP ramp unit) 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent PV start Multi-function Conditions for ramp start RSP value is changed. Mode is changed from LSP to RSP. Conditions for ramp start with PV used as a start point If any of the following arises, the ramp is started with PV used as the start point instead of the previous SP: The power is turned ON. MANUAL mode is changed to the AUTO mode. READY mode is changed to the RUN mode. The "Loop type" item of the setup bank is changed. Handling Precautions If the module is under any of the following conditions, ramp operation does not start. Additionally, if the module under any of the following conditions during ramp operation, the ramp operation is canceled. MANUAL mode READY mode Ramp operation is prohibited from the internal contact input If the module is under any of the following conditions, ramp operation does not start at PV. A PV input error occurs. PV start for LSP is set to 1 (Prevent PV start). 6-18

125 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL 6-7 Current Transformer (CT) Input In the case of the module with a current transformer (CT) input, it can detect the status of the heater or actuator and measure electric current using the CT input. (1) Heater burnout detection, overcurrent detection, and short-circuit detection (2) Current measurement using true RMS values (A cycle can be set.) Set the CT operation to use either of them. The following are CT input currents according to CT operation. l Continuous current measurement Current when the output is ON: Current is measured using true RMS values* in the continuous current measurement cycle. Current when the output is OFF: Always -1.0 Time proportioning current: Always -1.0 *Root Mean Square, by which electric waveforms that are distorted through a thyristor can be correctly measured. l Heater burnout detection Current when the output is ON: Current when time proportional output is ON that is used for heater burnout detection or overcurrent detection. Current when the output is OFF: Current when time proportional output is OFF that is used for short-circuit detection. Time proportioning current: Converts electric currents to RMS values in the time proportional cycle. Measurable current values The measurable current values vary depending on the number of CT turns and the number of CT power line passes. Refer to the table below. At the high limit, a CT input alarm is activated, and the increase in CT value is stopped. Alarm codes Chapter 14, TROUBLESHOOTING Banks and settings Number of passes Number of turns 100 turns 400 turns 800 turns 1600 turns 4000 turns 1 time 0.1 to 6.2 A 0.2 to 25.0 A 0. 4 to 50.0 A 0.8 to A 2.0 to A Twice 0.1 to 3.1 A 0.1 to 12.5 A 0. 2 to 25.0 A 0. 4 to 50.0 A 1.0 to A 6 times 0.1 to 1.0 A 0.1 to 4.1 A 0.1 to 8.3 A 0.2 to 16.6 A 0.4 to 41.6 A Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Inputoutput CT input CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement 1: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT1 2: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT2 3: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT3 4: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT4 Waiting time for CT measurement 30 to 300 ms Simple Multi-function Number of CT turns 100 to 4000 turns Number of CT power line 1 to 6 times Multi-function passes Heater burnout detection 0.0 to A current value Minimum current defined 0.0 to A as overcurrent Minimum current defined 0.0 to A as short-circuit Hysteresis: 0.0 to A Delay time 0.0 to s Condition for restoring 1024 to 2047: status before measurement Continuous current measurement cycle 0.1 to s 6-19

126 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Data items for monitoring Folder name Bank name Item name Monitor Monitor (CT) Measured current when output ON numerical code Monitor (CT) numerical code (2688 to 2815) Measured current when output OFF Time proportional output CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement This function can detect current high and low limit errors using overcurrent detection. Current is measured in the continuous current measurement cycle to update measured current when output ON. Then measured current when output OFF and time proportioning current are displayed as -1.0 (no current measurement). 1 to 4: Heater burnout detection This function can detect heater burnout and overcurrent using measured current when output ON, and detect short-circuit detection using measured current when output OFF. Both measured current when output is ON and measured current when output is OFF are updated every 100 ms according to the terminal OUT ON/OFF status. In addition, the function updates measured current when output ON as time proportioning current, converting it to an RMS value in time proportional cycle Note The table below shows the correspondence between CT operations and detectable errors and measurable current. CT operation Item name Measurable current Detectable errors 0: Continuous current measurement 1: Heater burnout detection Measured current when output ON Measured current when output ON Measured current when output OFF Time proportioning current True RMS current from transistor output Measured current when transistor output ON Measured current when transistor output OFF RMS current from transistor output PV high limit error PV low limit error Heater burnout Overcurrent Short-circuit Time proportioning current can be calculated with the following formula. Time proportioning current = Measured current when output ON (Time proportional output ON time Time proportional cycle) This function is available for ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. Handling Precautions Heater burnout detection cannot measure time proportioning current used for S21 (peak power suppression control). If measuring time proportioning current, set the time proportional operation type to 1(Actuator-life oriented). 4-8, How to Set Position Proportional Output (page 4-17) 6-20

127 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Waiting time for CT measurement When the CT operation is heater burnout detection, the time from the change in the output ON/OFF status to the start of the current measurement can be set. Current measurement begins when the waiting time for CT measurement passes after the monitored output ON/OFF status switches to the other. Number of CT turns Set the number of CT turns to the No. of turns of the CT connected to the module. Handling Precautions Please check the number of CT turns with the specifications of the CT. Number of CT power line passes Set the number of times that the power lines pass through the CT hole. For example, if power lines pass through the CT hole twice as shown in the figure below, set 2. Power line To relay, power supply, etc. To heater, etc. CT CT input This unit Heater burnout detection current value If the measured current when output ON exceeds the setting, heater burnout is detected. If the setting is 0.0, detection is disabled. Note If the CT operation is set to "0: Continuous current measurement," current low limit errors can be detected using the set heater burnout detection current value as the current low limit The setting should be approximately halfway between normal current and burnout current. In addition, make sure that the difference between this setting and normal current is 2.5 A or more. Normal current + Burnout current Setting = 2 Minimum current defined as overcurrent If the measured current when output ON exceeds the setting, overcurrent is detected. If the setting is 0.0, detection is disabled. Note If the CT operation is set to "0: Continuous current measurement," current high limit errors can be detected using this setting. The setting should be approximately halfway between normal current and overcurrent. In addition, make sure that the difference between this setting and normal current is 2.5 A or more. Setting = Overcurrent + Normal current

128 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Minimum current defined as short-circuit If the measured current when output OFF exceeds the setting, a short-circuit is detected. If the setting is 0.0, detection is disabled. Note If the CT operation is set to "0: Continuous current measurement," the setting for minimum current defined as short circuit is invalid. The setting should be approximately halfway between normal current and shortcircuit current. In addition, make sure that the difference between this setting and normal current is 2.5 A or more. Short-circuit current + Normal current Setting = 2 Hysteresis: Delay time Set the hysteresis common to heater burnout detection, overcurrent detection and actuator short-circuit detection. Set the detection delay time common to heater burnout detection, overcurrent detection and actuator short-circuit detection. Condition for restoring status before measurement Set the standard as the condition for restoring the status before current measurement. This function is used to abort burnout detection that is continued while control has stopped after burnout is detected. Note The condition for restoring the status before measurement is used to disable alarm judgment until a new CT current is measured, canceling the burnout alarm, overcurrent alarm, and short circuit alarm. If the standard bit No. specified for Condition for restoring status before measurement is activated, there is no CT current measurement. When the CT operation is heater burnout detection, if the control output is 0.0 % in READY/AUTO loop mode or during heating, the last measured current when output ON is retained because the update conditions for measured current are not satisfied. Because the burnout alarm is retained, once it occurs, it cannot be stopped only by repairing the burned out equipment. To stop the alarm to resume normal operation, with no alarms activated, activate the standard bit No. specified for Condition for restoring status before measurement. Example: Disabling CT 1 measurement when loop 1 is in READY mode,. When loop 1 is in READY mode, CT 1 measurement is not executed. If a CT-related alarm is detected, detection of heater burnout, overcurrent, and short circuits is turned OFF. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Input-output CT input Condition for restoring status before measurement 1568 (Loop 1 RUN/READY status) Multi-function 6-22

129 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL Handling Precautions The ON/OFF statuses of heater burnout detection, overcurrent detection and short-circuit detection are updated in the standard bits. bits (page App.-12) In the case of CTs connected to the output terminal (loop) of an analog current or analog voltage output model, even if CT operation is set for heater burnout detection (settings 1 4), heater burnout and short circuit cannot be detected, So Heater burnout detection current value and Minimum current defined as short circuit should be set to 0.0. Even if the setting for CT operation is changed, the previous setting and alarm status are retained until the measured current when output is ON or measured current when output is OFF is updated. To cancel the preserved conditions, activate the specified standard bit No. to stop measurement of the current. Heater burnout detection, overcurrent detection and short-circuit detection can be executed together within the same module only. Timing for updating CT current measurement If CT operation is set for detection of heater burnout (settings 1 4), measured current when output is ON and measured current when output is OFF are updated as follows. Measured current when output ON is updated. Measured current when output ON is updated. The previously measured current when output ON is retained. Waiting time for CT measurement 100ms 100ms Waiting time for CT measurement 100ms Specified OUT terminal output status ON OFF Waiting time for CT measurement 100ms Waiting time for CT measurement 100ms 100ms The previously measured current when output OFF is retained. Measured current when output OFF is updated. Measured current when output OFF is updated. When the ON/OFF output status of the OUT terminal has been retained for the waiting time for CT measurement plus 100 ms, or more, the measured current when output is ON (or OFF) is updated. If the preserved period of the ON/OFF output status of the OUT terminal is less than the waiting time for CT measurement plus 100 ms, the previously measured current is maintained without update. Continuous current measurement cycle If the CT operation is set for continuous current measurement (setting 0), set the measurement cycle in increments of 0.1 s (100 ms). Handling Precautions It the f the CT operation is set for anything other than continuous current measurement (setting 0), the measurement cycle is automatically set to 100 ms (fixed). 6-23

130 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL How to detect current high/low limit errors Configure the following for current high/low limit error detection, Set the CT operation to 0 (Continuous current measurement ). Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the current high limit to the minimum current defined as overcurrent. If 0.0 is set, a current high limit error cannot be detedted. Set the current low limit to the minimum current defined as short circuit. If 0.0 is set, a current low limit error cannot be detedted. If a current high limit and low limit errors are detected, an overcurrent alarm and short-circuit alarm are activated respectively. How to detect heater burnout If the measured current when output ON is below the setting, heater burnout is detected. Configure the following for heater burnout detection, Set the CT operation for detection of heater burnout (settings 1 4). (Settings 1 4 mean transistor output channels.) Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the threshold of heater burnout detection current for the heater burnout detection current value If 0.0 is set, heater burnout cannot be detedted. If heater burnout is detected, a heater burnout alarm is activated. How to detect overcurrent If the measured current when output ON is exceeds the setting, heater burnout is detected. Configure the following for heater burnout detection, Set the CT operation for detection of heater burnout (settings 1 4). (Settings 1 4 mean transistor output channels.) Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the threshold of overcurrent detection current for the minimum current defined as overcurrent. If 0.0 is set, overcurrent cannot be detected. If overcurrent is detected, an overcurrent alarm is activated. How to detect short circuit If the measured current when output OFF is exceeds the setting, short circuit is detected. Configure the following for short-circuit detection, Set the CT operation for detection of heater burnout (settings 1 4). (Settings 1 4 mean transistor output channels.) Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the threshold of short-circut detection current for the minimum current defined as short circuit. If 0.0 is set, short circuit cannot be detected. If short circuit is detected, a short-circut alarm is activated. 6-24

131 Chapter 6. FUNCTIONS OFTEN USED FOR OPERATIONS OTHER THAN CONTROL How to measure the secondary current of a thyristor power regulator To measure the secondary current of a thyristor power regulator, configure the following. Set the CT operation to 0 (Continuous current measurement ). Set the number of CT turns.. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the continuous current measurement cycle. Current is updated in the set cycle. By monitoring of current when output ON, true RMS current can be measured. How to measure current of time proportional output of the module using a solidstate relay (SSR) To measure current of time proportional output of the module using an SSR, configure the following. Set the CT operation for detection of heater burnout (settings 1 4). (Settings 1 4 mean transistor output channels.) Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. By monitoring of current when output ON, it can also be measured. By monitoring of time proportioning current, it can also be measured. How to measure current of time proportional output of a device other than the module using a solid-state relay (SSR) To measure current of time proportional output a device other than the module using an SSR, configure the following. Set the CT operation to 0 (Continuous current measurement ). Set the number of CT turns. Set the number of CT power line passes. Set the continuous current measurement cycle. Current is updated in the set cycle. By monitoring of current when output ON, true RMS current can be measured. Handling Precautions Set the time proportional cycle of a device other than the module for the continuous current measurement cycle. 6-25

132

133 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-1 Loop control (algorithm) Handling Precautions The NX-D15 does not support 2: PID-B (PV derivative type). By selecting an appropriate control algorithm, optimum control can be executed. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control (basic) Control algorithm 0: PID-A (deviation-derivative type) 2: PID-B (PV derivative type) Multi-function For PID-A (deviation-derivative type), a derivative operation works against the deviations, resulting in derivative operations being performed against PV and SP changes. For PID-B (PV derivative type), a derivative operation works against the PV but not against the SP. 7-1

134 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-2 MV if PV is Abnormal The MV for PID calculation can be set so that it switches to any desired fixed value if a PV input error occurs when the mode is both RUN and AUTO. Banks and settings Example Loop output (MV) The following describes how to configure the MV for PID calculation so that it decreases to 10 % if a PV high/low limit error occurs in loop 1. (1) First, set Output operation at PV error. In the loop output (MV) bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop output (MV) (Loop 1) Output MV if PV is abnormal 1: Output MV if PV is abnormal Simple Multi-function (2) Next, set Output at PV error. In the loop output (MV) bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop output (MV) (Loop 1) Output at PV error 10.0 Simple Multi-function 7-2

135 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-3 MV Change Limit Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. The amount of MV change per second can be limited by setting the MV change limit. Banks and settings Example Loop (extended) The example below shows how to set the loop 1 MV so that when the MV is increasing its amount of change is limited to 10 %. (1) Set the MV increase change limit. In the loop control (extended settings) bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop (extended) MV increase change limit: Simple Multi-function (2) Set the MV decrease change limit. In the loop control (extended settings) bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop (extended) (Loop 1) MV decrease change limit: 0.00 Simple Multi-function Handling Precautions If an MV change limit is not needed, set to

136 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-4 MV Branching Output MV branching outputs (up to 4) with ratios or biases can be executed using the MV for PID calculation of any loop. Loop mode diagram Loop 1 PID1 MV1 during AT MV1 during PV error MV1 at READY MV1 at MANUAL Loop 2 PID2 MV2 during AT MV2 during PV error MV2 at READY MV2 at MANUAL PID MV1 PID MV2 MV branching output 1 PID MV 1 to 4 numerical code MV branching output 2 PID MV 1 to 4 numerical code MV branching output not used Loop 1 is MANUAL or READY Ratio 1 Bias 2 MV branching output not used Loop 2 is MANUAL or READY Ratio 2 Bias 2 MV branching output used MV branching output used Loop 1 MV Loop 2 MV Loop 3 PID3 Loop 4 PID4 MV3 during AT MV4 during AT MV3 during PV error MV3 at READY MV3 at MANUAL MV4 during PV error MV4 at READY MV4 at MANUAL PID MV3 PID MV4 MV branching output 3 PID MV 1 to 4 numerical code MV branching output 4 PID MV 1 to 4 numerical code MV branching output not used Loop 3 is MANUAL or READY Ratio 3 Bias 3 MV branching output not used Loop 4 is MANUAL or READY Ratio 4 Bias 4 MV branching output used MV branching output used Loop 3 MV Loop 4 MV 7-4

137 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Banks and settings Example MV Branching Output The following describes how to turn the MV of loop 1 into MV1 MV3 having ratios of 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2 respectively. Loop 1 PID control Ratio ( 1.0) Ratio ( 1.1) Ratio ( 1.2) Bias (0.0) Bias (0.0) Bias (0.0) Limited by loop 1 output (MV) low limit/high limit MV1 MV2 MV3 (1) Set MV1. In the MV branching output bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function MV Branching Output (MV branching output 1) Loop assignment 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 Multi-function (MV branching output 1) Ratio 1.00 (MV branching output 1) Loop Bias 0.00 (2) Set MV2. In the MV branching output bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function MV Branching Output (MV branching output 2) Loop assignment 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 Multi-function (MV branching output 2) Ratio 1.10 (MV branching output 2) Loop Bias 0.00 (3) Set MV1. In the MV branching output bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function MV Branching Output (MV branching output 3) Loop assignment 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 Multi-function (MV branching output 3) Ratio 1.20 (MV branching output 3) Loop Bias 0.00 Handling Precautions Ratio and bias do not operate if Loop No. / numerical code assignment is set for one of the following: output at PV error, manual MV, output at READY, or AT output. The branching output MV of the invalid loop is 0.0 %. Enable the loop of the branching loop output MV to be used. (Loop type in setup) MV branching output and heat/cool control cannot be used at the same time. To use MV branching output, a loop type must be set. 4-1, How to Set the Loop Configuration (page 4-1). 7-5

138 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-5 Energy Saving Time Proportioning The energy saving time proportional function prevents multiple time proportional outputs from being ON at the same time. Example of operation if energy conservation time proportioning not used. Time proportional cycle Example of operation if energy conservation time proportioning is used. Time proportional cycle Time proportioning output 1 ON Time proportioning output 1 ON Time proportioning output 2 ON Time proportioning output 2 ON Time proportioning output 3 ON Time proportioning output 3 ON Each time proportioning output turns ON at the same time. Each time proportioning output does not turn ON at the same time. Up to 8 time proportional outputs can be put into an energy saving time proportioning group. An energy saving time proportioning group consists of one master output and one or more slave outputs. Time proportional output 1 represents the master output in the figure on the right above. The master output turns on from the beginning of the time proportional cycle. The first slave output turn on after the master output turns off. The second slave output turn on after the first slave output turns off. The subsequent slave outputs operate in the same way. The first slave output turn on after the master output turns off. Handling Precautions Set the same time proportional cycle for each output in the group. Set the time proportional operation type to 1 (actuator-life-oriented) for each output in the group. Banks and settings Energy saving time proportional operation Master/Slave selection The output whose master/slave selection is set to master (0) turns on first in that group s time proportional cycle. Time proportional slave channels Specify the slave output (the next output channel) for each output. For the last time proportional slave channel in the group, assign its own number as its slave output. 7-6

139 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Example The following tells how to create two energy saving time proportioning groups and assign outputs 1 2 and 7 4 to group 1 and 2 respectively. Master Time proportioning output 1 OUT1 Slave Time proportioning output 2 OUT2 Energy conservation time proportional operation 1 2 1: Used 1: Used Energy conservation delay time Master/slave selection 0: Master 1: Not master Time proportional slave channel 2: Time proportioning 2 2: Time proportioning 2 Master Slave Slave Time proportioning output 3 Time proportioning output 4 Time proportioning output 5 OUT4 DO1 DO2 Energy conservation time proportional operation : Used 1: Used 1: Used Energy conservation delay time Master/slave selection 0: Master 1: Not master 1: Not master Time proportional slave channel 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 6: Time proportioning 6 Master Slave Time proportioning output 6 Time proportioning output 7 DO3 DO4 Energy conservation time proportional operation 7 8 1: Used 1: Used Energy conservation delay time Master/slave selection 0: Master 1: Not master Time proportional slave channel 8: Time proportioning 8 8: Time proportioning 8 Note For the last time proportional slave channel in the group, assign its own number as its slave output. 7-7

140 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Energy saving delay time This is set when there are slave outputs. To prevent overlapping with the ON status of other outputs or actuators, the output starts after the previous output turns OFF and after the energy conservation delay time has elapsed. This is to prevent the ON status of the time proportioning output from overlapping due to the delay in the actuator operation. (See A in the chart below.) Additionally, at the end of the time proportional cycle, an energy conservation delay time OFF is added. This is to prevent overlapping when the master output turns ON. (See B in the chart below.) Time proportional cycle Master output ON 1st slave output A ON 2nd slave output A ON B Handling Precautions Before use, make sure to do the following. Set the same time proportional cycle for each output in the group. Be sure to set Actuator-life-oriented. For slave channels, be sure to set the energy saving delay time as appropriate for the amount of delay in the operation of the actuator. Observe the following limitations on use. If the output of the master channel is so large that the output time of the slave channel cannot stay within the time proportional cycle, the slave output is aborted at the end of the cycle. Therefore, the PID control results may not properly output. This means that the control calculation results might not be fully output. The energy conservation time proportional output results are prioritized even in MANUAL mode, READY mode, and when the PV alarm operates. Therefore, the set MV may not output depending on the MV by the master channel. For a stable state where PV = SP, the total length of time for control outputs and delay time in each channel must be equal to or less than 100% of the cycle time. If the total time exceeds the cycle time, the slave channels cannot be controlled by the settings. Controllability may vary significantly depending on whether energy saving time proportioning is used or not. 7-8

141 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-6 Phase Shift This section explains the parameters of the phase shift function in the OUT/DO output. The phase shift function can be used to adjust the output phase for each time proportional output channel. By using this function, the possibility of time proportional outputs to turn on at the same time can be diminished. The beginning of the original time proportional cycle is adjusted by the time specified for the beginning of the time proportional cycle of the device. As a result, the ON status will not overlap for the adjusted time period. If the ON status is longer, overlapping may occur. In such a case, the MV high limit can be used to prevent overlapping. However, there may be a delay in control results as a result of the output limit. Time proportioning Start Time proportioning 1 (OUT1) Time proportioning 2 (OUT2) Time proportioning 3 (OUT3) Time proportioning 4 (OUT4) On OUT2 phase shift time Time proportional cycle Time proportional cycle On On Time proportional cycle OUT3 phase shift time On On On Time proportional cycle OUT4 phase shift time On On On On On Overlapping time of ON status Handling Precautions If energy conservation is used, set the same phase shift value for the time proportional channel related to the master and slave. If different values are specified, the function will not operate correctly. When the power is turned on, and also when the time proportional cycle is changed, one output cycle only is shortened in order to synchronize the beginning of the time proportional cycles. 7-9

142 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-7 Approximation by Linearization Table Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. Approximation by linearization can be used for PV inputs and outputs. There are eight groups of linearizations. One linearization group has 20-point settings. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) For details on the process block of each input/output, refer to PV input process block diagram (page App.-3), Continuous output process block diagram (page App.-9), OUT/DO output process block diagram (page App.-10). Settings A1 to A20 are input values for the approximation by linearization table while settings B1 to B20 are output values for the approximation by linearization table. They are shown as a graph in the figure below. When the input is A1 or less, the output becomes B1. When the input is A20 or more, the output becomes B (A1, B1) B-axis (output) (A20, B20) A-axis (input) Approximation by linearization table of output To use the approximation by linearization table for output, configure the settings in the OUT/DO output or linearization table use group for continuous output so that the linearization group is selected by the set value or the internal contact input. Banks and settings Example PV input Continuous output OUT/DO output Linearization table The following describes an example that the approximation by linearization table of the linearization table 1 group is used for the PV1 input: An input ranging from "0.0" to "100.0" is converted into other characteristic of "0.0" to "100.0". (1) Specify a group of the linearization table using the PV input. In the PV input bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Inputoutput PV input (PV1 input) Linearization table group definition 1: 1group Multi-function 7-10

143 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED (2) Set the linearization table. In the PV input bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Function Linearization table (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint decimal point position (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A1 0.0 (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A (Omitted) (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint A (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B1 0.0 (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B (Omitted) (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B (Linearization table group 1) Breakpoint B : 1 digits after the decimal point Multi-function The decimal point position used to set breakpoints A1 to A20 and breakpoints B1 to B20 is specified using the breakpoint decimal point position. Magnitude correlation of breakpoint A setting is not the numerical order Linearization is written except for deviation points. It is possible not to use the breakpoint located halfway. (breakpoint 3 shown in the figure below.) It is possible not to use the excess breakpoints. (breakpoints 7 to 20 shown in the figure below.) B-axis (output) Since A7 to A20 are smaller than A6, they are excluded Breakpoint 7 (A7, B7) to breakpoint 20 (A20, B20) Breakpoint 6 (A6, B6) Breakpoint 5 (A5, B5) Breakpoint 3 (A3, B3) Since A3 is smaller than A2, it is excluded Breakpoint 4 (A4, B4) Breakpoint 1 (A1, B1) Breakpoint 2 (A2, B2) A-axis (input) 7-11

144 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED A options of the adjacent breakpoints are the same. A breakpoint having a smaller No. becomes valid. Additionally, the two points are not connected by a linearization. B-axis (output) Breakpoint 4 (A4, B4) Breakpoint 3 (A3, B3) When A2 equals A3, the breakpoint 2 Breakpoint 1 (A1, B1) Breakpoint 2 (A2, B2) A-axis (input) 7-12

145 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-8 AT (Auto Tuning) When the AT is executed, the AT type can be selected to obtain AT results appropriate for the target control characteristics. One of the following three types can be selected for the AT type. 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) The following graph shows the pattern of differences in the control results that use PID constants calculated with each AT type. PV AT type = 1 (Fast) SP AT type = 0 (Normal) AT type = 2 (Stable) Difference in PV change when SP is changed Time Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Basic Loop control basic setting Loop control (extended) Loop control (algorithm) AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) Simple Multi-function MV low limit 10.0 to MV high limit 10.0 to Multi-function AT adjustment factor, proportional band 0.00 to AT adjustment factor, integral time 0.00 to AT adjustment factor, derivative time 0.00 to The MV can be limited during AT by means of the MV low limit during AT and MV high limit during AT. If heat/cool control is not used, the MV low/high limit during AT and the PID constant MV low/high output will be assigned to the MV. If heat/cool control is used: The MV low/high limit during AT value will be assigned to the MV. The heating MV uses the PID constant MV low/high limit output value. The cooling MV uses the PID constant MV low/high limit (cool) output value. When heat/cool control is used, execute AT with heat MV and cool MV running. In the first half, the MV changes with the output low/high limit. In the second half, it changes in a somewhat narrow area. The following figure illustrates AT with the following settings: Heating/Cooling control dead zone = 0.0%, heat/cool control switch point = 50.0%, output low limit = 0.0%, output high limit = 100.0% 7-13

146 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED MV (%) Heat MV (%) Time Cool MV (%) Time SP switch point PV During AT Time Time 7-14 Handling Precautions Before starting the AT, check that the PV inputs and final control elements (heater power supply, etc.) are connected correctly and that the unit is ready for control. If the control method is in ON/OFF control, the AT cannot be started. Change the control method to PID. In case any of the following conditions occur, the AT cannot be activated. * The loop becomes any of the following operating conditions: MANUAL, READY, PV high/low limit error, fixed value output, or MFB adjustment * The device becomes either power failure or IDLE mode * If the AT is activated in a loop used by the master output in internal cascade control, the slave output is not in LSP mode, or the slave output is not fixed value output. A PV high/low limit error happens to the master or the slave output. * If the AT is activated in a loop used by the slave output in internal cascade control, the slave output is not in RSP mode. If the loop or the instrument is under any of the following conditions while the AT is being activated, the AT is stopped with no change in the PID constant. * The loop becomes any of the following operating conditions: MANUAL, READY, PV high/low limit error, fixed value output, or MFB adjustment * The device becomes any of the following modes In power failure, in IDLE mode, or the loop type, control type, or control algorithm is changed * If the AT is activated in a loop used by the master output in internal cascade control, the slave output is in LSP mode, or the slave output is switched to fixed value output. A PV high/low limit error happens to the master or the slave output. * If the AT is executed in a loop used by the slave output in internal cascade control, the slave output is in RSP mode.

147 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED AT progress Example 1 AT progress can be checked by accessing AT progress (item name) in Basic (bank name) in Monitor (folder name). 0: Stopped 1 to 8: AT progress number When heat/cool control is not used *The number changes from 4 to 3 to 2 to 1, with 0 indicating that AT is complete. * The numbers 4, 3, and 2 indicate the progress of AT ON/OFF output. 1 indicates AT stabilization. When heat/cool control is used * The number changes from 8 to 7 to 6 to 5 to 4 to 3 to 2 to 1, with 0 indicating that AT is complete. * The numbers 8, 7, and 6 indicate the progress of AT ON/OFF output for heating. 5 indicates AT stabilization. * The numbers 4, 3, and 2 indicate the progress of AT ON/OFF output for cooling. 1 indicates AT stabilization. The following describes how to set the AT type of loop 1 to Fast response. Set the AT type. In the loop control (basic setting) bank, make setting as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control (basic setting) (Loop 1) AT type 1: Fast (response to disturbance) Simple Multi-function Example 2 The following describes how to configure the loop 1 auto tuning so that the AT result for derivative time is always 0.0. Set the AT adjustment factor. In the loop control (algorithm) bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control (algorithm) (Loop 1) AT adjustment factor, proportional band 1.00 (Loop 1) AT adjustment factor, integral time 1.00 Multi-function (Loop 1) AT adjustment factor, derivative time 0.00 Note If an AT adjustment factor is set, the PID constant resulting from AT is multiplied by the adjustment factor and the result is used as the PID constant setting. When using the PID constant calculated with the AT unchanged, the AT adjustment factor does not need to be set. Use the default setting (1.00) unchanged. 7-15

148 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-9 Zone PID Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. PID control can be performed using the Zone PID function. The zone PID is a function that selects a PID constant group from a group of 1 to 4 according to the SP or PV value. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) SP or PV Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 PID 4 groups PID 3 groups PID 2 groups PID 1 groups The zone switches in the following manner. This example illustrates how PID1 and PID2 switch. PID1 Hysteresis for zone Zone 1 set point PID2 PID group switches at this value Switches after the value passes 1U Banks and settings Example Loop (extended) The following example describes the zone PID function used with a PV from 100 C in increments of 100 C in loop 1. Configure zones. In the loop control (extended settings) bank, set as follows. For zones 1 to 3, configure so that their ranges increase in chronological order. The hysteresis for the zone is used when the zone is moved to that having a number, which is 1 smaller than the current number. Set a value that is sufficiently smaller than the width of each zone. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control (extended) (Loop 1) Zone operation selection 1: PV-based selection (Loop 1) Zone Multi-function (Loop 1) Zone (Loop 1) Zone (Loop 1) Hysteresis for zone

149 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-10 Cold Junction Compensation If the PV range is a thermocouple, the cold junction compensation method can be selected. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Inputoutput PV input Cold junction compensation 0: Use internal compensation 1: Do not use internal compensation Multi-function If the cold junction compensation internal input is not within 20 to 80 C, a CJ error (AL71, AL72, AL73, AL74) will occur. Cold junction compensation is performed at 20.0 C when the range is under 20.0 C, and 80.0 C when it is over 80.0 C. 7-17

150 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-11 Logical Operations This unit can perform logical operations (Boolean operation consisting of "0" and "1") corresponding to various statuses and can use the logical operation results as ON/OFF outputs or internal contact inputs. 16 groups of logical operations are provided. One operation group consists of four inputs and one output. Four kinds of logical operations are provided. Furthermore, the input or output logic can be inverted. Input assignment A Input assignment B Input assignment C Input assignment D Inverted input bit Inverted input bit Inverted input bit Inverted input bit Logical operations, 4 types 1. (A and B) or (C and D) 2. (A or B) and (C or D) 3. A or B or C or D 4. A and B and C and D Inversion ON delay OFF delay Latch Logical operation results Processing sequence for logical operations Certain logical operation results can be used as inputs of the logical operation in the same group or a different group. The operating process of the logical operation is performed at intervals of sampling cycles in the group No. order. Therefore, the logical operation results of a smaller group No. can be used in the same cycle period. The logical operation results in the same group No. or a lager group No. are used in the next cycle period. Note Logical operations 1 4 are executed before PID calculation and 5 16 are executed afterwards. 7-18

151 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Function Logical operation Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Multi-function Input assignment ((1024 to 2047)) Input assignment ((1024 to 2047)) Input assignment ((1024 to 2047)) Input assignment ((1024 to 2047)) Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse ON delay time: 0.0 to s OFF delay time: 0.0 to s Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON Example The following describes the settings required so that digital output 1 turns on using logical operation group 1 when any of event 1 event 2, or representative of all alarms is in the ON state. (1) Set the logical operation. In the logical operation bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Function Logical operation (Logical operation group 1) Calculation type 3: Calculation (A or B or C or D) (Logical operation group 1) Input assignment A 1088: Event 1 Multi-function (Logical operation group 1) Input assignment B 1089: Event 2 (Logical operation group 1) Input assignment C 1792: Representative of all alarms (Logical operation group 1) Input assignment D 1024: OFF (Logical operation group 1) Inverted input bit A 0: Direct (Logical operation group 1) Inverted input bit B 0: Direct (Logical operation group 1) Inverted input bit C 0: Direct (Logical operation group 1) Inverted input bit D 0: Direct (Logical operation group 1) ON delay time 0.0 s (Logical operation group 1) OFF delay time 0.0 s (Logical operation group 1) Inverted 0: Direct (Logical operation group 1) Latch 0: No latch 7-19

152 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED (2) Set the results of logical operation 1 for digital output 1. Configure the settings as shown below in the OUT/DO output bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Inputoutput OUT/DO output (OUT/DO output 1) Output type 1440: Logical Operation 1 Simple Multi-function (OUT/DO output 1) Latch 0: No latch Multi-function (OUT/DO output 1) Time proportional operation type (OUT/DO output 1) Min. ON/OFF time (OUT/DO output 1) Time proportional cycle (Invalid setting) Simple Multi-function 10 ms (Invalid setting) (OUT/DO output 1) Phase shift (Invalid setting) Multi-function Latch Select the latch behavior for logical operations from the following. 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) To release the latch, use one of the following methods. In Setup, set Release all latches to 1 (Release latch). *Note: This can be done only through the loader or host communications. In Internal contact IN (digital input), set Operation type to 47 (Release all latches) In Logical operation, set Latch to 0 (No latch). Turn OFF the power to this unit, and then turn it ON again. 7-20

153 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-12 UFLED The UFLED function assigns LED conditions (off, lit, flash) to 10 LED operation lamps (F0 to F9). When the bit condition selected from the lighting condition becomes 1, the LED lamp is lit or flashes. Banks and settings The following settings can be applied to the LED operation lamps (F0 to F1). LED name Color Folder name Bank name Item name Settings F0 Red Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047: Default (other than position proportional output) 1792 (Representative of all alarms) Default (Position proportioning) 1792 (Representative of all alarms) UFLED settings Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) 3 (Fast blink) 3 (Fast blink) F1 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1088: Event : Event 1 Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F2 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1089: Event (MFB1 OPEN) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F3 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1090: Event (MFB1 CLOSE) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F4 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1091: Event (MFB1 OPEN) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F5 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1092: Event (MFB1 CLOSE) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 1 (Lit) F6 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1093: Event (MFB1 in estimating) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 5: Slow blink F7 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1094: Event (MFB2 in estimating) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 1 (Lit) 5: Slow blink F8 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1545 (Communicating) 1545 (Communicating) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 3 (Fast blink) 3 (Fast blink) F9 Green Other UFLED settings Lighting condition 1024 to 2047 (Same as F0) 1968 (Parameter error) 1968 (Parameter error) Other UFLED settings Lighting status 0 to 6 (Same as F0) 3 (Fast blink) 3 (Fast blink) Display level Multifunction Lighting status 0: Off Always off 1: Lit Lit when lighting condition is set to ON 2: Lit (Reverse) Lit when lighting condition is set to OFF 3: Fast Blink Blinks fast when lighting condition is set to ON 4: Fast Blink (Reverse) Blinks fast when lighting condition is set to OFF 5: Slow Blink Blinks slowly when lighting condition is set to ON 6: Slow Blink (Reverse) Blinks slowly when lighting condition is set to OFF Handling Precautions If time proportioning output is included in the lighting conditions, the LED may not lit if the ON time is less than 100ms. 7-21

154 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-13 Start Delay at Power ON The time between turning the power on and the start of operation can be extended to a maximum of 60s. Operation starts once the total of the product-specific startup time required by this product (9s), and the duration of this setting, has elapsed. The product-specific startup time requirement cannot be shortened. The initial setting is 2s. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic Setup Start delay at power ON 0 to 60 s 2 Multi-function Note The startup status is as follows: (ROM versions 2.01 [1_0_1] and later) During the start delay after the power is turned on, the middle and bottom levels of LEDs blink slowly. Power ON (1) 9 seconds (2) 2 seconds (3) 1 seconds (4) 5 seconds Inter-module data forwarding function sending begins Host communication receiving begins *1 Calculation begins Device operation mode (RUN/IDLE) confirmed Loader communication begins Inter-module data forwarding function receiving begins (1) Running : 9 seconds (fixed) (2) Run delay when turned on : 2 seconds (initial value) can be changed (3) Wait time for host communication receiving to begin : 1 second (fixed) (4) Wait time for inter-module data transfer function sending to begin : 5 seconds (fixed) *2 *1: For ROM version 1.00[1_0_0], host communication begins after (1) Running. *2: For ROM versions 1.xx and 2.00[1_0_1], it begins 5 seconds (fixed) after (2) Run delay when turned on. Handling Precautions The start delay at power on should normally be set to at least 2s. If the setting is shorter, the PV value could fluctuate greatly before it stabilizes. Use the Start Delay at Power On to wait for partner devices to start when communicating with other modules. 7-22

155 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-14 User-Defined Bit User-defined bits are 32 ON/OFF variables that can be read and written using host or loader communications. Example The following describes the settings required so that when user-defined bit 1 is turned ON or OFF the mode of loop 1 is switched to READY or RUN respectively. (1) Set the RUN/READY mode selection to internal contact 1. Configure the settings as shown below in the Internal contact IN bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Function Internal contact IN (Internal contact group 1) Operation type 21: RUN/READY mode selection Simple (Internal contact group 1) Input type 1408: User-defined bit 1 Multi-function (Internal contact group 1) Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1 (Internal contact group 1) Weighting (Invalid setting) (2) Change the value of user-defined bit 1 using communications. Input 0 (RUN) or 1 (READY) to the data address of user-defined bit 1 in the user-defined bit bank. Note User-defined bits are also used by data transfer function between modules. 7-23

156 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-15 User-Defined Numbers User-defined numbers are 16 numerical variables that can be read and written using host or loader communications. Example The following is an example where the the analog value from the host device is received via host communication, and is then output. User-defined number 1 is used to the output analog of host device from continuous output 1. (1) Assign user-defined numerical number 1 to analog current output 1. In the OUT/DO output bank, set as follows. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Inputoutput Continuous (Continuous output 1) Output type 0: 4 to 20 ma Simple output (Continuous output 1) Output type 2111: User-defined number 1 Multi-function (Continuous output 1) Loop/channel definition (Invalid setting) (Continuous output 1) Output decimal point position 1: 1 digits after the decimal point (Continuous output 1) Output scaling high limit 0 (Continuous output 1) Output scaling high limit 1000 (2) Change the value of user-defined number 1 using host communications. Multiply the MV from the host device by 10 and input the result into the data address of user-defined number 1 in the User-defined numbers bank. (If the MV is 50.0 %, input 500 into the address.) Note User-defined numbers are also used for data transmission between modules. 7-24

157 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-16 Data Transfer Function between Modules Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. * Modules performing multi-loop cooperative control cannot use this function. Inter-module data transfer settings are configured from the loader. Settings for the data transfer function between modules cannot be written or read through host communications. This function transfers data between modules by setting module parameters. Banks and settings The following data can be transmitted by the data transfer function between modules. Folder name Bank name Parameter name Numerical Value Bit Basic Input assignment AI assignment O * 1 Assigned RSP O * 1 AI assignment O * 1 Inputoutput OUT/DO output Output type O * 1 O * 1 Continuous output Output type O Event Event config. Loop/channel definition O * Operation type (standard number type) Function Internal contact IN Input type O Logical operation Input assignment O MV Branching Output Loop assignment O * 1 Other UFLED settings Lighting condition O *1. ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later Cycle period (NX-D25) Folder name Bank name Item name Setting range Remarks Basic Cycle settings Cycle period 200 or 400 ms Set either 200 or 400(ms). Do not set any other value. 100 to 200: Operates as 200ms. 201 to 400: Operates as 400ms (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) Cycle period (NX-D35) Folder name Bank name Item name Setting range Remarks Basic Cycle settings Cycle period 100, 200, or 400 ms (ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later) Set any of 100, 200, or 400 (ms). Do not set any other value. 100: Operates as 100 ms. 101 to 200: Operates as 200 ms. 201 to 400: Operates as 400 ms. Handling Precautions Cycle period Always set 400ms if the data transfer function between modules is used. If multi-loop coordinated control is used, instructions and settings from the supervisor module are used for operation, so do not change the value (which is set to 200 ms). Precaution when using a module with this function in other instrumentation Be sure to clear all parameters for the function using the SLP-NX. 7-25

158 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Handling Precautions If a loader is used to configure the data transfer function between modules, be sure to configure both the data sending and receiving modules. When a module previously configured for data transfer between modules is to be used for other purposes, disable the data transfer function, clear all related settings, and set the cycle period to 200 ms. Problems such as the following could occur if the settings are left in place. * When there is a counterpart: Unintended operation of the data transfer function between modules can occur, potentially writing values to other modules. * When there is no counterpart: Connection checks may be transmitted to nonexistent counterparts, degrading performance in normal communications. Do not distribute project files, for which the inter-module data transfer function has been performed, to other projects for which the inter-module data transfer function is not being performed. The data transfer function between modules settings can be written which are not visible on the loader Setup screen, and unintended operation of the data transfer function between modules can occur. In the inter-module data transfer function, even if normal operations cannot be performed due to the status of a partner module, the module will continue to run. When turning on the power, if you want to start computation after data has been received on the receiving module, set the Start delay at power ON setting parameter on the receiving module so that it is seven seconds higher than that Start delay at power ON setting parameter on the sending module. Otherwise, calculations will begin before the data is received. * Be careful, for example, when 2 modules send and receive data to and from each other. Be sure to fully consider the design for power supply and start-up before use. Receiver s module Power ON Calculation begins (1) (2) (3) (4) Inter-module data transfer Sender s (1) (2) (3) (4) module (1) Running : 9 seconds (fixed) (2) Run delay when turned on : 2 seconds (initial value) can be changed *1 (3) Wait time for host communication receiving to begin : 1 second (fixed) (4) Wait time for inter-module data transfer function sending to begin : 5 seconds (fixed) *1: After setup time has elapsed, calculations will begin. 7-26

159 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Note Chapter 5, "Function for Transmitting Data Between Modules" in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version, CP-SP-1313E Chapter 6, Parameter Setting in Network Instrumentation Module Smart Loader Package SLP-NX User s Manual, CP-UM-5636E 7-27

160 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-17 Reception Monitoring and Communication Timeout This function monitors whether user-defined bits and user-defined values have been written normally through communications. Data writing Data writing Data writing Data writing Data writing Monitoring target (Write data storage area) Time-out time 0 errors occurred Reception monitoring ( bit) ON OFF Banks and settings The following settings are possible for reception monitoring 1 to 16 Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Function Reception monitoring 1 Address Addresses for which write monitoring is performed *Any of user-defined numbers 1 to 16 *Any of user-defined bits 1 to 32 Timeout Timeout period (s) 180 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1: With reception monitoring 0: Not used Multi-function Set the user-defined bits or user-defined numbers to monitor for writing, then set the time until a warning occurs. * The address to monitor is any one of the user-defined numbers 1 to 16, or any one of the user-defined bits 1 to 32. If a reception error occurs, the corresponding standard bits (1920 to 1935) and the representative (1979) are activated. Note Chapter 5, "Function for Transmitting Data Between Modules" in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version, CP-SP-1313E Transmission timeout between modules Alarm (AL32) will be activated if there is no response from the other module during communication. Signal to supervisor module timeout (standard bit 1982) This function is activated if there is no notification from the supervisor module about its data reception from the module for the specified time. Chapter 5, Configuration of Ethernet Communications in Network Instrumentation Module User's Manual Network Design Version, CP-SP-1313E, 7-28

161 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-18 Cycle Setup Make settings related to the control cycle. (ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later) Banks and settings For the NX-D15 Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic Cycle settings Cycle period 500 ms 500ms (Do not set any other value) Multi-function For the NX-D25 Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic Cycle settings Cycle period 200: 200 ms 400: 400 ms 200 Multi-function For the NX-D35 Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic Cycle settings Cycle period 100: 100 ms 200: 200 ms 400: 400 ms 100 Multi-function Handling Precautions Do not set any values other than those above. Always set 400ms if the data transfer function between modules is used on the NX-D25/ Data Transfer Function between Modules (page 7-25). 7-29

162 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-19 Input Assignment Function The input assignment function can be used for tasks such as changing the input channels for the PV (loop) used in loop control. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop (Input assignment) PV assignment RSP assignment AI assignment Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical codes 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code For the NX-D15 0: Default *1 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI4 For the NX-D25/35 0: Default *1 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI to 3071: numerical code Multi-function *1 This function is compatible with ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later of the NX-D15. Note [0:Default] means that the same input channel as the loop number is used. Example : If loop 1 is set to [0: Default], PV 1 is selected. PV assignment makes the PV assignment described in the appendix PID control process block diagram (direct or reverse action) (page App.-6) or PID control process block diagram (heat/cool control) (page App.-7). RSP assignment makes the RSP assignment described in the SP process block diagram (page App.-4). AI assignment makes the AI assignment described in the PV input process block diagram (page App.-3). Handling Precautions In AI assignment, the PV input processes are performed on ratio, bias, linearization, range high and low limits (high and low limits for alarm issue) and alarms, and also for inputs set by the filter function, and PV inputs (channels) are created. n PV input process block diagram (page App.-3). 7-30

163 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-20 Just-FiTTER The Just-FiTTER function suppresses overshoot. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor 0 to 99 Multi-function (algorithm) Just-FiTTER settling band 0.00 to Function of Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor If the factor is set to 0, the function is disabled. If the setting is 1 or more, the larger the factor, the more overshoot is suppressed. Just-FiTTER settling band function If the absolute value of the deviation (%) for the PV range is larger than this setting, Just-FiTTER operates. If it is smaller, Just-FiTTER judges that the PV is stable. 7-31

164 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-21 SP Lag SP lag suppresses the amount of MV change when the SP is changed. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Display level Basic Loop control (algorithm) SP lag factor 0.0 to s Multi-function SP lag function If the factor is set to 0.0, the SP lag has no effect. If the setting is 0.1 or more, the larger the factor, the smaller the amount of MV change when the SP is changed, and the more strongly overshoot is suppressed. SP lag formula OUT = OUT_1 + (IN OUT_1)/(T/Ts + 1) IN : Input to the SP lag OUT : SP lag filter calculation output OUT_1 :SP lag filter calculation output (previous) T : SP lag factor (time constant (s)) Ts : Sampling cycle (according to the controller setting) Initialization of SP lag The SP lag filter calculation output is initialized to the PV under the condition given below. When the loop mode changes from READY to RUN and vice versa. 7-32

165 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-22 Internal Cascade Control Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. This function is not available for multi-stage cascade controls that utilize three or more loops. Two control loops can be used in group 2 within a module to control master / slave-type cascades. Cascade control can be used for a maximum of two groups on the NX-D25, and one group on the NX-D35. This function is available for ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. The control loops of the internal cascade control function can be constructed from loop 1, loop 2, loop 3, and loop 4 (NX-D25 only). Loop 1 and loop 3 function as the master side, while loop 2 and loop 4 function as the slave side. Internal cascade control elements Cascade controls have a double loop configuration consisting of a master-side control loop and a slave-side control loop. Master-side control loops scale the MV value calculated by the PID control and output it to the slave-side RSP. Slave-side control loops control the slave-side PV value so that it matches the RSP. Master Slave Assigned RSP SP set value (LSP) PID set value MV PID control MV Scaling RSP Assigned RSP SP set value (LSP) PID set value PID control MV final control elements Assigned PV Assigned PV Controlled variable (Master) Controlled variable (Slave) NX Control target Model No. Master Slave Loop 1 Loop 2 NX-D25 Loop 3 Loop 4 NX-D35 Loop 1 Loop 2 Scaling This section explains the methods used to scale the master-side control loop MV value to the slave-side control loop RSP. Scaling is updated for each cycle period according to the following formula. RSP=(MVm 100) (SH SL)+SL+base value The following shows the meanings of variables used in the calculation formulas: RSP : Remote SP SL : Output scaling low limit SH : Output scaling high limit MVm : Master MV 7-33

166 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED The base value depends on the scaling method used. For "0 : Fixed" the base value is the fixed value (0.0). For "1: SP-based" the base value is the master-side SP. For "2: PV-based" the base value is the master-side PV. Internal cascade control setting methods Internal cascade controls use one NX-D25/35 module for cascade control. The fields necessary for configuration an internal cascade control are as follows. Only the setting content related to the internal cascade controls is listed. For the NX-D25 Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Basic Setup Loop type 27: 1 loop (internal cascade with RSP) 28: 1 loop (internal cascade with RSP) + 2 loops 29: 2 loops (internal cascade with RSP) Multi-function For the NX-D35 Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Basic Setup Loop type 27: 1 loop (internal cascade with RSP) Multi-function For the NX-D25/35 Folder name Bank name Item name Details Display level Basic Loop output (cascade) SP scaling method 0: Fixed 1: SP-based Multi-function 2: PV-based Output scaling low limit to Output scaling high limit to SP output filter 0.00 to s 7-34

167 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Setting method This section explains the method for constructing a single loop internal cascade control on a NX-D25/35. Configure settings in the following order. (1) Set loop type to "27:1 Loop (internal cascade with RSP)." (2) Set the scaling method for loop 1 (master side) in the Basic / loop output (cascade). 7-22, Internal Cascade Control (page 7-33). (3) Set the scaling low and scaling high limit for loop 1 (master side). (4) Set the SP output filter for loop 1 (master side) if necessary. When the slave-side RSP or slave-side control output oscillates slightly, set the SP output filter. (5) After completing the above settings, change "LSP/RSP" for loop 2 (slave side) on the universal monitor, etc. to "RSP." Note Changing the slave-side control loop "LSP/RSP" to "LSP" means that PID control is carried out by the slave-side control loop only. When using RSP tracking, the RSP value from immediately beforehand is applied to the slave LSP. 7-26, RSP Tracking (page 7-42) The initial RSP value when the slave-side control loop "LSP/RSP" has been changed to "RSP" and cascade control started is the slave-side control loop LSP value. When the slave-side control loop is "LSP," auto tuning can only be performed for the slave-side control loop. When the slave-side control loop is "RSP," auto tuning can only be performed for the master-side control loop. When internal cascade control is active, changing the "RUN/READY" for the master-side control loop or slave-side control loop to "AUTO/MANUAL" will also change the settings for the other control loop. When loop mode is MANUAL, changing the master-side MV will also change the slave side RSP value, and changing the slave-side MV will change the output value to final control elements. 7-35

168 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-23 IDLE/SV Communication Error Operation Set the operation for IDLE/SV communication error (Signal to supervisor module timeout). In either status, output terminals executes the set operation. This function is available for ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic IDLE/SV com error op Output type See the tables below 1 Multi-function Output (%) 10.0 to % 0.0 % Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0: OFF 1 : ON (Separate sheet) Output type setup Output type Operation during IDLE IDLE/SV err (EV) op 0 Preset Preset 1 Preset Through 2 Preset Bumpless 3 Bumpless Preset 4 Bumpless Through 5 Bumpless Bumpless Settings Output terminals (four terminals for transistor output and serial output, and four terminals for digital output) can be set individually for terminals. When the output terminal is current output/voltage output, set an output value of %. When the output terminals are transistor output/digital output, and time proportioning output has been assigned, set output to %. When the output terminals are transistor output/digital output, and ON/OFF output has been assigned, set output (ON/OFF). Output type When output type is preset: set to "Output" in advance. When output type is set to through: Output the results of the assigned output type. When output type is set to bumpless: Maintain the output immediately prior to IDLE or to the SV comm. error. When control is set to RUN again and the SV comm. returns to normal, assignment output will be output. Bumpless output does not occur at recovery. 7-36

169 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED Output For continuous output terminals or terminals where time proportional output is set as the output type, output can be set in %. Terminals for which the ON/OFF output type is set can be set to output ON/OFF. Handling Precautions The output type when writing parameters from the rotor is the action set previously. A SV comm. error is can be said to have occurred when a signal to supervisor module timeout occurs when combined with a supervisor servo module. 7-17, Reception Monitoring and Communication Timeout (page 7-28). SV comm. errors do not occur when not using a supervisor servo module. When using multi-loop cooperative control, be sure to set "1:Preset/Through" to 4:Bumpless/Through. 1-4, Operation Modes (page 1-7) Note PV input process block diagram (page App.-3), Continuous output process block diagram (page App.-10), OUT/DO output process block diagram (page App.-12). 7-37

170 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-24 Fixed Value Output Handling Precautions This function is not available on the NX-D15. However, when the sum of weighting values of the internal contact inputs is "0" or when the fixed value group selection setting is not provided on the internal contact input, the fixed value output cannot be used. Additionally, since the number of fixed value output settings is "8", the fixed value output 8 is selected if the sum of weighting values of the internal contact inputs is "9" or more. This unit can use a fixed value selected by the internal contact input instead of the MV (manipulated variable) of the PID control. Eight fixed value outputs are set for each loop. The priority of the fixed value output is higher than the MV of the PID control, Output at PV alarm, Output at READY, Output at READY (heat), Output at READY (cool), but it is lower than the MV in the MANUAL mode. This function is available for ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. MV of PID control (manipulated variable) Output at PV error Output at READY Sum of weighting values of internal contact input set for fixed value output selection Fixed value output 1 Fixed value output 2 Fixed value output Fixed value output selection MV (manipulated variable) in MANUAL mode Banks and settings MV (manipulated variable) Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Basic Loop output (MV) Fixed value outputs 1 to to Multi-function Example The following describes an example that the fixed value output selection is used from "10.0 %" to "70.0 %" in steps of "10.0" using three digital inputs, C-column 1 to C-column [1] Set the fixed value output. (1) Set the fixed value output as follows. In the loop output (MV) bank, set as follows. (In this example, fixed value output 8 is not used.) Folder name Bank name Item name Settings 7-38 Basic Loop output (MV) Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output Fixed value output 8 0.0

171 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED (2) In the internal contact input setup bank (IC), configure the settings so that the fixed value group selection uses the digital inputs DI1 to DI3. Configure the settings as shown below in the Internal contact IN bank setup. Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Function Internal contact IN (Internal contact group 1) Operation type 3: Fixed value output selection (Internal contact group 1) Input type 1152 (DI1 terminal status) (Internal contact group 1) Loop/channel definition 1 (Internal contact group 1) Weighting 1 (Internal contact group 2) Operation type 3: Fixed value output selection (Internal contact group 2) Input type 1153: DI 2 terminal status (Internal contact group 2) Loop/channel definition 1 (Internal contact group 2) Weighting 2 (Internal contact group 3) Operation type 3: Fixed value output selection (Internal contact group 3) Input type 1154 (DI1 terminal status) (Internal contact group 3) Loop/channel definition 1 (Internal contact group 3) Weighting 4 Note The response for fixed value outputs selected as the status for digital input DI1 to DI3 is as follows. Fixed value output 1 chosen DI1 DI2 DI3 Fixed value output 1 OFF OFF OFF Fixed value output 2 ON OFF OFF Fixed value output 3 OFF ON OFF Fixed value output 4 ON ON OFF Fixed value output 5 OFF OFF ON Fixed value output 6 ON OFF ON Fixed value output 7 OFF ON ON Fixed value output 8 ON ON ON 7-39

172 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-25 Zener Barrier Adjustment and Wiring Resistance Correction When using a zener barrier where PV input is a resistance temperature detector, be sure to perform zener barrier adjustment. Moreover, this adjustment can be made when the resistance of the three wires to the PV input terminals is different even when not using a zener barrier. This adjustment is unnecessary and not possible for inputs other that the resistance temperature detector (RTD). This function is available for ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. Banks and settings Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level Inputoutput Zener barrier adjst. Command to store adjusted values 0: Stop adjustment 1: Store adjusted values 99: Zero-clear adjusted values Values other than those above are not defined Adjustment factor to Ω 0.00 Ω 0 Multi-function Adjustment procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the zener barrier. Carry out adjustment for each PV channel. Hard wiring status Purpose Range type Wiring 1 Zener barrier adjst. 41 to 48 Short circuit between A and B in the terminal sections of the resistance temperature detector (RTD). 2 Zener barrier adjst. 41 to 52 Remove the resistance temperature detector, connect a Ω resistor between A and B, and create a short circuit between B and C. 3 Effect of wiring resistance 41 to 52 Remove the resistance temperature detector (RTD) at the end of the long extension wire, connect a Ω resistor between A and B, and create a short circuit between B and C. This unit This unit Zener barrier Zener barrier Zener barrier C B A Shortcircuit Shortcircuit Ω Zener barrier Zener barrier Zener barrier C B A Wiring status 1 Wiring status 2 This unit Shortcircuit Ω Long wiring Long wiring Long wiring C B A Wiring status 3 Setting adjusted values (1) Set the number of the resistance temperature detector (RTD) used in the PV input bank range type. (2) Turn off the power to this device, and wire it in one of the hard-wired states 1 to 3. When adjusting the zener barrier, use wiring 1 or 2 as appropriate to the range type. Wire as in 3 to correct wiring resistance. 7-40

173 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED (3) Monitor the "Zener barrier adjust monitor values 1-4" and check if they are stable. (4) Write 0 in the command to store adjusted values. (5) Write 1 in the command to store adjusted values. The adjusted value will then be stored. (6) Turn off the power to this unit, and hard wire the resistance temperature detector (RTD) correctly. Clearing adjusted values (1) Set the number of the resistance temperature detector (RTD) in the PV input bank range type. The adjusted values can also be cleared in the any of the range types for the resistance temperature detector (RTD). (2) Write 0 in the command to store adjusted values. (3) Write 99 in the command to store adjusted values. (4) Turn off the power to this unit, and hard wire the resistance temperature detector (RTD) correctly. Handling Precautions Zener barrier adjustments can only be performed when the sensor type set in the PV input bank range type is a resistance temperature detector (RTD). When using a sensor other than a resistance temperature detector (RTD), adjusted values cannot be stored even if a save operation is performed through a command to store adjusted values. Additionally, adjusted values cannot be cleared. When the value for the command to store adjusted values is changed from 0 to 1, the adjusted value is saved. Adjusted values are not saved if 1 is written continuously. When the value for the command to store adjusted values is changed from 0 to 99, the adjusted value is zero cleared. Adjusted values are not cleared if 99 is written continuously. Use Zener barriers that have a resistance of 85 Ω or less, including the resistance of the wire. Adjust so that the difference in resistance of the Zener barrier and long extension wire is within 20 Ω. At more than 20 Ω, adjustment becomes impossible and the value cannot be written. Once Zener barrier adjustment has been performed once, the same adjustment value will be use even if the PV range type is changed to a different resistance temperature detector (RTD). When using a different range type for the resistance temperature detector (RTD), carry out readjustment. The value written to the command to store adjusted values is not stored in nonvolatile memory. This value is 0 when the power is turned ON. When undefined values are written to the command to store adjusted values, the adjusted value is not stored. 7-41

174 Chapter 7. FUNCTIONS USED AS REQUIRED 7-26 RSP Tracking When switching from RSP mode to LSP mode, the current RSP value is written as the LSP value. When multiple SP system groups are set, the number selected when the mode is change is written to the LSP. Also, when the loop type is an internal cascade, the internal RSP is written as the slave LSP. However, RSP tracking is not performed in the following cases. When the loop mode is READY mode When the loop mode is MANUAL mode When a fixed value output is output Setting bank and setting data fields Folder name Bank name Item name Settings Default Display level SP SP configuration RSP Tracking 0: Tracking OFF 1: Tracking ON 0 Multi-function 7-42

175 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-1 Outline of Communication Communication with a PC, PLC or other host devices is available using a user-configured program that uses RS-485 communication. CPL communication (Controller Peripheral Link: Azbil Corporation's host communication protocol) or MODBUS communication can be selected as the communication protocol. This chapter describes the CPL communications. Features The features of the module's communication function are as follows: Up to 31 modules can be connected to a single master station as a host device. When the communication specifications of the host device conform to the RS- 232C interface, the communication converter CMC10L (sold separately) is required. The CMC10L allows conversion between RS-232C and RS-485. Almost all of the module parameters can be communicated. Chapter 12, List of Communication Data. Random access commands are available. Two or more parameters at separated addresses can be read or written by a single command. Settings To activate CPL communications with the module, set as follows. Item name Details Default Communications type 0: CPL 1: MODBUS/ACSII 2: MODBUS/RTU Station address setting 0: No communications 1 to 127 Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 1: 9600 bps 2: bps 3: bps 4: bps 5: bps Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits Data format (parity) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity 2: No parity Data format Stop bits 0: 1 bits 1: 2 bits Minimum response time 1 to 250 ms Handling Precautions If you use the Azbil CMC10L as an RS-485 converter, set the minimum response time to 3 ms or longer. The supported transmission speed of the CMC10L is up to bps. If there is an error in the settings for RS-485 communication conditions (transmission speed or data format (data length, parity, or stop bits)) an AL33 is generated. In that case, either repeat writing or restart the system. 8-1

176 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication procedures The communication procedure is as follows: (1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to one unit (slave station). (2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message. (3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message. (4) The master station receives the response message. Handling Precautions CPL, MODBUS/ASCII and MODBUS/RTU protocols cannot be used together on the same RS-485 line. 8-2

177 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-2 Message Structure Message Structure The following shows the message structure. Messages are broadly classified into two layers: the data link layer and the application layer. Data link layer This layer contains the basic information required for communication. For example, the destination of the communication message and the check information of the message. Application layer Data is read and written in this layer. The content of the layer varies according to the purpose of the message. Messages comprise parts (1) to (8) as shown in the figure below. The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer. 02H 58H 03H 0DH 0AH STX X ETX CR LF (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Data link layer Application layer Data link layer 1 frame (1) STX (start of message) (5) Instrution message = command, (2) Station address response message = response (3) Sub-address (6) EXT (end of command/response) (4) Device code (7) Checksum (8) Delimiter (end of message) Data link layer Outline The data link layer is of a fixed length. The position of each data item and the number of its characters are already decided. Note, however, that the data positions of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the number of characters in the application layer. Response start conditions The device sends the response message only when all the message components in the data link layer of the instruction message are correct. If even one of these is incorrect, no response message is sent, and the device stands by for reception of STX. List of data link layer data definitions The following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer: Data name Character code Number of characters Meaning of data STX 02 h 1 Start of message Station address setting 0 to 7FH are expressed as hexadecimal character codes. 2 Identification of device to communicate with Sub-address Sub address "00" (30H, 30H) 2 No function Device code "X" (58H) or "x" (78H) 1 Device type ETX 03 h 1 Application layer end position Checksum of 00H to FFH are expressed as twodigit 2 Checksum of message message hexadecimal character codes Delimiter CR (0DH), LF (0AH) 2 End of message 8-3

178 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Description of data items STX (02H) When the start code is received, the module judges this to be the start of the send message. It follows that if a delimiter has not been received previously, the module judges that a message start STX has been received. The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the module's response at the next message from the master station in the event that noise, for example, causes a message error. Station address Of the messages received, the unit creates response messages only when station addresses are the same. Station addresses in the messages are expressed as two hexadecimal characters. The module returns the same sub-address as that of the received message. However, when the station address is set to "00" (30H 30H), the unit does not respond even if the station addresses match. Sub-address Two hexadecimal characters can be used, from 00 (30H 30H) to FF (46H 46H). The module returns the same sub-address as that of the received message. Device code X (58H) or x (78H) can be used. This code is determined for each device series, and other codes cannot be selected. The module returns the same device code as that of the received message. These can be used to identify the messages, for example by using X (58H) as the initial value and x (78H) in resend messages. ETX (03H) ETX indicates the end of the application layer. Checksum This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes the message content to change during communications. The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters. How to calculate a checksum (1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte modules. (2) Take two's complement of the low-order one byte of the addition result. (3) Convert the obtained two's complement to a two-byte ASCII code. The following is a sample checksum calculation for a sample message: [Message example] STX : 02H 0 : 30H (first byte of the station address) 1 : 31H (second byte of the station address) 0 : 30H (first byte of the sub-address) 0 : 30H (second byte of the sub-address) X : 58H (device code) R : 52H (first byte of the command) D : 44H (second byte of the command) (omitted) ETX : 03H 8-4

179 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION (1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte modules. The addition operation in single byte modules is as follows: 02H + 30H + 31H + 30H + 30H + 58H + 52H + 53H H. Assume that the result is 376H. (2) The low-order one byte of the addition result 376H is 76H. The two's complement of 76H is 8AH. (3) Convert the obtained 8AH to a two-byte ASCII code. The result is: 8 : 38H A : 41H The two bytes 8 (38H) and A (41H) are the checksum. End code (CR/LF) This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the device enters a state allowed to process the received message. Application layer The table below shows the configuration of the application layer. Item Description Command "RS" (decimal format continuous address data read) "WS" (decimal format continuous address data write) "RD" (hexadecimal format continuous address data read) "WD" (hexadecimal format continuous address data write) RU (hexadecimal format random address data read) WU (hexadecimal format random address data write) Data delimiter RS, WS command:, (comma) Other commands: None Word address RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation and "W", such as "501W". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "01F5". Read number RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation, such as "1". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "0001". Write conditions RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation, such as "100". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "0064". The number of data records accessible by a single instruction message and response message cycle is as follows: Command RAM EEPROM RD WD RU WU RS WS Handling Precautions 4 characters are used for numeric representation of RD,WD, RU, or WU command. It the numeric representation consists of less than 4 characters, add "0" to the left end so that the No. of characters is

180 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-3 Description of Commands Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a hexadecimal format. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R D (1) (2) (3) (1) Command (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning (reading of single data item) X X (1) (2) Normal end or Warning (reading of multiple data items) X X (1) (2) (3) (4) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data (1st item) (3) Data (2nd and following items) (4) Data (final item) Note The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 8-13). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as

181 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command) Writing is performed in a hexadecimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: Writing of single data item W D (1) (2) (3) Writing of multiple data items W D (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Command (2) Start data address (3) Data (1st item) (4) Data (2nd and following items) (5) Data (final item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). Note For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 8-13). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address. 8-7

182 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length random data read command (RU command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a hexadecimal format. Instruction message Specifies at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R U 0 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Command (2) Sub-command, fixed to 00 (3) Data address (1st item) (4) Data address (2nd and following items) (5) Data address (final item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) (2) (3) (4) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data (1st item) (3) Data (2nd and following items) (4) Data (final item) The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). Note For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 8-13). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as 0000H. 8-8

183 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length random data write command (WU command) Writing is performed in a hexadecimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Groups data addresses and data, and specifies at least one group. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: W U 0 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) Command (2) Sub-command, fixed to 00 (3) Data address (1st group) (4) Write data (1st group) (5) Data address, write data (2nd and following groups) (6) Data address (final group) (7) Write data (final group) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) The abnormal end code is entered at XX. (1) End code The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). Note For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 8-13). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address. 8-9

184 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Continuous data read command (RS command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a decimal format. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R S, W, 1 (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (1) Command (2) Data delimiter (3) Start data address ( W is required) (4) Number of data records Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning (reading of single data item) X X, (1) (2) (3) Normal end or Warning (reading of multiple data items) X X,,, (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data delimiter (3) Data (1st item) (4) Data (2nd and following items) (5) Data (final item) The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). Note For details on decimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Decimal (page 8-14). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as 0000H. 8-10

185 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Continuous data write command (WS command) Writing is performed in a decimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Specifies the start address and at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: W S, W, 1, 6 5 (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5) (1) Command (2) Data delimiter (3) Start data address ("W" is required) (4) Data (1st item) (5) Data (2nd item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code The end code is entered at XX. For details of the codes, refer to: 8-6, List of End Codes (page 8-15). Note For details on decimal number notation, refer to: 8-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Decimal (page 8-14). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address. 8-11

186 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-4 Definition of Data Addresses RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses Data addresses are categorized as follows: Data address error Hexadecimal Data address error Decimal Name Remarks 100 to FFF 256 to 4095 EEPROM access data address The write command accesses both the RAM area and EEPROM area, but the read command accesses the RAM area only. Since data is written to the EEPROM, the data does not change even after the power is turned off and back on again to 4FFF 4096 to RAM access data address The write and read commands access both the RAM area and EEPROM area. Since data is not written to the EEPROM, the data returns to the previous one stored in the EEPROM after the power is turned off and back on again to 8FFF to EEPROM access data address The write command accesses both the RAM area and EEPROM area, but the read command accesses the RAM area only. Since data is written to the EEPROM, the data does not change even after the power is turned off and back on again. Handling Precautions EEPROM s erase/write cycles are limited to about. Accordingly, it is recommended that very frequently written parameters be written to RAM, which does not have a limitation on cycles. However, note that the data written to the RAM area is overwritten with the EEPROM area data when the power is turned ON. Write data range If the write value exceeds the range determined by parameters, writing is not performed and an abnormal end code is returned. Write conditions An abnormal end code is also returned when the writing is not possible due to the conditions. Reading an undefined address If an undefined address is read, the end code does not indicate an error or alarm because there is no data. Undefined address read When an undefined address is read, the end code does not result in an abnormality or warning when the data is

187 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-5 Numeric Representation in the Application Layer The numeric values in the application layer include the data address, number of data records and data values, and use hexadecimal or decimal notation depending on the command. This notation methods is shared by both the instruction message and the response message. Hexadecimal The hexadecimal specifications are shown in the table below. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch Supported commands RD WD RU WU RS command (hexadecimal is not allowed) WS command (hexadecimal is not allowed) Available characters 0 (30H) to 9 (39H) A (41H) to F (46H) a (a is not allowed) ( is not allowed) (Space is not allowed) Number of characters (3 characters) (5 characters) Expressible numeric values Examples of normal character strings 8000H to 7FFFH (signed data) 0000H to FFFFH (unsigned data) A B F F F F Handling Precautions 4 characters are used for numeric representation of RD,WD, RU, or WU command. It the numeric representation consists of less than 4 characters, add "0" to the left end so that the No. of characters is

188 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Decimal The decimal specifications are shown in the table below. In the data address, a capital letter "W" (57H) is added immediately after the decimal. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Supported commands Available characters Delimiter characters Number of characters Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch Expressible numeric values Positive number notation Negative number notation Numeric value 0 notation Examples of normal character strings RS WS 0 (30H) to 9 (39H) -(2DH),(2CH) Delimiter characters are used between two numeric values 1 to 5 (positive numbers) 2 to 6 (negative numbers) 1 (Numeric value 0) 1 (Numeric value 0) to (signed data) 0 to (unsigned data) RD command (hexadecimal is not allowed) WDcommand (hexadecimal is not allowed) A (A is not allowed) (+ is not allowed) (Space is not allowed) 0 characters (Nothing between delimiter characters) (6-character positive number) Starts with 1 (31H) to 9 (39H) 0 1 (Not allowed to start with 0) Starts with -(2DH), the second character is 1 (31H) to 9 (39H) 0 1 (0 is not allowed for the second character) 0 0 ( is not allowed) 0 0 (Anything other than 1 character is not allowed)

189 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-6 List of Termination Codes The result of the application layer process for the instruction message can be understood from the end code of the response message. Results other than "normal" are in two levels. An "error" occurs when nothing is processed, and a "warning" occurs when there is a possibility that some kind of processing will be performed. End code of the read command End code Description Module processing 00 (Normal) Normal termination Returns a read value 99 (Error) Undefined command Does not write any data 10 (Error) Parameter error * Does not write any data 40 (Error) No. of data records error Does not write any data 21 (Warning) Data address error Does not write the corresponding data address 22 (Warning) Data range error Returns the read value of the corresponding data address as 8000 or 7FFF in hexadecimal format, or or in decimal format. 23 (Warning) Not allowed depending on the instrument conditions Does not write the corresponding data address * The parameter errors are the following errors. Violation of the numeric representation Violation of the instruction message format End code of the write command End code Description Module processing 00 (Normal) Normal termination Writes all data 99 (Error) Undefined command Does not write any data 10 (Error) Parameter error * Does not write any data 40 (Error) No. of data records error Does not write any data 21 (Warning) Data address error Does not write the corresponding data address 22 (Warning) Data range error Does not write the corresponding data address 23 (Warning) Not allowed depending on the instrument conditions Does not write the corresponding data address * The parameter errors are the following errors. Violation of the numeric representation Violation of the instruction message format Addition of excess data to the end of the frame 8-15

190 Chapter 8. CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 8-7 Reception and Transmission Timing Timing specifications for instruction and response message The cautions below are required with regard to the timing to transmit an instruction message from the master station and a response message from the slave station. Response monitor time The maximum response time from the end of the instruction message transmission by the master station until the start of the response message from the slave station is two seconds (See part (1) of the figure below). For this reason, set the response monitoring time to two seconds. Generally, when a response time-out occurs, the instruction message is resent. Transmission start time Wait at least 10 ms before the master station completes receiving response message and starts to transmit the next instruction message (either to the same slave station or a different one) (See part (2) of the figure below) (1) (2) Transmission line Instruction message Response message Instruction message Response message (1) End of master station transmission Start of slave station transmission = Max ms (2) End of slave station transmission Start of master station transmission = Min. 10 ms RS-485 driver control timing specifications When the transmission/reception on the RS wire system is directly controlled by the master station, care should be paid to the following timing: Master station driver control Transmission line Slave station driver control (Disable) (Enable) Effective data (Instruction message) (1) (4) Effective data (Response message) (Enable) (2) (3) (Disable) End of master station transmission End of slave station transmission (1) End of master station transmission - Driver disable time = Max. 500 μs (2) End of slave station reception Driver enable time = Minimum response time (3) End of slave station transmission - Driver disable time = Max. 10 ms (4) End of master station reception - Driver enable time = Min. 10 ms 8-16

191 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-1 Outline of Communication Communication with a PC, PLC or other host devices is available using a user-configured program that uses RS-485 communication. CPL communication (Controller Peripheral Link: Azbil Corporation s host communication protocol) or MODBUS communication can be selected as the communication protocol. This chapter describes the MODBUS communications. Features The features of the module's communication function are as follows: Up to 31 modules can be connected to a single master station as a host device. When the communication specifications of the host device conform to the RS- 232C interface, the communication converter CMC10L (sold separately) is required. The CMC10L allows conversion between RS-232C and RS-485. Almost all of the module parameters can be communicated. For details on the communication parameters, Chapter 12, List of Communication Data. Handling Precautions In MODBUS communications, the communication address (parameter) for the module that is set in the host device may be reduced by 1 in a communication message during transmission. Example: If the communication address (parameter) is set to 1001 in the host device, it will be 1000 in a communication message during transmission. This module bases sending and receiving on the communication address (parameter) that is specified in the communication message. Be sure to understand the specifications of the host device before using the module. 9-1

192 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Settings To activate MODBUS/TCP communications with the module, set as follows. Item name Details Default Communications type Station address setting Transmission speed Data format (Data length) Data format (parity) Data format Stop bits 0: CPL 1: MODBUS/ACSII 2: MODBUS/RTU 0: No communications 1 to 127 0: 4800 bps 1: 9600 bps 2: bps 3: bps 4: bps 5: bps 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity 2: No parity 0: 1 bits 1: 2 bits Minimum response time 1 to 250 ms 3 When the communications type is set to MODBUS RTU, the operation is fixed to 8-bit data regardless of the data format (data length) setting Handling Precautions The setup cannot be performed via RS-485 communications. If you use the Azbil CMC10L as an RS-485 converter, set the minimum response time to 3 ms or longer. The maximum transmission speed supported by the CMC10L is bps. Communication procedures The communication procedure is as follows: (1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to one module (slave station). (2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message. (3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message. (4) The master station receives the response message. Handling Precautions CPL and MODBUS RTU protocols cannot be used together on the same RS-485 line. 9-2

193 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-2 Message Structure Message Structure The following shows the message structure. MODBUS / ASCII Messages other than the start code and end code all use hexadecimal ASCII codes. MODBUS ASCII messages comprise parts (1) to (5) as shown below. The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer. One box below represents one character. 3AH 0DH 0AH : CR LF (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Start code (1 byte) (2) Station address (2 bytes) (3) Send message, response message (4) Check code (LRC) (2 bytes) (5) End code (2 bytes) 1 frame Start code The start code is a colon (3AH). When the start code is received, the module judges this to be the start of the send message. It follows that if a delimiter has not been received previously, the module judges that a message start STX has been received. The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the module's response at the next message from the master station in the event that noise, for example, causes a message error. Station address Of the messages received, the module creates response messages only when station addresses are the same. Station addresses in the messages are expressed as two hexadecimal characters. However, when the station address is set to "00" (30H 30H), the unit does not respond even if the station addresses match. The unit returns the same station address as that of the received message. Check code (LRC) This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes the message content to change during communications. The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters. The procedure for calculating the check code is as follows. (1) Add from the start of the station address to immediately before the check code. Be sure that the added value is not the ASCII character value of the send message, but rather the one-byte binary data that is converted from the two ASCII characters. (2) Take the two's complement of the addition result. (3) Convert the low-order one byte of the addition result to the two characters that express the hexadecimal. 9-3

194 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION End code (CR/LF) This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the device enters a state allowed to process the received message. Note The following is an example of the check code (LRC) calculation. [Message example] : : 3AH (start of message) 0 : 30H (first byte of the station address) A : 41H (second byte of the station address) 0 : 30H (first byte of the read command) 3 : 33H (second byte of the read command) 0 : 30H (first byte of the start data address) 3 : 33H (second byte of the start data address) E : 45H (third byte of the start data address) 9 : 39H (fourth byte of the start data address) 0 : 30H (first byte of the read count) 0 : 30H (second byte of the read count) 0 : 30H (third byte of the read count) 2 : 32H (fourth byte of the read count) (1) Add from the first byte of the station address to immediately before the check code. The adding calculation is as follows: 0AH + 03H + 03H + E9H + 00H + 02H The result of this calculation is FBH. (2) The low-order one byte of the addition result FBH is unchanged at FBH. The two's complement of FBH is 05H. (3) Convert the 05H to a two-byte ASCII code. '0': 30H 5 : 35H The two bytes '0' (30H) and '5' (35H) are the two-byte check code. 9-4

195 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION MODBUS/RTU All messages use binary data. Messages comprise parts (1) to (3) as shown in the figure below. The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer. All messages use binary data. (One box below represents one byte.) (1) (2) (3) (1) Station address (1 byte) (2) Send message, response message (3) Check code (2 bytes) 1 frame Station address Of the messages received, the module creates response messages only when station addresses are the same. Station addresses in the messages are one byte. However, when the station address is set to "0", the unit does not respond even if the station addresses match. The module returns the same sub-address as that of the received message. Check code (CRC) This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes the message content to change during communications. The check code is two bytes. The procedure for calculating the check code (CRC) is as follows. The part from the start of the station address in the message to immediately before the check code is the subject of the calculation. The binary data of the message is used unchanged in the calculation. The check code is 16-bit data, and can be calculated with the C language function get_crc16() as shown below. In the message, the low-order one byte is first, and the high-order one byte is last. This order is the reverse of the other 16-bit data. [Explanation]Calculate the CRC 16 bits [Argument 1]Character string length (number of bytes) [Argument 2]Pointer for start of character string [Function value]calculation result unsigned short get_crc16(signed int len, const unsigned char *p) { unsigned short crc16; unsigned short next; unsigned short carry; signed int i; crc16 = 0xffff; while (len > 0) { next = (unsigned short)*p; crc16 ^= next; for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) { carry = crc16 & 0x0001; crc16 >>= 1; if (carry!= 0) { crc16 ^= 0xa001; } } p++; len--; } return crc16; } 9-5

196 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION One frame end judgment The message end (one frame end) is judged when the time in which a character has not been received exceeds the time specified for the transmission speed. One frame end is judged when the next character is not received before the time-outs shown below. However, note that there is a variation of ±1 ms in the time-outs shown in the table below. Set transmission speed (bps) Time-out time Transmission speed ms min ms min ms min ms min ms min ms min. Command type Exception code No. of data records Note The command (send message) types supported by this module are as follows: Command type ASCII Description RTU Multiple data item read 03 (2 bytes) 03H (1 byte) class 0 Multiple data item write 10 (2 bytes) 10H (1 byte) class 0 Write of 1 data record (06H) 06 (2 bytes) 06H (1 byte) class 1* Conformance class * This module does not support class 1 commands other than one data item write. When a response message error occurs, the following exception codes are added after the function code. Error types ASCII Exception code RTU Description Illegal function codes 01 (2 bytes) 01H (1 byte) Function code not supported Illegal data address (02H) 02 (2 bytes) 02H (1 byte) Including data addresses that cannot be read or written Invalid data 03 (2 bytes) 03H (1 byte) Errors other than the above Busy 06 (2 bytes) 06H (1 byte) Status where the module cannot process. Resend. Unpacking The number of data records that can be read or written in a one frame message is as follows: Command type Function codes ASCII No. of data records RTU RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM Multiple data item read (03) 1 to 16 records 1 to 16 records 1 to 32 records 1 to 32 records Write of 1 data record (06H) 1 to 16 records 1 to 16 records 1 to 32 records 1 to 32 records Write of 1 data record (06H) 1 record 1 record 1 record 1 record For details regarding MODBUS communication specifications, refer to, "Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide (PI-MBUS-300 Rev.J)" MODICON, Inc. "OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION (Release 1.0)" Schneider Electric. 9-6

197 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-3 Description of Commands Multiple data record read command (03H) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a hexadecimal format. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of this document is as follows. MODBUS/ASCII 3AH : 30H 0 41H A 30H 0 33H 3 30H 0 33H 3 45H E 39H 9 30H 0 30H 0 30H 0 32H 2 30H 0 35H 5 0DH CR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 0AH LF (1) Start code (2) Station address setting method (3) Function codes (4) Start data address (5) No. of data records (6) Check code (LRC) (7) End code MODBUS/RTU 0AH 03H 03H E9H 00H 02H 14H C0H (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Station address (2) Function codes (3) Start data address (4) No. of data records (5) Check code (CRC) Response message The structure of this document is as follows. 3AH : 30H 0 MODBUS / ASCII Normal example 41H A 30H 0 33H 3 30H 0 34H 4 30H 0 33H 3 30H 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Start code (2) Station address (3) Function code (4) No. of data records 2 (5) Read data 1 (6) Read data 2 (7) Check code (LRC) (8) End code 31H 1 30H 0 30H 0 30H 0 33H 3 45H E 38H 8 0DH CR 0AH LF 9-7

198 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Error example 3AH : 30H 0 41H A 38H 8 34H 4 30H 0 31H 1 37H 7 31H 1 0DH CR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 0AH LF (1) Start code (2) Station address (3) Function code (When an error occurs, 1 is set for the MSB of the send message s function code.) In this example, a response of 84 is given for the undefined 04.) (4) Exception code (page 9-6) (5) Check code (LRC) (6) End code MODBUS/RTU Normal example 0AH 03H 04H 03H 01H 00H 03H 51H 76H (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Station address (2) Function code (3) Read count 2 (number of bytes) (4) Read data 1 (5) Read data 2 (1) Check code (CRC) Error example 0AH 84H 01H F3H 02H (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Station address (2) Function code (When an error occurs, 1 is set for the MSB of the send message s function code. In this example, a response of 84 is given for the undefined 04.) (3) Exception code (page 9-6) (4) Check code (CRC) 9-8

199 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Multiple data record write command (10H) Writing is performed in a hexadecimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and at least one data record. The structure of this document is as follows. Example: The 01A0H and 0E53H values are written in two continuous data addresses from 05DDH. MODBUS/ASCII 3AH : 30H 0 31H 1 31H 1 30H 0 30H 0 35H 5 44H D 44H D 30H 0 30H 0 30H 0 32H 2 30H 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 34H 4 30H 0 31H 1 41H A 30H 0 30H 0 45H E 35H 5 33H 3 30H 0 35H 5 0DH CR (7) (8) (9) (10) 0AH LF (1) Start code (2) Station address (3) Function code (4) Write start data address 1 (5) No. of write data records (6) No. of write data records 2 (7) Write data 1 (8) Write data 2 (9) Check code (LRC) (10) End code MODBUS/RTU 01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02H 04H 01H A0H 0EH 53H 45H B9H (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Station address (2) Function code (3) Write start data address (4) No. of write data records (5) No. of write data records 2 (6) Write data 1 (7) Write data 2 (8) Check code (CRC) 9-9

200 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Response message The structure of this document is as follows. MODBUS/ASCII 3AH : 30H 0 31H 1 31H 1 30H 0 30H 0 (1) Start code (2) Station address (3) Function code (4) Write start data address 1 (5) No. of write data records (6) Check code (LRC) (7) End code 35H 5 44H D 44H D 30H 0 30H 0 30H 0 32H 2 30H 0 42H B 0DH CR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 0AH LF MODBUS/RTU 01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02H D1H 3EH (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Station address (2) Function code (3) Write start data address (4) No. of write data records (5) Check code (CRC) Note The response message when an error occurs is the same as when an error occurs for the multiple data item read command. 9-10

201 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION One data item write command (06H) Data is written to an data address in hexadecimal notation. Send message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of this document is as follows. Example: The 01A0H value is written in the 05DDH data address. MODBUS/ASCII 3AH : 30H 0 31H 1 30H 0 (1) Start code (2) Station address (3) Function code (4) Data address (5) Write data (6) Check code (LRC) (7) End code 36H 6 30H 0 35H 5 44H D 44H D (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 30H 0 31H 1 41H A 30H 0 37H 7 36H 6 0DH CR 0AH LF MODBUS/RTU 01H 06H 05H DDH 01H A0H 18H D4H (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Station address (2) Function code (3) Data address (4) Write data (5) Check code (CRC) Response message The normal response message is the same as the send message. Note The response message when an error occurs is the same as when an error occurs for the multiple data item read command. 9-11

202 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-4 Numeric Representation The numeric values include the data address, number of data records and data values, and all use the hexadecimal notation. The numeric representation varies depending on whether the communications type is MODBUS ASCII or MODBUS RTU. This notation methods is shared by both the instruction message and the response message. ASCII hexadecimals The hexadecimal specifications are shown in the table below. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch Available characters 0 (30H) to 9 (39H) A (41H) to F (46H) a (a is not allowed) ( is not allowed) (Space is not allowed) Number of characters 4 or (3 characters) (5 characters) Expressible numeric values (4 characters) Expressible numeric values (2 characters) Examples of normal character strings 8000H to 7FFFH (signed data) 0000H to FFFFH (unsigned data) 00H to FFH (unsigned data) A B F F F F RTU hexadecimals The RTU hexadecimal specifications are shown in the table below. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Available characters Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch 00H to FFH (all) Number of characters 2 or 1 00H 01H 02H (3 characters) Expressible numeric values (2 characters) Expressible numeric values (1 characters) Examples of normal character strings 8000H to 7FFFH (signed data) 0000H to FFFFH (unsigned data) 00H to FFH (unsigned data) 00H 00H 12H ABH 01H 23H FFH FFH 10H 04H Handling Precautions Assign numeric values with the most significant byte first for MODBUS communications. 9-12

203 Chapter 9. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 9-5 Specifications Shared with CPL Communications Function RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses 8-4, Definition of Data Addresses (page 8-12). RS-485 driver control timing specifications 8-7, Reception and Transmission Timing (page 8-16) 9-13

204

205 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-1 Outline of Communication The module can communicate with the host device using the MODBUS/TCP protocol, which is compliant with Ethernet TCP/IP. This function is available for ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later. Features The features of the module's communication function are as follows: The module can access all modules in the linked block when a communication adaptor (1 port) with Ethernet interface or a communication box (4 ports) is attached to the left side (or right side available only for a communication adaptor) of the linked the module, and a connection with Ethernet cable is made. Host devices can communicate with the module via Ethernet using the IP address of the module. Almost all of the module parameters can be communicated. Chapter 12, List of Communication Data. Settings Handling Precautions This module bases sending and receiving on the communication address (parameter) that is specified in the communication message. Be sure to understand the specifications of the host device before using the module. The following setup is required for performing the MODBUS TCP communications with the module. Item Default IP address Netmask to 0 Default gateway None The net mask and default gateway can be set for each chain by selecting All in the actual module configuration screen of the SLP-NX (sold separately). The port No. for MODBUS/TCP is However, it can be changed if necessary. 10-1

206 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication procedures With CPL/TCP, the TCP/IP socket interface is used for communications. The TCP/IP socket interface is used in different ways depending on the host device, but this section will explain the usage method for an ordinary computer. (1) A TCP/IP socket connection is established from the host device (master station) to one module (slave station). (2) The master station sends an instruction message to a slave station. (3) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message. (4) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message. (5) The master station receives the response message. (6) To continue CPL/TCP communications, go back to (2). (7) To end CPL/TCP communications, the master station performs a TCP/IP socket connection cutoff request process on the slave station. Handling Precautions This device can support up to two (one when using RS-485 communication)tcp connections for MODBUS/TCP. Chapter 4, Network Function Design in Network Instrumentation Module User s Manual Network Design Version, CP-SP-1313E. Communication procedure for standard TCP/IP sockets Ethernet Application startup Power supply on socket() socket() bind() listen() accept() (1) connect() Connection of connection (2) send() Command (3) recv() (5) recv() Response (4) send() CPL/TCP communication in progress (6) (7) shutdown() Cutoff of connection close() Completion of connection cutoff close() 10-2

207 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-2 Message Structure Message Structure The following shows the message structure. Messages are broadly classified into two layers: the data link layer and the application layer. Data link layer This layer contains the basic information required for communication. For example, the destination of the communication message and the check information of the message. Application layer Data is read and written in this layer. The content of the layer varies according to the purpose of the message. Messages comprise parts (1) to (8) as shown in the figure below. The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer. 02H 58H 03H 0DH 0AH STX X ETX CR LF (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Data link layer Application layer Data link layer 1 frame (1) STX (start of message) (5) Instrution message = command, (2) Station address response message = response (3) Sub-address (6) EXT (end of command/response) (4) Device code (7) Checksum (8) Delimiter (end of message) Data link layer Outline The data link layer is of a fixed length. The position of each data item and the number of its characters are already decided. Note, however, that the data positions of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the number of characters in the application layer. Response start conditions The device sends the response message only when all the message components in the data link layer of the instruction message are correct. If even one of these is incorrect, no response message is sent, and the device stands by for reception of STX. List of data link layer data definitions The following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer: Data name Character code Number of characters Meaning of data STX 02 h 1 Start of message Station address setting 0 to 7FH are expressed as hexadecimal character codes. 2 Identification of device to communicate with Sub-address Sub address "00" (30H, 30H) 2 No function Device code "X" (58H) or "x" (78H) 1 Device type ETX 03 h 1 Application layer end position Checksum of 00H to FFH are expressed as twodigit 2 Checksum of message message hexadecimal character codes Delimiter CR (0DH), LF (0AH) 2 End of message 10-3

208 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Description of data items STX (02H) When the start code is received, the module judges this to be the start of the send message. It follows that if a delimiter has not been received previously, the module judges that a message start STX has been received. The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the module's response at the next message from the master station in the event that noise, for example, causes a message error. Station address Two hexadecimal characters can be used, from 00 (30H 30H) to FF (46H 46H). The module returns the same sub-address as that of the received message. Sub-address Two hexadecimal characters can be used, from 00 (30H 30H) to FF (46H 46H). The module returns the same sub-address as that of the received message. Device code X (58H) or x (78H) can be used. This code is determined for each device series, and other codes cannot be selected. The module returns the same device code as that of the received message. These can be used to identify the messages, for example by using X (58H) as the initial value and x (78H) in resend messages. ETX 03H ETX indicates the end of the application layer. Checksum This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes the message content to change during communications. The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters. How to calculate a checksum (1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte modules. (2) Take two's complement of the low-order one byte of the addition result. (3) Convert the obtained two's complement to a two-byte ASCII code. The following is a sample checksum calculation for a sample message: [Message example] STX : 02H 0 : 30H (first byte of the station address) 1 : 31H (second byte of the station address) 0 : 30H (first byte of the sub-address) 0 : 30H (second byte of the sub-address) X : 58H (device code) R : 52H (first byte of the command) D : 44H (second byte of the command) (omitted) ETX : 03H 10-4

209 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION (1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte modules. The addition operation in single byte modules is as follows: 02H + 30H + 31H + 30H + 30H + 58H + 52H + 53H H. Assume that the result is 376H. (2) The low-order one byte of the addition result 376H is 76H. The two's complement of 76H is 8AH. (3) Convert the obtained 8AH to a two-byte ASCII code. The result is: 8 : 38H A : 41H The two bytes 8 (38H) and A (41H) are the checksum. End code (CR/LF) This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the device enters a state allowed to process the received message. Application layer The table below shows the configuration of the application layer. Item Description Command "RS" (decimal format continuous address data read) "WS" (decimal format continuous address data write) "RD" (hexadecimal format continuous address data read) "WD" (hexadecimal format continuous address data write) RU (hexadecimal format random address data read) WU (hexadecimal format random address data write) Data delimiter RS, WS command:, (comma) Other commands: None Word address RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation and "W", such as "501W". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "01F5". Read number RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation, such as "1". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "0001". Write conditions RS, WS command: Numeric value in decimal notation, such as "100". Other commands: Numeric value in hexadecimal notation, such as "0064". The number of data records accessible by a single instruction message and response message cycle is as follows: Command RAM EEPROM RD WD RU WU RS WS Handling Precautions 4 characters are used for numeric representation of RD,WD, RU, or WU command. It the numeric representation consists of less than 4 characters, add "0" to the left end so that the No. of characters is

210 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-3 Description of Commands Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a hexadecimal format. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R D (1) (2) (3) (1) Command (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning (reading of single data item) X X (1) (2) Normal end or Warning (reading of multiple data items) X X (1) (2) (3) (4) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data (1st item) (3) Data (2nd and following items) (4) Data (final item) The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). Note For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 10-13). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as 0000H. 10-6

211 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command) Writing is performed in a hexadecimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: Writing of single data item W D (1) (2) (3) Writing of multiple data items W D (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Command (2) Start data address (3) Data (1st item) (4) Data (2nd and following items) (5) Data (final item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code Note The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 10-13). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address. 10-7

212 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length random data read command (RU command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a hexadecimal format. Instruction message Specifies at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R U 0 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Command (2) Sub-command, fixed to 00 (3) Data address (1st item) (4) Data address (2nd and following items) (5) Data address (final item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) (2) (3) (4) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data (1st item) (3) Data (2nd and following items) (4) Data (final item) Note The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 10-13). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as 0000H. 10-8

213 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Fixed length random data write command (WU command) Writing is performed in a hexadecimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Groups data addresses and data, and specifies at least one group. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: W U 0 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) Command (2) Sub-command, fixed to 00 (3) Data address (1st group) (4) Write data (1st group) (5) Data address, write data (2nd and following groups) (6) Data address (final group) (7) Write data (final group) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). Note For details on hexadecimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Hexadecimal (page 10-13). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address. 10-9

214 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Continuous data read command (RS command) Data in continuous data addresses is read in a decimal format. Instruction message Specifies the start data address and the number of data records. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: R S, W, 1 (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (1) Command (2) Data delimiter (3) Start data address ( W is required) (4) Number of data records Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning (reading of single data item) X X, (1) (2) (3) Normal end or Warning (reading of multiple data items) X X,,, (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code (2) Data delimiter (3) Data (1st item) (4) Data (2nd and following items) (5) Data (final item) The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). Note For details on decimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Decimal (page 10-14). When a warning occurs, the corresponding data address is read as 0000H

215 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Continuous data write command (WS command) Writing is performed in a decimal format to data in continuous data addresses. Instruction message Specifies the start address and at least one data record. The structure of the application layer in the instruction message is as follows: W S, W, 1, 6 5 (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5) (1) Command (2) Data delimiter (3) Start data address ("W" is required) (4) Data (1st item) (5) Data (2nd item) Response message The structure of the application layer in the response message is as follows: Normal end or Warning X X (1) Abnormal end X X (1) (1) End code The end code is entered at XX. For details of codes, refer to: 10-6, List of Termination Codes (page 10-15). Note For details on decimal number notation, refer to: 10-5, Numeric Representation in the Application Layer n Decimal (page 10-14). If a warning occurs, data is not written to that data address

216 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-4 Definition of Data Addresses RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses Data addresses are categorized as follows: Data address error Hexadecimal Data address error Decimal Name 100 to FFF 256 to 4095 EEPROM access data address 1000 to 4FFF 4096 to RAM access data address 5000 to 8FFF to EEPROM access data address Remarks The write command accesses both the RAM area and EEPROM area, but the read command accesses the RAM area only. Since data is written to the EEPROM, the data does not change even after the power is turned off and back on again. The write and read commands access both the RAM area and EEPROM area. Since data is not written to the EEPROM, the data returns to the previous one stored in the EEPROM after the power is turned off and back on again. The write command accesses both the RAM area and EEPROM area, but the read command accesses the RAM area only. Since data is written to the EEPROM, the data does not change even after the power is turned off and back on again. Handling Precautions EEPROM s erase/write cycles are limited to about. Accordingly, it is recommended that very frequently written parameters be written to RAM, which does not have a limitation on cycles. However, note that the data written to the RAM area is overwritten with the EEPROM area data when the power is turned ON. Write data range If the write value exceeds the range determined by parameters, writing is not performed and an abnormal end code is returned. Write conditions An abnormal end code is also returned when the writing is not possible due to the conditions. Reading an undefined address If an undefined address is read, the end code does not indicate an error or alarm because there is no data. Undefined address read When an undefined address is read, the end code does not result in an abnormality or warning when the data is

217 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-5 Numeric Representation in the Application Layer The numeric values in the application layer include the data address, number of data records and data values, and use hexadecimal or decimal notation depending on the command. This notation methods is shared by both the instruction message and the response message. Hexadecimal The hexadecimal specifications are shown in the table below. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch Supported commands RD WD RU WU RS command (hexadecimal is not allowed) WS command (hexadecimal is not allowed) Available characters 0 (30H) to 9 (39H) A (41H) to F (46H) a (a is not allowed) ( is not allowed) (Space is not allowed) Number of characters (3 characters) (5 characters) Expressible numeric values Examples of normal character strings 8000H to 7FFFH (signed data) 0000H to FFFFH (unsigned data) A B F F F F Handling Precautions 4 characters are used for numeric representation of RD,WD, RU, or WU command. It the numeric representation consists of less than 4 characters, add "0" to the left end so that the No. of characters is

218 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Decimal The decimal specifications are shown in the table below. In the data address, a capital letter "W" (57H) is added immediately after the decimal. If the message does not match the specifications, the module does not process the instruction message and instead returns an error response. Item Specifications Example of specification mismatch Supported commands Available characters Delimiter characters Number of characters Expressible numeric values Positive number notation Negative number notation Numeric value 0 notation Examples of normal character strings RS WS 0 (30H) to 9 (39H) -(2DH),(2CH) Delimiter characters are used between two numeric values 1 to 5 (positive numbers) 2 to 6 (negative numbers) 1 (Numeric value 0) to (signed data) 0 to (unsigned data) RD command (hexadecimal is not allowed) WDcommand (hexadecimal is not allowed) A (A is not allowed) (+ is not allowed) (Space is not allowed) 0 characters (Nothing between delimiter characters) (6-character positive number) Starts with 1 (31H) to 9 (39H) 0 1 (Not allowed to start with 0) Starts with -(2DH), the second character is 1 (31H) to 9 (39H) 0 1 (0 is not allowed for the second character) 0 0 ( is not allowed) 0 0 (Anything other than 1 character is not allowed)

219 Chapter 10. CPL/TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 10-6 List of Termination Codes The result of the application layer process for the instruction message can be understood from the end code of the response message. Results other than "normal" are in two levels. An "error" occurs when nothing is processed, and a "warning" occurs when there is a possibility that some kind of processing will be performed. End code of the read command End code Description Module processing 00: Normal Normal termination Returns a read value 99 (Error) Undefined command Does not write any data 10 (Error) Parameter error * Does not write any data 40 (Error) No. of data records error Does not write any data 21 (Warning) Data address error Does not write the corresponding data address 22 (Warning) Data range error Returns the read value of the corresponding data address as 8000 or 7FFF in hexadecimal format, or or in decimal format. 23 (Warning) Not allowed depending on the instrument conditions Does not write the corresponding data address * The parameter errors are the following errors. Violation of the numeric representation Violation of the instruction message format End code of the write command End code Description Module processing 00: Normal Normal termination Writes all data 99 (Error) Undefined command Does not write any data 10 (Error) Parameter error * Does not write any data 40 (Error) No. of data records error Does not write any data 21 (Warning) Data address error Does not write the corresponding data address 22 (Warning) Data range error Does not write the corresponding data address 23 (Warning) Not allowed depending on the instrument conditions Does not write the corresponding data address * The parameter errors are the following errors. Violation of the numeric representation Violation of the instruction message format Addition of excess data to the end of the frame 10-15

220

221 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 11-1 Outline of Communication The module can communicate with the host device using the MODBUS/TCP protocol, which is compliant with Ethernet TCP/IP. Features The features of the module's communication function are as follows: The module can access all modules in the linked block when a communication adaptor (1 port) with Ethernet interface or a communication box (4 ports) is attached to the left side (or right side available only for a communication adaptor) of the linked the module, and a connection with Ethernet cable is made. Host devices can communicate with the module via Ethernet using the IP address of the module. Almost all of the module parameters can be communicated. For details on the communication parameters, refer to: Chapter 12, List of Communication Data. Handling Precautions In MODBUS communications, the communication address (parameter) for the module that is set in the host device may be reduced by 1 in a communication message during transmission. Example: If the communication address (parameter) is set to 1001 in the host device, it will be 1000 in a communication message during transmission. This module bases sending and receiving on the communication address (parameter) that is specified in the communication message. Be sure to understand the specifications of the host device before using the module. Settings To activate MODBUS/TCP communications with the NX, set as follows. Item Default IP address Netmask to 0 Default gateway None The net mask and default gateway can be set for each chain by selecting All in the actual module configuration screen of the SLP-NX (sold separately). The port No. for MODBUS/TCP is 502. However, it can be changed if necessary. 11-1

222 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Communication procedures With MODBUS/TCP, the TCP/IP socket interface is used for communications. The TCP/IP socket interface is used in different ways depending on the host device, but this section will explain the usage method for an ordinary computer. (1) A TCP/IP socket connection is established from the host device (master station) to one module (slave station). (2) The master station sends an instruction message to a slave station. (3) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message. (4) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message. (5) The master station receives the response message. (6) To continue MODBUS/TCP communications, go back to [2]. (7) To end MODBUS/TCP communications, the master station performs a TCP/IP socket connection cutoff request process on the slave station. Handling Precautions This device can support up to two (one when using RS-485 communication)tcp connections for MODBUS/TCP. Chapter 4, Network Function Design in Network Instrumentation Module User s Manual Network Design Version, CP-SP-1313E. Communication procedure for standard TCP/IP sockets Ethernet Application startup Power supply on socket() socket() bind() listen() accept() (1) connect() Connection of connection (2) send() Command (3) recv() (5) recv() Response (4) send() MODBUS/TCP communication in progress (6) (7) shutdown() Cutoff of connection close() Completion of connection cutoff close() 11-2

223 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 11-2 Message Structure Message Structure A TCP/IP frame is used. The MODBUS/TCP message is expressed in the TCP data section. MODBUS TCP (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Transaction Identifier (2 bytes) No particular definition. (2) Protocol Identifier (2 bytes) 0000H when the protocol is MODBUS. (3) Length (2 bytes) Expresses the number of bytes in (4) to (6). (4) Unit Identifier (1 byte) Specify FF or 00H. (5) Function (1 byte) Specify a function code. (6) Data (n bytes)data column depending on the function code Data details Transaction Identifier A request and its response have the same value. The host station can use the transaction identifier to confirm that the data is the response to the request. Protocol Identifier For MODBUS protocol, specify 0000H. Length Shows the data length in bytes based on the Unit Identifier. Unit Identifier Specify FFH or 00H. Function Specify the function code. Data Communication data Frame detection method A TCP frame is equivalent to a MODBUS/TCP frame. Port The TCP port number used by MODBUS/TCP is No (Can be changed.) Function codes Supports Function Code 3 (0x03), 16 (0x10), 6(0x06). 11-3

224 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Exception code When a response message error occurs, the following exception codes are added after the function code. Error types Exception code Description Illegal function codes (2 byte) Function code not supported Illegal data address (02H) (2 byte) Including data addresses that cannot be read or written Invalid data 03 (2 byte) Errors other than the above Busy 06 (2 byte) Status where the unit cannot process. Resent No. of data records Note The number of data records that can be read or written in a one frame message is as follows: Command type (Function code) No. of data records RAM EEPROM Multiple data record read (03H) 1 to 64 records 1 to 64 records Multiple data record write (10H) 1 to 32 records 1 to 32 records 1 data record write (06H) 1 record 1 record For details regarding MODBUS communication specifications, refer to, "Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide (PI-MBUS-300 Rev.J)" MODICON, Inc. OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0 (Schneider Electric) 11-4

225 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 11-3 Description of Commands Application section The following data descriptions X X (1) are single byte hexdecimal descriptions (left side is the upper nibble) Multiple data record read command (03H) One data item Request 0 3 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records (=1) Normal response 0 3 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Number of bytes (=2) (3) Read data Abnormal response 8 3 (1) (2) For multiple-word data Request (1) Error code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Exception code (=01H/02H/03H/06H) 0 3 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records Normal response 0 3 (1) (2) (3) (3) (1) Function code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Number of bytes (3) Read data (data items continue for the number of read data items) Abnormal response 8 3 (1) (2) (1) Error code (Read Holding Registers) (2) Exception code (=01H/02H/03H/06H) 11-5

226 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION Multiple data record write command (10H) For 1-word data Request 1 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Function code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records (=1) (4) Number of bytes (= number of data records x 2) (5) Write data Normal response 1 0 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records (=1) Abnormal response 9 0 (1) (2) (1) Error code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Exception code (=01H/02H/03H/06H) For multiple-word data Request 1 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (5) (1) Function code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records (4) Number of bytes (= number of data records x 2) (5) Write data Normal response 1 0 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Start data address (3) Number of data records Abnormal response 9 0 (1) (2) (1) Error code (Write Multiple Registers) (2) Exception code (=01H/02H/03H/06H) 11-6

227 Chapter 11. MODBUS TCP COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION 1 data record write command (06H) Request 0 6 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Write Single Register) (2) Write address (3) Write data Normal response 0 6 (1) (2) (3) (1) Function code (Write Single Register) (2) Write address (3) Write data (echo back) Abnormal response 8 6 (1) (2) (1) Error code (Write Single Register) (2) Exception code (=01H/02H/03H/06H) 11-7

228

229 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Comments on the table Monitor/Communications Profile Monitor/Loop Mode Monitor/Monitor Monitor/Remaining Delay Time Monitor/Computation Result Bit/ Bit Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Monitor/User-defined Bit Communications/Ethernet Communications Communications/RS-485 Communications Basic/Setup Basic/Loop (Input) Basic/Loop Basic/Loop Output Basic/Position Proportioning Adjustment Basic/Loop Output (Cascade) Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Basic/Position Proportioning Input-output/PV Input Input-output/Continuous Output Input-output / OUT/DO Output Input-output/Zener Barrier Adjustment Input-output/CT Input Event/Event Configuration SP/SP Group Selection SP/LSP SP/SP Configuration Event/Event Settings Event/Event Configuration PID/PID Function/Linearization Table Function/Internal Contact IN Function/Logical Operation Function/Energy Conservation Function/MV Branching Output Function/Reception Monitoring Other/Reception Monitoring Other/UF LED Settings Other/Instrument Information Other/PV Tag Name Other/OUT Tag Name Other/Option Tag Name Other/Tag for All Loops Bitmap assignment

230 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Comments on the table The following shows the meanings of the symbols stated in the "RAM/EEPROM Read/ Write" columns: No symbol : Possible : Impossible Handling Precautions When reading the EEPROM address, data in the RAM is read in the same manner as the reading of the RAM address. Even there is no symbol, reading or writing might not be possible depending on the conditions. Decimal point information : No decimal point 1 to 3: Decimal point position (original value of data is multiplied by 10, 100, or 1000) PID_PV: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the loop (basic) bank (loop PV/SV decimal point position). PV: Determined by the settings for PV1 to 4 in the PV input bank (decimal point position). RAMP: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the SP configuration bank (SP ramp unit). OUT: Determined by the settings for outputs 1 to 4 in the continuous output bank (output decimal point position). EV: Determined by the settings for event Nos. 1 to 24 in the event configuration bank (decimal point position). PID: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the loop (extended) bank (integral time/derivative time decimal point position). TBL: Determined by the settings for Linearizations 1 through 8 in the Linearization table bank ("breakpoint decimal point position"). MODBUS communications Handling Precautions In MODBUS communications, the communication address (parameter) for the module that is set in the host device may be reduced by 1 in a communication message during transmission. Example: If the communication address (parameter) is set to 1001 in the host device, it will be 1000 in a communication message during transmission. This module bases sending and receiving on the communication address (parameter) that is specified in the communication message. Be sure to understand the specifications of the host device before using the unit module. 12-2

231 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Communications Profile Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 AT cancel/execute *1 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 LSP/RSP Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 SP PID_PV *2 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 MV Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 AT cancel/execute A A *1 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 LSP/RSP B B Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 PV (loop) C C PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 SP D D PID_PV *2 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 MV E E 1 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 AT cancel/execute *1 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 LSP/RSP Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 SP PID_PV *2 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 MV Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 AT cancel/execute A A *1 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 LSP/RSP B B Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 PV (loop) C C PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 SP D D PID_PV *2 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 MV E E 1 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 SP group selection Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 LSP PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 Manual MV *3 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 AT cancel/execute *1 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 LSP/RSP Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 SP group selection Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 LSP PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 Manual MV A A 1 *3 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 RUN/READY B B Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 AUTO/MANUAL C C Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 AT cancel/execute D D *1 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 LSP/RSP E E Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 SP group selection Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 LSP PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 Manual MV *3 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 RUN/READY Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 AUTO/MANUAL Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 AT cancel/execute *1 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 LSP/RSP Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 SP group selection Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 LSP PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 Manual MV A A 1 *3 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 RUN/READY B B Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 AUTO/MANUAL C C Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 AT cancel/execute D D *1 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 LSP/RSP E E *1 The communication profile item "AT cancel/execute" is the same as "AT stop/start". *2 The SP used in each loop is read. During ramp operation and RSP, the changing value is read. If the ramp is stopped during MANUAL or READY, the LSP value is read. *3 Writing is prohibited in AUTO. The current MV is read. In MANUAL, the writing value is applied as the manual MV. Remarks 12-3

232 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Communications Profile EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current proportional A A00 1 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current integral time A A01 PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current derivative time A A02 PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current manual reset A A03 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current output low limit A A04 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current output high limit A A05 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current proportional A A06 1 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current integral time for A A07 PID cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current derivative time A A08 PID for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current MV low limit for A0A A0A 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current MV high limit for A0B A0B 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current proportional A0C A0C 1 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current integral time A0D A0D PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current derivative time A0E A0E PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current manual reset A0F A0F 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current output low limit A A10 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current output high limit A A11 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current proportional A A12 1 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current integral time for A A13 PID cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current derivative time A A14 PID for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current MV low limit for A A16 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current MV high limit for A A17 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current proportional A A18 1 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current integral time A A19 PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current derivative time A1A A1A PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current manual reset A1B A1B 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current output low limit A1C A1C 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current output high limit A1D A1D 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current proportional A1E A1E 1 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current integral time for A1F A1F PID cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current derivative time A A20 PID for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current MV low limit for A A22 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current MV high limit for A A23 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current proportional A A24 1 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current integral time A A25 PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current derivative time A A26 PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current manual reset A A27 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current output low limit A A28 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current output high limit A A29 1 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current proportional A2A A2A 1 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current integral time for A2B A2B PID cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current derivative time A2C A2C PID for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV low limit for A2E A2E 1 cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV high limit for A2F A2F 1 cooling Remarks 12-4

233 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Loop Mode Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Monitor Loop mode 1 RUN/READY B B30 Monitor Loop mode 1 AUTO/MANUAL B B31 Monitor Loop mode 1 AT stop/start B B32 Monitor Loop mode 1 LSP/RSP B B33 Monitor Loop mode 2 RUN/READY B B40 Monitor Loop mode 2 AUTO/MANUAL B B41 Monitor Loop mode 2 AT stop/start B B42 Monitor Loop mode 2 LSP/RSP B B43 Monitor Loop mode 3 RUN/READY B B50 Monitor Loop mode 3 AUTO/MANUAL B B51 Remarks Monitor Loop mode 3 AT stop/start B B52 NX-D35 not supported Monitor Loop mode 3 LSP/RSP B B53 NX-D35 not supported Monitor Loop mode 4 RUN/READY B B60 Monitor Loop mode 4 AUTO/MANUAL B B61 Monitor Loop mode 4 AT stop/start B B62 NX-D35 not supported Monitor Loop mode 4 LSP/RSP B B63 NX-D35 not supported 12-5

234 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Monitor Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information See Alarm information 1 (pages 12-81) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information See Alarm information 2 (pages 12-81) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information See Alarm information 3 (pages 12-82) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information See Alarm information 4 (pages 12-82) Monitor Basic 1 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Basic 1 SP PID_PV *1 Monitor Basic 1 MV Monitor Basic 1 Heat MV Monitor Basic 1 Cool MV Monitor Basic 1 AT progress Monitor Basic 1 SP group selection Monitor Basic 1 PID group selection Monitor Basic 1 PV (input channel) PV Monitor Basic 2 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Basic 2 SP PID_PV *1 Monitor Basic 2 MV Monitor Basic 2 Heat MV Monitor Basic 2 Cool MV Monitor Basic 2 AT progress Monitor Basic 2 SP group selection Monitor Basic 2 PID group selection Monitor Basic 2 PV (input channel) PV Monitor Basic 3 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Basic 3 SP PID_PV *1 Monitor Basic 3 MV Monitor Basic 3 Heat MV Monitor Basic 3 Cool MV Monitor Basic 3 AT progress Monitor Basic 3 SP group selection Monitor Basic 3 PID group selection Monitor Basic 3 PV (input channel) PV Monitor Basic 4 PV (loop) PID_PV Monitor Basic 4 SP PID_PV *1 Monitor Basic 4 MV Monitor Basic 4 Heat MV Monitor Basic 4 Cool MV Monitor Basic 4 AT progress Monitor Basic 4 SP group selection Monitor Basic 4 PID group selection Monitor Basic 4 PV (input channel) PV Monitor Monitor (MFB) 1 MFB opening NX-D15/25 not supported*2 Monitor Monitor (MFB) 2 MFB opening NX-D15/25 not supported*2 Monitor Monitor (CT) 1 CT1 measured current A A0 1 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 1 CT1 measured current A A1 1 when output OFF Monitor Monitor (CT) 2 CT2 measured current A A2 1 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 2 CT2 measured current A A3 1 when output OFF Monitor Monitor (CT) 3 CT3 measured current A A4 1 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 3 CT3 measured current when output OFF A A

235 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Monitor EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Monitor Monitor (CT) 4 CT4 measured current A A6 1 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 4 CT4 measured current A A7 1 when output OFF Monitor AO percent 1 AO percent data D D0 1 Monitor AO percent 2 AO percent data D D1 1 Monitor AO percent 3 AO percent data D D2 1 Monitor AO percent 4 AO percent data D D3 1 Monitor AO percent 5 AO percent data D D4 1 Monitor AO percent 6 AO percent data D D5 1 Monitor AO percent 7 AO percent data D D6 1 Monitor AO percent 8 AO percent data D D7 1 Monitor OUT/DO terminal 1 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E0 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 2 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E1 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 3 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E2 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 4 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E3 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 5 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E4 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 6 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E5 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 7 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ E E6 OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 8 OUT/DO terminal, ON/ OFF data E E7 *1 The SP used in each loop is read. During ramp operation and RSP, the changing value is read. If the ramp is stopped during MANUAL or READY, the LSP value is read. *2 The MFB amount of opening includes an estimation. It is not an actual value. 12-7

236 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Remaining Delay Time Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Monitor Remaining delay time 1 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 2 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 3 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 4 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 5 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 6 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 7 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 8 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 9 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 10 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 11 Remaining delay time A A 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 12 Remaining delay time B B 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 13 Remaining delay time C C 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 14 Remaining delay time D D 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 15 Remaining delay time E E 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 16 Remaining delay time F F 1 Monitor Remaining delay time 17 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 18 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 19 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 20 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 21 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 22 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 23 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 24 Remaining delay time Remarks 12-8

237 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/Computation Result Folder name Bank name code Item name Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 1 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 2 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 3 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 5 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 13 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 21 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 42 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 43 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 44 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 54 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 55 (bitmap) RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Internal computation result 1 (See P ) Internal computation result 2 (See P ) Internal computation result 3 (See P ) Internal computation result 5 (See P ) C C Internal computation result 13 (See P ) Internal computation result 21 (See P ) Internal computation result 42 (See P ) A A Internal computation result 43 (See P ) B Internal computation result 44 (See P ) A A5 Internal computation result 54 (See P ) A A6 Internal computation result 55 (See P ) 12-9

238 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name bit bit bit bit bit bit bit EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write ( Always 0 (Off) to 1151) ( Always 1 (On) to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event A to 1151) ( Event B to 1151) ( Event C to 1151) ( Event D to 1151) ( Event E to 1151) ( Event F to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( Event to 1151) ( CT1 heater line break to 1151) detection ( CT2 heater line break to 1151) detection ( CT3 heater line break to 1151) detection ( CT4 heater line break to 1151) detection ( CT1 overcurrent detection to 1151) ( CT2 overcurrent detection to 1151) ( CT3 overcurrent detection to 1151) ( CT4 overcurrent detection to 1151) ( CT1 short-circuit detection to 1151) ( CT2 short-circuit detection to 1151) ( CT3 short-circuit detection A to 1151) ( CT4 short-circuit detection B to 1151) Remarks 12-10

239 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name bit bit bit bit bit bit bit EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write ( DI1 terminal status to 1279) ( DI2 terminal status to 1279) ( DI3 terminal status to 1279) ( DI4 terminal status to 1279) ( OUT1 terminal status to 1407) ( OUT2 terminal status to 1407) ( OUT3 terminal status to 1407) ( OUT4 terminal status to 1407) ( DO1 terminal status to 1407) ( DO2 terminal status to 1407) ( DO3 terminal status to 1407) ( DO4 terminal status to 1407) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit A to 1535) ( User-defined bit B to 1535) ( User-defined bit C to 1535) ( User-defined bit D to 1535) ( User-defined bit E to 1535) ( User-defined bit F to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) ( User-defined bit to 1535) Remarks 12-11

240 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name bit bit bit bit bit EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write ( User-defined bit A to 1535) ( User-defined bit B to 1535) ( User-defined bit C to 1535) ( User-defined bit D to 1535) ( User-defined bit E to 1535) ( User-defined bit F to 1535) ( Results of logical operation A0 to 1535) 1 ( Results of logical operation A1 to 1535) 2 ( Results of logical operation A2 to 1535) 3 ( Results of logical operation A3 to 1535) 4 ( Results of logical operation A4 to 1535) 5 ( Results of logical operation A5 to 1535) 6 ( Results of logical operation A6 to 1535) 7 ( Results of logical operation A7 to 1535) 8 ( Results of logical operation A8 to 1535) 9 ( Results of logical operation A9 to 1535) 10 ( Results of logical operation AA to 1535) 11 ( Results of logical operation AB to 1535) 12 ( Results of logical operation AC to 1535) 13 ( Results of logical operation AD to 1535) 14 ( Results of logical operation AE to 1535) 15 ( Results of logical operation AF to 1535) 16 ( RS-485 status to 1663) (normal transmission of 1 frame) ( Loop 1 RUN/ to 1663) READY status ( Loop 2 RUN/ to 1663) READY status ( Loop 3 RUN/ NX-D35 not supported to 1663) READY status ( Loop 4 RUN/ NX-D35 not supported to 1663) READY status ( Loop 1 Auto/ to 1663) Manual status ( Loop 2 Auto/ to 1663) Manual status ( Loop 3 Auto/ NX-D35 not supported to 1663) Manual status ( Loop 4 Auto/ NX-D35 not supported to 1663) Manual status ( Loop 1 AT stop/start to 1663) status ( Loop 2 AT stop/start to 1663) status ( Loop 3 AT stop/start NX-D35 not supported to 1663) status ( Loop 4 AT stop/start NX-D35 not supported to 1663) status ( Loop 1 LSP/RSP status to 1663) ( Loop 2 LSP/RSP status to 1663) ( Loop 3 LSP/RSP status to 1663) 12-12

241 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write ( Loop 4 LSP/RSP status to 1663) ( Loop 1 SP ramp-up in to 1663) progress ( Loop 2 SP ramp-up in to 1663) progress ( Loop 3 SP ramp-up in NX-D35 not supported to 1663) progress ( Loop 4 SP ramp-up in NX-D35 not supported to 1663) progress ( Loop 1 SP ramp-down in to 1791) progress ( Loop 2 SP ramp-down in to 1791) progress ( Loop 3 SP ramp-down in NX-D35 not supported to 1791) progress ( Loop 4 SP ramp-down in NX-D35 not supported to 1791) progress ( All typical alarms (logical to 1919) OR of all alarms be displayed) ( AD1 fault (AL11) to 1919) ( AD2 fault (AL12) to 1919) ( AD3 fault (AL13) to 1919) ( AD4 fault (AL14) to 1919) ( PV1 high limit error to 1919) (AL01) ( PV2 high limit error to 1919) (AL03) ( PV3 high limit error to 1919) (AL05) ( PV4 high limit error to 1919) (AL07) ( PV1 low limit error (AL02) to 1919) ( PV2 low limit error (AL04) to 1919) ( PV3 low limit error (AL06) to 1919) ( PV4 low limit error (AL08) to 1919) ( CJ1 error (AL71) to 1919) ( CJ2 error (AL72) to 1919) ( CJ3 error (AL73) NX-D35 not supported to 1919) ( CJ4 error (AL74) NX-D35 not supported to 1919) ( MFB1 G line break C NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 G line break D NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 Y line break NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 Y line break NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 T/multiline break NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 T/multiline break NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 input error (AL21) NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 input error (AL23) NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 is under adjustment C NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 is under adjustment D NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 estimation in NX-D15/25 not to 1919) progress supported (1792 to 1919) 1 MFB2 estimation in progress NX-D15/25 not supported 12-13

242 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write ( MFB1 adjustment error NX-D15/25 not to 1919) (AL22) supported ( MFB2 adjustment error NX-D15/25 not to 1919) (AL24) supported ( MFB1 OPEN C NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 OPEN D NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB1 CLOSE NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( MFB2 CLOSE NX-D15/25 not to 1919) supported ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring to 2047) ( Reception monitoring A to 2047) ( Reception monitoring B to 2047) ( Reception monitoring C to 2047) ( Reception monitoring D to 2047) ( Reception monitoring E to 2047) ( Reception monitoring F to 2047) ( CT1 input error (AL25) A0 to 2047) ( CT2 input error (AL26) A1 to 2047) ( CT3 input error (AL27) A2 to 2047) ( CT4 input error (AL28) A3 to 2047) ( Parameter error (AL94/ B0 to 2047) AL97) ( Adjustment data error B1 to 2047) (AL95/AL98) ( EEPROM not initialized B2 to 2047) (AL83) ( ROM error (AL99) B4 to 2047) ( RAM read/write error B5 to 2047) (AL85) ( EEPROM read/write error B6 to 2047) (AL86) ( Reception monitoring BB to 2047) (representatives of 1 16) (AL31) ( Transmission timeout BC to 2047) between modules (AL32) ( Writing to EEPROM BD to 2047) (1920 to 2047) 1 Supervisor module transmission timeout BE 12-14

243 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bit/ Bit Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks bit (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) 1 RS-485 setting error (AL33) 1 Adjacent ring disconnection (AL38) 1 Non-adjacent ring disconnection 1 Base/module communication setting mismatch (AL53) 1 Base-body model No. mismatch (AL 54) 1 Base verification error (AL55) BF C C C C C

244 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write numerical 1 Always code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) 1 User-defined number F 1 User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number User-defined number A 1 User-defined number B 1 User-defined number C 1 User-defined number D 1 User-defined number E 1 PID MV F PID MV F Remarks 1 PID MV F NX-D35 not supported 1 PID MV F NX-D35 not supported 1 PV A00 PV1 1 PV A01 PV2 1 PV A02 PV3 1 PV A03 PV

245 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write numerical 1 AI A08 PV1 code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) 1 AI A09 PV2 1 AI A0A PV3 1 AI A0B PV4 1 Loop 1 PV A10 PID1_PV 1 Loop 2 PV A11 PID2_PV Remarks 1 Loop 3 PV A12 PID3_PV NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 4 PV A13 PID4_PV NX-D35 not supported 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 1 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 2 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 3 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor A A A1A A1B 2 1 Loop 1 SP (in use) A20 PID1_PV * 1 1 Loop 2 SP (in use) A21 PID2_PV *1 1 Loop 3 SP (in use) A22 PID3_PV 1, NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 4 SP (in use) A23 PID4_PV 1, NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 1 SP (final value) A30 PID1_PV * 2 1 Loop 2 SP (final value) A31 PID2_PV *2 1 Loop 3 SP (final value) A32 PID3_PV 2, NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 4 SP (final value) A33 PID4_PV 2, NX-D35 not supported 1 SP output of loop A50 PID1_PV 1 SP output of loop A51 PID2_PV 1 SP output of loop A52 PID3_PV NX-D35 not supported 1 SP output of loop A53 PID4_PV NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 1 MV A

246 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write numerical 1 MV of loop A71 1 code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) Remarks 1 MV of loop A72 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 MV of loop A73 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 1 MV for heating A Loop 2 heat MV A : Loop 3 heat MV A82 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 2: Loop 4 heat MV A83 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 Loop 1 MV for cooling A : Loop 2 cool MV A : Loop 3 cool MV A92 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 3: Loop 4 cool MV A93 1 NX-D35 not supported 1 MFB1 amount of opening (estimated) 1 MFB2 amount of opening (estimated) 1 MFB1 degree of opening (actual value) 1 MFB2 degree of opening (actual value) 1 CT1 measured current when output ON 1 CT2 measured current when output ON 1 CT3 measured current when output ON 1 CT4 measured current when output ON 1 CT1 measured current when output OFF 1 CT2 measured current when output OFF 1 CT3 measured current when output OFF 1 CT4 measured current when output OFF AA0 1 NX-D15/25 not supported, * AA1 1 NX-D15/25 not supported, * AB0 1 NX-D15/25 not supported AB1 1 NX-D15/25 not supported AC AC AC AC AD AD AD AD3 1 1 Loop 1 deviation (PV - SP) AE0 PID1_PV 1 Loop 2 deviation (PV - SP) AE1 PID2_PV 12-18

247 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write numerical 1 Loop 3 deviation (PV - SP) AE2 PID3_PV NX-D35 not supported code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) 1 Loop 4 deviation (PV - SP) AE3 PID4_PV NX-D35 not supported 1 Event 1 timer remaining time 1 Event 2 timer remaining time 1 Event 3 timer remaining time 1 Event 4 timer remaining time 1 Event 5 timer remaining time 1 Event 6 timer remaining time 1 Event 7 timer remaining time 1 Event 8 timer remaining time 1 Event 9 timer remaining time 1 Event 10 timer remaining time 1 Event 11 timer remaining time 1 Event 12 timer remaining time 1 Event 13 timer remaining time 1 Event 14 timer remaining time 1 Event 15 timer remaining time 1 Event 16 timer remaining time 1 Event 17 timer remaining time 1 Event 18 timer remaining time 1 Event 19 timer remaining time 1 Event 20 timer remaining time 1 Event 21 timer remaining time 1 Event 22 timer remaining time 1 Event 23 timer remaining time B B B B B B B B B B B6A B6B B6C B6D B6E B6F B B B B B B B

248 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) 1 Event 24 timer remaining time 1 MV for position proportioning 1 1 MV for position proportioning 2 1 CT1 Time proportioning current 1 CT2 Time proportioning current 1 CT3 Time proportioning current 1 CT4 Time proportioning current EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write B77 1 Remarks BA0 1 NX-D15/25 not supported BA1 1 NX-D15/25 not supported BB BB BB BB3 1 *1 The SP used in each loop is read. During ramp operation and RSP, the changing value is read. If the ramp is stopped during MANUAL or READY, the LSP value is read. *2 The SP used in the loop is read. *3 This MFB amount of opening is the same value as the MFB amount of opening in "Monitor/Monitor (Basic)" (page 12-6)

249 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/User-defined Bit EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 1 to User-defined bit 1 to 16 (See P ) Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit A A Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit B B Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit C C Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit D D Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit E E Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit F F Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 17 to User-defined bit 17 to 32 (See P ) Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit A A Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit B B Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit C C Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit D D Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit E E Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit F F Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit

250 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Monitor/User-defined Bit Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC0 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC1 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC2 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC3 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC4 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC5 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC6 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC7 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC8 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FC FC9 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCA FCA Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCB FCB Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCC FCC Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCD FCD Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCE FCE Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number FCF FCF Remarks 12-22

251 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Communications/Ethernet Communications EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Folder name Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 MAC address Communications Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications Communications Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 1 IPv4 address Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 1 IPv4 address Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 1 IPv4 address net mask 1 1 IPv4 address net mask 2 1 IPv4 address net mask 3 1 IPv4 address net mask 4 1 IPv4 default gateway 1 1 IPv4 default gateway 2 1 IPv4 default gateway 3 1 IPv4 default gateway Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on A Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on B Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on C Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 1 CPL/TCP port number D Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 1 MODBUS/TCP port number E Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 12-23

252 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Communications/RS-485 Communications EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Folder name Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Communications RS-485 communication 1 Communications type Communications RS-485 communication 1 Station address setting Communications RS-485 communication 1 Transmission speed Communications RS-485 communication 1 Data format (Data length) Communications RS-485 communication 1 Data format (parity) Communications RS-485 communication 1 Data format (stop bit) Communications RS-485 communication 1 Minimum response time Remarks 12-24

253 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Setup Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Basic Setup 1 SP system group Remarks Basic Setup 1 Start delay at power ON Basic Setup 1 Advanced function C C password 1 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function D D password 2 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function E E password 3 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function F F password 4 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 5 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 6 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 7 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 8 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 9 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 10 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 11 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 12 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 13 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function password 14 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function A A password 15 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function B B password 16 Basic Setup 1 Loop type B B0 Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Basic Setup 1 Release all latches B B

254 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop (Input) Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned PV D D0 Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned RSP D D1 Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned AI D D3 Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned PV E E0 Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned RSP E E1 Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned AI E E3 Remarks Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned PV F F0 NX-D35 not supported Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned RSP F F1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned AI F F3 Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned PV A A00 NX-D35 not supported Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned RSP A A01 NX-D35 not supported Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned AI A A

255 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Loop PV/SP decimal F F70 point position Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Control action F F72 Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Control algorithm F F73 Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Range low limit for F F74 PID_PV proportional band Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Range high limit for F F75 PID_PV proportional band Basic Loop control (basic) 1 AT type F F76 Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Heating/Cooling control F F77 1 dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Initial output of PID F F78 1 control Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Loop PV/SP decimal F F80 point position Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Control action F F82 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Control algorithm F F83 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Range low limit for F F84 PID_PV proportional band Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Range high limit for F F85 PID_PV proportional band Basic Loop control (basic) 2 AT type F F86 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Heating/Cooling control F F87 1 dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Initial output of PID F F88 1 control Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Loop PV/SP decimal point position F F90 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Control action F F92 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Control algorithm F F93 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Range low limit for proportional band F F94 PID_PV NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Range high limit for proportional band F F95 PID_PV NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 AT type F F96 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Heating/Cooling control dead zone F F97 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Initial output of PID control F F98 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Loop PV/SP decimal point position FA FA0 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Control action FA FA2 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Control algorithm FA FA3 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Range low limit for proportional band FA FA4 PID_PV NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Range high limit for proportional band FA FA5 PID_PV NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 AT type FA FA6 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Heating/Cooling control dead zone FA FA7 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Initial output of PID control FA FA8 1 NX-D35 not supported 12-27

256 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop (extended) 1 PID control initialization FB FB0 Basic Loop (extended) 1 Integration time/derivative FB FB1 time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 1 Output operation at FB FB2 changing Auto/Manual Basic Loop (extended) 1 Preset MANUAL value FB FB3 1 Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV increase change limit FB FB4 2 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV decrease change limit FB FB5 2 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV low limit during AT FB FB7 1 Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV high limit during AT FB FB8 1 Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone action selection FBB FBB NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone FBC FBC PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone FBD FBD PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone FBE FBE PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone hysteresis FC FC3 PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 PID control initialization FD FD0 Basic Loop (extended) 2 Integration time/derivative FD FD1 time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 2 Output operation at FD FD2 changing Auto/Manual Basic Loop (extended) 2 Preset MANUAL value FD FD3 1 Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV increase change limit FD FD4 2 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV decrease change limit FD FD5 2 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV low limit during AT FD FD7 1 Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV high limit during AT FD FD8 1 Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone action selection FDB FDB NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone FDC FDC PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone FDD FDD PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone FDE FDE PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone hysteresis FE FE3 PID_PV NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 PID control initialization FF FF0 Basic Loop (extended) 3 Integration time/derivative time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 3 Output operation at changing Auto/Manual FF FF1 NX-D35 not supported FF FF2 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Preset MANUAL value FF FF3 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV increase change limit FF FF4 2 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV decrease change limit FF FF5 2 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV low limit during AT FF FF7 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV high limit during AT FF FF8 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone action selection FFB FFB NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone FFC FFC PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone FFD FFD PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone FFE FFE PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone hysteresis PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported 12-28

257 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop (extended) 4 PID control initialization NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Integration time/derivative time decimal point NX-D35 not supported positio Basic Loop (extended) 4 Output operation at changing Auto/Manual NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Preset MANUAL value NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV increase change limit NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV decrease change limit NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV low limit during AT NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV high limit during AT NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone action selection B B NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone C C PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone D D PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone E E PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone hysteresis PID_PV NX-D15/35 not supported 12-29

258 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 Just-FiTTER settling band Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 SP lag factor A A 1 Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 Just-FiTTER settling band Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 SP lag factor A A 1 Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, proportional band NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, integral time NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, derivative time NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 Just-FiTTER settling band NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 SP lag factor A A 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, proportional band NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, integral time NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, derivative time NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 Just-FiTTER settling band NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression factor NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 SP lag factor A A 1 NX-D35 not supported 12-30

259 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop Output Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY B B0 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY (Heat) B B1 1 Remarks Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY (Cool) B B2 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Selection of MV if PV is B B3 abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at PV error B B4 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output B B5 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output B B6 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output B B7 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output B B8 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output B B9 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output BA BA 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output BB BB 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output BC BC 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY C C0 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY (Heat) C C1 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY (Cool) C C2 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Selection of MV if PV is C C3 abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at PV error C C4 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output C C5 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output C C6 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output C C7 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output C C8 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output C C9 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output CA CA 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output CB CB 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output CC CC 1 NX-D15 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY D D0 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY (Heat) D D1 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY (Cool) D D2 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Selection of MV if PV is abnormal D D3 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at PV error D D4 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output D D5 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output D D6 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output D D7 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output D D8 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output D D9 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output DA DA 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output DB DB 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output DC DC 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY E E0 1 NX-D35 not supported 12-31

260 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop Output Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY (Heat) E E1 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY (Cool) E E2 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Selection of MV if PV is abnormal E E3 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at PV error E E4 1 NX-D35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output E E5 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output E E6 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output E E7 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output E E8 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output E E9 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output EA EA 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output EB EB 1 NX-D15/35 not supported Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output EC EC 1 NX-D15/35 not supported 12-32

261 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Position Proportioning Adjustment Folder name Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Remarks Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Position proportioning 1 Auto-tuning A A40 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 1 Fully closed FB value A A41 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 1 Fully open FB value A A42 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 1 Full opening time A A43 1 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 2 Auto-tuning A A48 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 2 Fully closed FB value A A49 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 2 Fully open FB value A4A A4A NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported Position proportioning 2 Full opening time A4B A4B 1 NX-D15/25 not adjustment supported 12-33

262 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Loop Output (Cascade) Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 SP scaling method AD AD0 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 Output scaling low limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 Output scaling high limit AD AD1 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1) AD AD2 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 SP output filter AD AD4 2 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 SP scaling method AD AD8 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 Output scaling low limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 Output scaling high limit AD AD9 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1) ADA ADA PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 SP output filter ADC ADC 2 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 SP scaling method AE AE0 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 Output scaling low limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 Output scaling high limit AE AE1 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1) AE AE2 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 SP output filter AE AE4 2 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 SP scaling method AE AE8 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 Output scaling low limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 Output scaling high limit AE AE9 PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1) AEA AEA PID_PV For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1). Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 SP output filter AEC AEC 2 For supported models, see "4-1 How to Set the Loop Configuration" (page 4-1)

263 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output type EE EE0 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output (%) EE EE1 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output (ON/OFF) EE EE2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output type EE EE4 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output (%) EE EE5 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output (ON/OFF) EE EE6 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output type EE EE8 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output (%) EE EE9 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output (ON/OFF) EEA EEA Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output type EEC EEC Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output (%) EED EED 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output (ON/OFF) EEE EEE Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output type EF EF0 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output (%) EF EF1 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output (ON/OFF) EF EF2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output type EF EF4 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output (%) EF EF5 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output (ON/OFF) EF EF6 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output type EF EF8 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output (%) EF EF9 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output (ON/OFF) EFA EFA Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output type EFC EFC Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output (%) EFD EFD 1 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output (ON/OFF) EFE EFE Remarks 12-35

264 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Basic/Position Proportioning Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Basic Position proportioning 1 Output type F F30 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 1 Control method selection F F31 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 1 Dead zone F F32 1 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 1 Long life F F33 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 1 Loop assignment F F38 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 1 Linearization table group F F39 NX-D15/25 not definition supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Output type F F40 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Control method selection F F41 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Dead zone F F42 1 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Long life F F43 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Loop assignment F F48 NX-D15/25 not supported Basic Position proportioning 2 Linearization table group definition F F49 NX-D15/25 not supported 12-36

265 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Input-output/PV Input Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Input-output PV input 1 Range type Input-output PV input 1 decimal point position Input-output PV input 1 Temperature unit Input-output PV input 1 Alarm setting low limit PV Input-output PV input 1 Alarm setting high limit PV Input-output PV input 1 Cold junction compensation Input-output PV input 1 Linear scaling low limit PV Input-output PV input 1 Linear scaling high limit PV Input-output PV input 1 Square root extraction dropout A A 1 Input-output PV input 1 Filter B B 2 Input-output PV input 1 Bias C C PV Input-output PV input 1 Ratio D D 3 Input-output PV input 1 Linearization table group definition Input-output PV input 2 Range type Input-output PV input 2 decimal point position Input-output PV input 2 Temperature unit Input-output PV input 2 Alarm setting low limit PV Input-output PV input 2 Alarm setting high limit PV Input-output PV input 2 Cold junction compensation Input-output PV input 2 Linear scaling low limit PV Input-output PV input 2 Linear scaling high limit PV Input-output PV input 2 Square root extraction dropout A A 1 Input-output PV input 2 Filter B B 2 Input-output PV input 2 Bias C C PV Input-output PV input 2 Ratio D D 3 Input-output PV input 2 Linearization table group definition Input-output PV input 3 Range type Input-output PV input 3 decimal point position Input-output PV input 3 Temperature unit Input-output PV input 3 Alarm setting low limit PV Input-output PV input 3 Alarm setting high limit PV Input-output PV input 3 Cold junction compensation Input-output PV input 3 Linear scaling low limit PV Input-output PV input 3 Linear scaling high limit PV Input-output PV input 3 Square root extraction dropout A A 1 Input-output PV input 3 Filter B B 2 Input-output PV input 3 Bias C C PV Input-output PV input 3 Ratio D D 3 Input-output PV input 3 Linearization table group definition Input-output PV input 4 Range type A A0 Input-output PV input 4 decimal point position A A1 Input-output PV input 4 Temperature unit A A2 Input-output PV input 4 Alarm setting low limit A A3 PV Input-output PV input 4 Alarm setting high limit A A4 PV Input-output PV input 4 Cold junction compensation A A5 Input-output PV input 4 Linear scaling low limit A A8 PV Input-output PV input 4 Linear scaling high limit A A9 PV Input-output PV input 4 Square root extraction dropout AA AA 1 Input-output PV input 4 Filter AB AB 2 Input-output PV input 4 Bias AC AC PV Input-output PV input 4 Ratio AD AD 3 Input-output PV input 4 Linearization table group definition B B3 Remarks 12-37

266 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Input-output/Continuous Output Folder name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Continuous output 1 Output range Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Continuous output 1 Output type Continuous output 1 Loop/channel definition Continuous output 1 Output decimal point position Continuous output 1 Output scaling low OUT limit Continuous output 1 Output scaling high OUT limit Continuous output 2 Output range Continuous output 2 Output type Continuous output 2 Loop/channel definition Continuous output 2 Output decimal point position Continuous output 2 Output scaling low OUT limit Continuous output 2 Output scaling high OUT limit Continuous output 3 Output range Continuous output 3 Output type Continuous output 3 Loop/channel definition Continuous output 3 Output decimal point position Continuous output 3 Output scaling low OUT limit Continuous output 3 Output scaling high OUT limit Continuous output 4 Output range Continuous output 4 Output type Continuous output 4 Loop/channel definition Continuous output 4 Output decimal point position Continuous output 4 Output scaling low OUT limit Continuous output 4 Output scaling high OUT limit Remarks 12-38

267 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Input-output / OUT/DO Output Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Output type Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Latch Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Time proportional operation type Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Min. ON/OFF time Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Time proportional cycle Input-output OUT/DO output 1 Phase shift Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Output type Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Latch Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Time proportional operation type Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Min. ON/OFF time Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Time proportional cycle Input-output OUT/DO output 2 Phase shift Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Output type Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Latch Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Time proportional operation type Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Min. ON/OFF time Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Time proportional cycle Input-output OUT/DO output 3 Phase shift Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Output type A A0 Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Latch A A1 Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Time proportional operation A A2 type Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Min. ON/OFF time A A3 Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Time proportional cycle A A4 1 Input-output OUT/DO output 4 Phase shift A A8 Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Output type B B0 Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Latch B B1 Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Time proportional operation B B2 type Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Min. ON/OFF time B B3 Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Time proportional cycle B B4 1 Input-output OUT/DO output 5 Phase shift B B8 Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Output type C C0 Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Latch C C1 Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Time proportional operation C C2 type Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Min. ON/OFF time C C3 Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Time proportional cycle C C4 1 Input-output OUT/DO output 6 Phase shift C C8 Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Output type D D0 Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Latch D D1 Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Time proportional operation D D2 type Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Min. ON/OFF time D D3 Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Time proportional cycle D D4 1 Input-output OUT/DO output 7 Phase shift D D8 Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Output type E E0 Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Latch E E1 Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Time proportional operation E E2 type Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Min. ON/OFF time E E3 Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Time proportional cycle E E4 1 Input-output OUT/DO output 8 Phase shift E E8 Remarks 12-39

268 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Input-output/Zener Barrier Adjustment Folder name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Zener barrier adjst. 1 Command to store A A60 adjusted values Zener barrier adjst. 1 Adjustment factor A A61 2 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Zener barrier adjst. 2 Command to store A A64 adjusted values Zener barrier adjst. 2 Adjustment factor A A65 2 Remarks Zener barrier adjst. 3 Command to store adjusted values A A68 NX-D35 not supported Zener barrier adjst. 3 Adjustment factor A A69 2 NX-D35 not supported Zener barrier adjst. 4 Command to store A6C A6C NX-D35 not supported adjusted values Zener barrier adjst. 4 Adjustment factor A6D A6D 2 NX-D35 not supported 12-40

269 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Input-output/CT Input Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Input-output CT input 1 CT operation B B90 Input-output CT input 1 Waiting time for CT measurement B B91 Input-output CT input 1 Number of CT turns B B92 Input-output CT input 1 Number of CT power line B B93 passes Input-output CT input 1 Heater burnout detection B B94 1 current value Input-output CT input 1 Minimum current defined B B95 1 as overcurrent Input-output CT input 1 Minimum current defined B B96 1 as short-circuit Input-output CT input 1 Hysteresis B B97 1 Input-output CT input 1 Delay time B B98 1 Input-output CT input 1 Condition for restoring B B99 status before measurement Input-output CT input 2 CT operation BA BA0 Input-output CT input 2 Waiting time for CT measurement BA BA1 Input-output CT input 2 Number of CT turns BA BA2 Input-output CT input 2 Number of CT power line BA BA3 passes Input-output CT input 2 Heater burnout detection BA BA4 1 current value Input-output CT input 2 Minimum current defined BA BA5 1 as overcurrent Input-output CT input 2 Minimum current defined BA BA6 1 as short-circuit Input-output CT input 2 Hysteresis BA BA7 1 Input-output CT input 2 Delay time BA BA8 1 Input-output CT input 2 Condition for restoring BA BA9 status before measurement Input-output CT input 3 CT operation BB BB0 Input-output CT input 3 Waiting time for CT measurement BB BB1 Input-output CT input 3 Number of CT turns BB BB2 Input-output CT input 3 Number of CT power line BB BB3 passes Input-output CT input 3 Heater burnout detection BB BB4 1 current value Input-output CT input 3 Minimum current defined BB BB5 1 as overcurrent Input-output CT input 3 Minimum current defined BB BB6 1 as short-circuit Input-output CT input 3 Hysteresis BB BB7 1 Input-output CT input 3 Delay time BB BB8 1 Input-output CT input 3 Condition for restoring BB BB9 status before measurement Input-output CT input 4 CT operation BC BC0 Input-output CT input 4 Waiting time for CT measurement BC BC1 Input-output CT input 4 Number of CT turns BC BC2 Input-output CT input 4 Number of CT power line BC BC3 passes Input-output CT input 4 Heater burnout detection BC BC4 1 current value Input-output CT input 4 Minimum current defined BC BC5 1 as overcurrent Input-output CT input 4 Minimum current defined BC BC6 1 as short-circuit Input-output CT input 4 Hysteresis BC BC7 1 Input-output CT input 4 Delay time BC BC8 1 Input-output CT input 4 Condition for restoring BC BC9 status before measurement Input-output CT input 1 Continuous current measurement cycle BD BD0 1 Remarks 12-41

270 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Input-output CT input 2 Continuous current measurement cycle Input-output CT input 3 Continuous current measurement cycle Input-output CT input 4 Continuous current measurement cycle RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write BE BE BF BF C C00 1 Remarks 12-42

271 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA SP/SP Group Selection Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write SP SP group selection 1 SP group selection SP SP group selection 2 SP group selection SP SP group selection 3 SP group selection SP SP group selection 4 SP group selection C C Remarks 12-43

272 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA SP/LSP Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write SP LSP 1 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition 4 (for LSP) Remarks 12-44

273 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA SP/RSP Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks SP RSP 1 RSP PID_PV SP RSP 1 PID group definition (for RSP) SP RSP 2 RSP PID_PV SP RSP 2 PID group definition (for RSP) SP RSP 3 RSP PID_PV NX-D35 not supported SP RSP 3 PID group definition (for RSP) NX-D35 not supported SP RSP 4 RSP C C PID_PV NX-D35 not supported SP RSP 4 PID group definition (for RSP) D D NX-D35 not supported 12-45

274 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA SP/SP Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write SP SP configuration 1 SP low limit A A0 PID_PV SP SP configuration 1 SP high limit A A1 PID_PV SP SP configuration 2 SP low limit A A4 PID_PV SP SP configuration 2 SP high limit A A5 PID_PV SP SP configuration 3 SP low limit A A8 PID_PV SP SP configuration 3 SP high limit A A9 PID_PV SP SP configuration 4 SP low limit AC AC PID_PV SP SP configuration 4 SP high limit AD AD PID_PV SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp unit B B0 SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-up for LSP B B1 RAMP SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-down for LSP B B2 RAMP SP SP configuration 1 RSP tracking B B3 SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-up for RSP B B4 RAMP SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-down for RSP B B5 RAMP SP SP configuration 1 PV start for LSP B B8 SP SP configuration 1 PV start for RSP B B9 SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp unit C C0 SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-up for LSP C C1 RAMP SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-down for LSP C C2 RAMP SP SP configuration 2 RSP tracking C C3 SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-up for RSP C C4 RAMP SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-down for RSP C C5 RAMP SP SP configuration 2 PV start for LSP C C8 SP SP configuration 2 PV start for RSP C C9 SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp unit D D0 Remarks SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-up for LSP D D1 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-down for LSP D D2 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 RSP tracking D D3 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-up for RSP D D4 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-down for RSP D D5 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 PV start for LSP D D8 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 3 PV start for RSP D D9 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp unit E E0 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-up for LSP E E1 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-down for LSP E E2 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 RSP tracking E E3 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-up for RSP E E4 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-down for RSP E E5 RAMP NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 PV start for LSP E E8 NX-D35 not supported SP SP configuration 4 PV start for RSP E E9 NX-D35 not supported 12-46

275 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Settings Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Event Event setting (operating point) 1 Event main setting F F0 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 1 Event sub-setting F F1 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 2 Event main setting F F2 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 2 Event sub-setting F F3 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 3 Event main setting F F4 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 3 Event sub-setting F F5 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 4 Event main setting F F6 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 4 Event sub-setting F F7 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 5 Event main setting F F8 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 5 Event sub-setting F F9 EV Event Event setting (operating point) 6 Event main setting FA FA EV Event Event setting (operating point) 6 Event sub-setting FB FB EV Event Event setting (operating point) 7 Event main setting FC FC EV Event Event setting (operating point) 7 Event sub-setting FD FD EV Event Event setting (operating point) 8 Event main setting FE FE EV Event Event setting (operating point) 8 Event sub-setting FF FF EV Event Event setting (operating point) 9 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 9 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 10 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 10 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 11 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 11 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 12 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 12 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 13 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 13 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 14 Event main setting A A EV Event Event setting (operating point) 14 Event sub-setting B B EV Event Event setting (operating point) 15 Event main setting C C EV Event Event setting (operating point) 15 Event sub-setting D D EV Event Event setting (operating point) 16 Event main setting E E EV Event Event setting (operating point) 16 Event sub-setting F F EV Event Event setting (operating point) 17 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 17 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 18 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 18 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 19 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 19 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 20 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 20 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 21 Event main setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 21 Event sub-setting EV Event Event setting (operating point) 22 Event main setting A A EV Event Event setting (operating point) 22 Event sub-setting B B EV Event Event setting (operating point) 23 Event main setting C C EV Event Event setting (operating point) 23 Event sub-setting D D EV Event Event setting (operating point) 24 Event main setting E E EV Event Event setting (operating point) 24 Event sub-setting F F EV Remarks 12-47

276 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Event Event config. 1 Operation type Event Event config. 1 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 1 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 1 Standby Event Event config. 1 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 1 decimal point position Event Event config. 1 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 1 ON delay Event Event config. 1 OFF delay Event Event config. 2 Operation type Event Event config. 2 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 2 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 2 Standby Event Event config. 2 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 2 decimal point position Event Event config. 2 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 2 ON delay Event Event config. 2 OFF delay Event Event config. 3 Operation type Event Event config. 3 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 3 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 3 Standby Event Event config. 3 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 3 decimal point position Event Event config. 3 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 3 ON delay Event Event config. 3 OFF delay Event Event config. 4 Operation type Event Event config. 4 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 4 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 4 Standby Event Event config. 4 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 4 decimal point position Event Event config. 4 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 4 ON delay Event Event config. 4 OFF delay Event Event config. 5 Operation type Event Event config. 5 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 5 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 5 Standby Event Event config. 5 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 5 decimal point position Event Event config. 5 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 5 ON delay Event Event config. 5 OFF delay Event Event config. 6 Operation type Event Event config. 6 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 6 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 6 Standby Event Event config. 6 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 6 decimal point position Event Event config. 6 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 6 ON delay Event Event config. 6 OFF delay Remarks 12-48

277 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Event Event config. 7 Operation type Event Event config. 7 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 7 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 7 Standby Event Event config. 7 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 7 decimal point position Event Event config. 7 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 7 ON delay Event Event config. 7 OFF delay Event Event config. 8 Operation type A A0 Event Event config. 8 Loop/channel definition A A1 Event Event config. 8 Direct/Reverse A A2 Event Event config. 8 Standby A A3 Event Event config. 8 EVENT state at READY A A4 Event Event config. 8 decimal point position A A5 Event Event config. 8 Hysteresis A A6 EV Event Event config. 8 ON delay A A7 1 Event Event config. 8 OFF delay A A8 1 Event Event config. 9 Operation type B B0 Event Event config. 9 Loop/channel definition B B1 Event Event config. 9 Direct/Reverse B B2 Event Event config. 9 Standby B B3 Event Event config. 9 EVENT state at READY B B4 Event Event config. 9 decimal point position B B5 Event Event config. 9 Hysteresis B B6 EV Event Event config. 9 ON delay B B7 1 Event Event config. 9 OFF delay B B8 1 Event Event config. 10 Operation type C C0 Event Event config. 10 Loop/channel definition C C1 Event Event config. 10 Direct/Reverse C C2 Event Event config. 10 Standby C C3 Event Event config. 10 EVENT state at READY C C4 Event Event config. 10 decimal point position C C5 Event Event config. 10 Hysteresis C C6 EV Event Event config. 10 ON delay C C7 1 Event Event config. 10 OFF delay C C8 1 Event Event config. 11 Operation type D D0 Event Event config. 11 Loop/channel definition D D1 Event Event config. 11 Direct/Reverse D D2 Event Event config. 11 Standby D D3 Event Event config. 11 EVENT state at READY D D4 Event Event config. 11 decimal point position D D5 Event Event config. 11 Hysteresis D D6 EV Event Event config. 11 ON delay D D7 1 Event Event config. 11 OFF delay D D8 1 Event Event config. 12 Operation type E E0 Event Event config. 12 Loop/channel definition E E1 Event Event config. 12 Direct/Reverse E E2 Event Event config. 12 Standby E E3 Event Event config. 12 EVENT state at READY E E4 Event Event config. 12 decimal point position E E5 Event Event config. 12 Hysteresis E E6 EV Event Event config. 12 ON delay E E7 1 Event Event config. 12 OFF delay E E8 1 Remarks 12-49

278 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Event Event config. 13 Operation type F F0 Event Event config. 13 Loop/channel definition F F1 Event Event config. 13 Direct/Reverse F F2 Event Event config. 13 Standby F F3 Event Event config. 13 EVENT state at READY F F4 Event Event config. 13 decimal point position F F5 Event Event config. 13 Hysteresis F F6 EV Event Event config. 13 ON delay F F7 1 Event Event config. 13 OFF delay F F8 1 Event Event config. 14 Operation type Event Event config. 14 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 14 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 14 Standby Event Event config. 14 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 14 decimal point position Event Event config. 14 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 14 ON delay Event Event config. 14 OFF delay Event Event config. 15 Operation type Event Event config. 15 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 15 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 15 Standby Event Event config. 15 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 15 decimal point position Event Event config. 15 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 15 ON delay Event Event config. 15 OFF delay Event Event config. 16 Operation type Event Event config. 16 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 16 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 16 Standby Event Event config. 16 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 16 decimal point position Event Event config. 16 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 16 ON delay Event Event config. 16 OFF delay Event Event config. 17 Operation type Event Event config. 17 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 17 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 17 Standby Event Event config. 17 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 17 decimal point position Event Event config. 17 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 17 ON delay Event Event config. 17 OFF delay Event Event config. 18 Operation type Event Event config. 18 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 18 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 18 Standby Event Event config. 18 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 18 decimal point position Event Event config. 18 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 18 ON delay Event Event config. 18 OFF delay Remarks 12-50

279 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Event Event config. 19 Operation type Event Event config. 19 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 19 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 19 Standby Event Event config. 19 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 19 decimal point position Event Event config. 19 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 19 ON delay Event Event config. 19 OFF delay Event Event config. 20 Operation type Event Event config. 20 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 20 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 20 Standby Event Event config. 20 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 20 decimal point position Event Event config. 20 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 20 ON delay Event Event config. 20 OFF delay Event Event config. 21 Operation type Event Event config. 21 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 21 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 21 Standby Event Event config. 21 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 21 decimal point position Event Event config. 21 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 21 ON delay Event Event config. 21 OFF delay Event Event config. 22 Operation type Event Event config. 22 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 22 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 22 Standby Event Event config. 22 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 22 decimal point position Event Event config. 22 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 22 ON delay Event Event config. 22 OFF delay Event Event config. 23 Operation type Event Event config. 23 Loop/channel definition Event Event config. 23 Direct/Reverse Event Event config. 23 Standby Event Event config. 23 EVENT state at READY Event Event config. 23 decimal point position Event Event config. 23 Hysteresis EV Event Event config. 23 ON delay Event Event config. 23 OFF delay Event Event config. 24 Operation type A A0 Event Event config. 24 Loop/channel definition A A1 Event Event config. 24 Direct/Reverse A A2 Event Event config. 24 Standby A A3 Event Event config. 24 EVENT state at READY A A4 Event Event config. 24 decimal point position A A5 Event Event config. 24 Hysteresis A A6 EV Event Event config. 24 ON delay A A7 1 Event Event config. 24 OFF delay A A8 1 Remarks 12-51

280 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write PID PID 1 Proportional band B B70 1 PID PID 1 Integral time B B71 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time B B72 PID PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit B B73 1 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit B B74 1 PID PID 1 Manual reset B B75 1 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool B B76 1 side 1 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool side B B77 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool B B78 PID side 1 PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool B B79 1 side 1 PID PID 1 Output high limit for cool B7A B7A 1 side 1 PID PID 1 Differential B7B B7B PID_PV PID PID 1 Proportional band B B80 1 PID PID 1 Integral time B B81 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time B B82 PID PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit B B83 1 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit B B84 1 PID PID 1 Manual reset B B85 1 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool B B86 1 side 2 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool side B B87 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool B B88 PID side 2 PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool B B89 1 side 2 PID PID 1 Output high limit for cool B8A B8A 1 side 2 PID PID 1 Differential B8B B8B PID_PV PID PID 1 Proportional band B B90 1 PID PID 1 Integral time B B91 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time B B92 PID PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit B B93 1 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit B B94 1 PID PID 1 Manual reset B B95 1 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool B B96 1 side 3 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool side B B97 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool B B98 PID side 3 PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool B B99 1 side 3 PID PID 1 Output high limit for cool B9A B9A 1 side 3 PID PID 1 Differential B9B B9B PID_PV PID PID 1 Proportional band BA BA0 1 PID PID 1 Integral time BA BA1 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time BA BA2 PID PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit BA BA3 1 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit BA BA4 1 PID PID 1 Manual reset BA BA5 1 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool BA BA6 1 side 4 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool side BA BA7 PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool BA BA8 PID side 4 PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool BA BA9 1 side 4 PID PID 1 Output high limit for cool BAA BAA 1 side 4 PID PID 1 Differential BAB BAB PID_PV Remarks 12-52

281 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write PID PID 2 Proportional band C C70 1 PID PID 2 Integral time C C71 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time C C72 PID PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit C C73 1 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit C C74 1 PID PID 2 Manual reset C C75 1 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool C C76 1 side 1 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool side C C77 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool C C78 PID side 1 PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool C C79 1 side 1 PID PID 2 Output high limit for cool C7A C7A 1 side 1 PID PID 2 Differential C7B C7B PID_PV PID PID 2 Proportional band C C80 1 PID PID 2 Integral time C C81 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time C C82 PID PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit C C83 1 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit C C84 1 PID PID 2 Manual reset C C85 1 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool C C86 1 side 2 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool side C C87 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool C C88 PID side 2 PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool C C89 1 side 2 PID PID 2 Output high limit for cool C8A C8A 1 side 2 PID PID 2 Differential C8B C8B PID_PV PID PID 2 Proportional band C C90 1 PID PID 2 Integral time C C91 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time C C92 PID PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit C C93 1 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit C C94 1 PID PID 2 Manual reset C C95 1 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool C C96 1 side 3 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool side C C97 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool C C98 PID side 3 PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool C C99 1 side 3 PID PID 2 Output high limit for cool C9A C9A 1 side 3 PID PID 2 Differential C9B C9B PID_PV PID PID 2 Proportional band CA CA0 1 PID PID 2 Integral time CA CA1 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time CA CA2 PID PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit CA CA3 1 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit CA CA4 1 PID PID 2 Manual reset CA CA5 1 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool CA CA6 1 side 4 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool side CA CA7 PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool CA CA8 PID side 4 PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool CA CA9 1 side 4 PID PID 2 Output high limit for cool CAA CAA 1 side 4 PID PID 2 Differential CAB CAB PID_PV Remarks 12-53

282 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks PID PID 3 Proportional band D D70 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Integral time D D71 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time D D72 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) low limit D D73 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) high limit D D74 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Manual reset D D75 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool D D76 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side D D77 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool D D78 PID NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool D D79 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 3 Output high limit for cool D7A D7A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 3 Differential D7B D7B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band D D80 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Integral time D D81 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time D D82 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) low limit D D83 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) high limit D D84 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Manual reset D D85 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool D D86 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side D D87 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool D D88 PID NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool D D89 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 3 Output high limit for cool D8A D8A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 3 Differential D8B D8B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band D D90 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Integral time D D91 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time D D92 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) low limit D D93 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) high limit D D94 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Manual reset D D95 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool D D96 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side D D97 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool D D98 PID NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool D D99 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 3 Output high limit for cool D9A D9A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 3 Differential D9B D9B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band DA DA0 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Integral time DA DA1 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time DA DA2 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) low limit DA DA3 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Output (MV) high limit DA DA4 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Manual reset DA DA5 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool DA DA6 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side DA DA7 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool DA DA8 PID NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool DA DA9 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 3 Output high limit for cool DAA DAA 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 3 Differential DAB DAB PID_PV NX-D35 not supported 12-54

283 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks PID PID 4 Proportional band E E70 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Integral time E E71 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time E E72 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) low limit E E73 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) high limit E E74 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Manual reset E E75 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool E E76 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side E E77 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool E E78 PID NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool E E79 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 4 Output high limit for cool E7A E7A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 1 PID PID 4 Differential E7B E7B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band E E80 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Integral time E E81 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time E E82 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) low limit E E83 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) high limit E E84 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Manual reset E E85 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool E E86 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side E E87 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool E E88 PID NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool E E89 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 4 Output high limit for cool E8A E8A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 2 PID PID 4 Differential E8B E8B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band E E90 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Integral time E E91 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time E E92 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) low limit E E93 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) high limit E E94 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Manual reset E E95 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool E E96 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side E E97 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool E E98 PID NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool E E99 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 4 Output high limit for cool E9A E9A 1 NX-D35 not supported side 3 PID PID 4 Differential E9B E9B PID_PV NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band EA EA0 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Integral time EA EA1 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time EA EA2 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) low limit EA EA3 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Output (MV) high limit EA EA4 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Manual reset EA EA5 1 NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool EA EA6 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side EA EA7 PID NX-D35 not supported PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool EA EA8 PID NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool EA EA9 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 4 Output high limit for cool EAA EAA 1 NX-D35 not supported side 4 PID PID 4 Differential EAB EAB PID_PV NX-D35 not supported 12-55

284 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint decimal F F0 NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F0 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F8 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A F F9 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FA FA TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FB FB TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FC FC TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FD FD TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FE FE TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A FF FF TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-56

285 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint decimal NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-57

286 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint decimal NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-58

287 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint decimal NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A0 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B A A8 TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-59

288 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint decimal B B0 NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B8 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A B B9 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BA BA TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BB BB TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BC BC TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BD BD TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BE BE TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A BF BF TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A C C0 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A C C1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A C C2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A C C3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A C C4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B C C5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B C C6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B C C7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B C C8 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B C C9 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CA CA TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CB CB TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CC CC TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CD CD TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CE CE TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B CF CF TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D0 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B D D8 TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-60

289 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint decimal E E0 NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E8 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A E E9 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A EA EA TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A EB EB TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A EC EC TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A ED ED TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A EE EE TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A EF EF TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A F F0 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A F F1 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A F F2 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A F F3 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A F F4 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B F F5 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B F F6 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B F F7 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B F F8 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B F F9 TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FA FA TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FB FB TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FC FC TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FD FD TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FE FE TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B FF FF TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-61

290 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Remarks Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint decimal NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-62

291 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Linearization Table EEPROM Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name address point name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write information Remarks Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint decimal NX-D15 not supported point position Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B A A TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B B B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B C C TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B D D TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B E E TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B F F TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B TBL NX-D15 not supported 12-63

292 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Internal contact IN 1 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 1 Input type Function Internal contact IN 1 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 1 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 2 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 2 Input type Function Internal contact IN 2 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 2 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 3 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 3 Input type Function Internal contact IN 3 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 3 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 4 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 4 Input type Function Internal contact IN 4 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 4 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 5 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 5 Input type Function Internal contact IN 5 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 5 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 6 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 6 Input type Function Internal contact IN 6 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 6 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 7 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 7 Input type Function Internal contact IN 7 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 7 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 8 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 8 Input type Function Internal contact IN 8 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 8 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 9 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 9 Input type Function Internal contact IN 9 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 9 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 10 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 10 Input type Function Internal contact IN 10 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 10 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 11 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 11 Input type Function Internal contact IN 11 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 11 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 12 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 12 Input type Function Internal contact IN 12 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 12 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 13 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 13 Input type Function Internal contact IN 13 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 13 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 14 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 14 Input type Function Internal contact IN 14 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 14 Weighting B B Function Internal contact IN 15 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 15 Input type Remarks 12-64

293 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Internal contact IN 15 Loop/channel definition Function Internal contact IN 15 Weighting Function Internal contact IN 16 Operation type Function Internal contact IN 16 Input type Function Internal contact IN 16 Loop/channel definition A A Function Internal contact IN 16 Weighting B B Remarks 12-65

294 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Logical operation 1 Calculation type Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 1 ON delay time Function Logical operation 1 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 1 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 1 Latch C C Function Logical operation 2 Calculation type Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 2 ON delay time Function Logical operation 2 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 2 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 2 Latch C C Function Logical operation 3 Calculation type Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 3 ON delay time Function Logical operation 3 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 3 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 3 Latch C C Function Logical operation 4 Calculation type Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 4 ON delay time Function Logical operation 4 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 4 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 4 Latch C C Function Logical operation 5 Calculation type A A0 Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment A A A1 Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment B A A2 Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment C A A3 Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment D A A4 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit A A A5 Remarks 12-66

295 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit B A A6 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit C A A7 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit D A A8 Function Logical operation 5 ON delay time A A9 1 Function Logical operation 5 OFF delay time AA AA 1 Function Logical operation 5 Inversion AB AB Function Logical operation 5 Latch AC AC Function Logical operation 6 Calculation type B B0 Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment A B B1 Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment B B B2 Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment C B B3 Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment D B B4 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit A B B5 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit B B B6 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit C B B7 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit D B B8 Function Logical operation 6 ON delay time B B9 1 Function Logical operation 6 OFF delay time BA BA 1 Function Logical operation 6 Inversion BB BB Function Logical operation 6 Latch BC BC Function Logical operation 7 Calculation type C C0 Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment A C C1 Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment B C C2 Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment C C C3 Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment D C C4 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit A C C5 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit B C C6 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit C C C7 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit D C C8 Function Logical operation 7 ON delay time C C9 1 Function Logical operation 7 OFF delay time CA CA 1 Function Logical operation 7 Inversion CB CB Function Logical operation 7 Latch CC CC Function Logical operation 8 Calculation type D D0 Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment A D D1 Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment B D D2 Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment C D D3 Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment D D D4 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit A D D5 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit B D D6 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit C D D7 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit D D D8 Function Logical operation 8 ON delay time D D9 1 Function Logical operation 8 OFF delay time DA DA 1 Function Logical operation 8 Inversion DB DB Function Logical operation 8 Latch DC DC Function Logical operation 9 Calculation type E E0 Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment A E E1 Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment B E E2 Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment C E E3 Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment D E E4 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit A E E5 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit B E E6 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit C E E7 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit D E E8 Function Logical operation 9 ON delay time E E9 1 Function Logical operation 9 OFF delay time EA EA 1 Function Logical operation 9 Inversion EB EB Remarks 12-67

296 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Logical operation 9 Latch EC EC Function Logical operation 10 Calculation type F F0 Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment A F F1 Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment B F F2 Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment C F F3 Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment D F F4 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit A F F5 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit B F F6 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit C F F7 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit D F F8 Function Logical operation 10 ON delay time F F9 1 Function Logical operation 10 OFF delay time FA FA 1 Function Logical operation 10 Inversion FB FB Function Logical operation 10 Latch FC FC Function Logical operation 11 Calculation type Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 11 ON delay time Function Logical operation 11 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 11 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 11 Latch C C Function Logical operation 12 Calculation type Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 12 ON delay time Function Logical operation 12 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 12 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 12 Latch C C Function Logical operation 13 Calculation type Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 13 ON delay time Function Logical operation 13 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 13 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 13 Latch C C Function Logical operation 14 Calculation type Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment D Remarks 12-68

297 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 14 ON delay time Function Logical operation 14 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 14 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 14 Latch C C Function Logical operation 15 Calculation type Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 15 ON delay time Function Logical operation 15 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 15 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 15 Latch C C Function Logical operation 16 Calculation type Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment A Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment B Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment C Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment D Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit A Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit B Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit C Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit D Function Logical operation 16 ON delay time Function Logical operation 16 OFF delay time A A 1 Function Logical operation 16 Inversion B B Function Logical operation 16 Latch C C Remarks 12-69

298 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Energy Conservation EEPROM address Folder RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Bank name code Item name point information name Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Energy conservation 1 Energy conservation time D D10 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 1 Energy conservation D D11 delay time Function Energy conservation 1 Master/slave selection D D12 Function Energy conservation 1 Time proportional slave D D14 channel Function Energy conservation 2 Energy conservation time D D18 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 2 Energy conservation D D19 delay time Function Energy conservation 2 Master/slave selection D1A D1A Function Energy conservation 2 Time proportional slave D1C D1C channel Function Energy conservation 3 Energy conservation time D D20 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 3 Energy conservation D D21 delay time Function Energy conservation 3 Master/slave selection D D22 Function Energy conservation 3 Time proportional slave D D24 channel Function Energy conservation 4 Energy conservation time D D28 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 4 Energy conservation D D29 delay time Function Energy conservation 4 Master/slave selection D2A D2A Function Energy conservation 4 Time proportional slave D2C D2C channel Function Energy conservation 5 Energy conservation time D D30 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 5 Energy conservation D D31 delay time Function Energy conservation 5 Master/slave selection D D32 Function Energy conservation 5 Time proportional slave D D34 channel Function Energy conservation 6 Energy conservation time D D38 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 6 Energy conservation D D39 delay time Function Energy conservation 6 Master/slave selection D3A D3A Function Energy conservation 6 Time proportional slave D3C D3C channel Function Energy conservation 7 Energy conservation time D D40 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 7 Energy conservation D D41 delay time Function Energy conservation 7 Master/slave selection D D42 Function Energy conservation 7 Time proportional slave D D44 channel Function Energy conservation 8 Energy conservation time D D48 proportional operation Function Energy conservation 8 Energy conservation D D49 delay time Function Energy conservation 8 Master/slave selection D4A D4A Function Energy conservation 8 Time proportional slave D4C D4C channel Remarks 12-70

299 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/MV Branching Output Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function MV Branching Output 1 Loop assignment E E00 Function MV Branching Output 1 Ratio E E01 2 Function MV Branching Output 1 Bias E E02 2 Function MV Branching Output 2 Loop assignment E E04 Function MV Branching Output 2 Ratio E E05 2 Function MV Branching Output 2 Bias E E06 2 Remarks Function MV Branching Output 3 Loop assignment E E08 NX-D35 not supported Function MV Branching Output 3 Ratio E E09 2 NX-D35 not supported Function MV Branching Output 3 Bias E0A E0A 2 NX-D35 not supported Function MV Branching Output 4 Loop assignment E0C E0C NX-D35 not supported Function MV Branching Output 4 Ratio E0D E0D 2 NX-D35 not supported Function MV Branching Output 4 Bias E0E E0E 2 NX-D35 not supported 12-71

300 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Reception monitoring 1 Address (l) F00 Remarks Function Reception monitoring 1 Address (h) F01 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 1 Time-out (l) F02 Function Reception monitoring 1 Time-out (h) F03 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 1 Mode F04 Function Reception monitoring 2 Address (l) F08 Function Reception monitoring 2 Address (h) F09 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 2 Time-out (l) F0A Function Reception monitoring 2 Time-out (h) F0B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 2 Mode F0C Function Reception monitoring 3 Address (l) F10 Function Reception monitoring 3 Address (h) F11 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 3 Time-out (l) F12 Function Reception monitoring 3 Time-out (h) F13 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 3 Mode F14 Function Reception monitoring 4 Address (l) F18 Function Reception monitoring 4 Address (h) F19 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 4 Time-out (l) F1A Function Reception monitoring 4 Time-out (h) F1B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 4 Mode F1C Function Reception monitoring 5 Address (l) F20 Function Reception monitoring 5 Address (h) F21 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 5 Time-out (l) F22 Function Reception monitoring 5 Time-out (h) F23 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 5 Mode F24 Function Reception monitoring 6 Address (l) F28 Function Reception monitoring 6 Address (h) F29 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 6 Time-out (l) F2A Function Reception monitoring 6 Time-out (h) F2B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 6 Mode F2C 12-72

301 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Function/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Reception monitoring 7 Address (l) F30 Remarks Function Reception monitoring 7 Address (h) F31 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 7 Time-out (l) F32 Function Reception monitoring 7 Time-out (h) F33 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 7 Mode F34 Function Reception monitoring 8 Address (l) F38 Function Reception monitoring 8 Address (h) F39 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 8 Time-out (l) F3A Function Reception monitoring 8 Time-out (h) F3B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 8 Mode F3C Function Reception monitoring 9 Address (l) F40 Function Reception monitoring 9 Address (h) F41 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 9 Time-out (l) F42 Function Reception monitoring 9 Time-out (h) F43 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 9 Mode F44 Function Reception monitoring 10 Address (l) F48 Function Reception monitoring 10 Address (h) F49 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 10 Time-out (l) F4A Function Reception monitoring 10 Time-out (h) F4B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 10 Mode F4C Function Reception monitoring 11 Address (l) F50 Function Reception monitoring 11 Address (h) F51 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 11 Time-out (l) F52 Function Reception monitoring 11 Time-out (h) F53 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 11 Mode F54 Function Reception monitoring 12 Address (l) F58 Function Reception monitoring 12 Address (h) F59 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 12 Time-out (l) F5A Function Reception monitoring 12 Time-out (h) F5B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 12 Mode F5C 12-73

302 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Function Reception monitoring 13 Address (l) F60 Remarks Function Reception monitoring 13 Address (h) F61 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 13 Time-out (l) F62 Function Reception monitoring 13 Time-out (h) F63 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 13 Mode F64 Function Reception monitoring 14 Address (l) F68 Function Reception monitoring 14 Address (h) F69 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 14 Time-out (l) F6A Function Reception monitoring 14 Time-out (h) F6B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 14 Mode F6C Function Reception monitoring 15 Address (l) F70 Function Reception monitoring 15 Address (h) F71 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 15 Time-out (l) F72 Function Reception monitoring 15 Time-out (h) F73 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 15 Mode F74 Function Reception monitoring 16 Address (l) F78 Function Reception monitoring 16 Address (h) F79 When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 16 Time-out (l) F7A Function Reception monitoring 16 Time-out (h) F7B When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 16 Mode F7C 12-74

303 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/UF LED Settings Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other UFLED settings 1 Conditions for lighting B B0 F0 Other UFLED settings 1 Lighting status B B1 F0 Other UFLED settings 2 Conditions for lighting B B4 F1 Other UFLED settings 2 Lighting status B B5 F1 Other UFLED settings 3 Conditions for lighting B B8 F2 Other UFLED settings 3 Lighting status B B9 F2 Other UFLED settings 4 Conditions for lighting BC BC F3 Other UFLED settings 4 Lighting status BD BD F3 Other UFLED settings 5 Conditions for lighting C C0 F4 Other UFLED settings 5 Lighting status C C1 F4 Other UFLED settings 6 Conditions for lighting C C4 F5 Other UFLED settings 6 Lighting status C C5 F5 Other UFLED settings 7 Conditions for lighting C C8 F6 Other UFLED settings 7 Lighting status C C9 F6 Other UFLED settings 8 Conditions for lighting CC CC F7 Other UFLED settings 8 Lighting status CD CD F7 Other UFLED settings 9 Conditions for lighting D D0 F8 Other UFLED settings 9 Lighting status D D1 F8 Other UFLED settings 10 Conditions for lighting D D4 F9 Other UFLED settings 10 Lighting status D D5 F9 Remarks 12-75

304 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/Instrument Information Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM ID A A10 Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM version A A11 Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM version A A12 Other Instrument info. 1 Module interchange A A13 version Version Other Instrument info. 1 Module version (major, minor) A A15 Remarks 12-76

305 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/PV Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F0 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F1 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F2 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F3 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F4 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F5 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F6 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name F F7 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A00 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A01 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A02 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A03 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A04 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A05 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A06 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name A A07 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A10 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A11 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A12 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A13 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A14 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A15 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A16 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name A A17 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A20 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A21 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A22 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A23 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A24 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A25 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A26 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name A A27 Remarks 12-77

306 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/OUT Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A30 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A31 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A32 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A33 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A34 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A35 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A36 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name A A37 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A40 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A41 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A42 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A43 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A44 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A45 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A46 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name A A47 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A50 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A51 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A52 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A53 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A54 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A55 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A56 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name A A57 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A60 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A61 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A62 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A63 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A64 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A65 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A66 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name A A67 Remarks 12-78

307 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/Option Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A70 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A71 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A72 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A73 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A74 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A75 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A76 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name A A77 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A80 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A81 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A82 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A83 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A84 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A85 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A86 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name A A87 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A90 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A91 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A92 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A93 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A94 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A95 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A96 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name A A97 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA0 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA1 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA2 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA3 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA4 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA5 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA6 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name AA AA7 Remarks 12-79

308 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Other/Tag for All Loops Folder name Bank name code Item name EEPROM address RAM address RAM EEPROM Decimal point information Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB0 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB1 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB2 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB3 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB4 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB5 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB6 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name AB AB7 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC0 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC1 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC2 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC3 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC4 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC5 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC6 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name AC AC7 Remarks Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD0 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD1 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD2 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD3 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD4 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD5 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD6 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name AD AD7 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE0 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE1 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE2 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE3 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE4 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE5 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE6 NX-D35 not supported Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name AE AE7 NX-D35 not supported 12-80

309 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bitmap assignment Alarm information Alarm information 1 RAM address: (2830H) EEPROM address: (6830H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : PV1 high limit (Soft failure) AL01 2: PV1 low limit (Soft failure) AL02 3: PV2 high limit (Soft failure) AL03 4: PV2 low limit (Soft failure) AL04 5: PV3 high limit (Soft failure) AL05 6: PV3 low limit (Soft failure) AL06 7: PV4 high limit (Soft failure) AL07 8: PV4 low limit (Soft failure) AL08 9: AD1 fault (Soft failure) AL11 10: AD2 fault (Soft failure) AL12 11: AD3 fault (Soft failure) AL13 12: AD4 fault (Soft failure) AL14 13 to 16: undefined Alarm information 2 RAM address: (2831H) EEPROM address: (6831H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : MFB1 input error (Soft failure) AL21 2: MFB1 adjustment error (Soft failure) AL22 3: MFB2 input error (Soft failure) AL23 4: MFB2 adjustment error (Soft failure) AL24 5: CT1 input error (Soft failure) AL25 6: CT2 input error (Soft failure) AL26 7: CT3 input error (Soft failure) AL27 8: CT4 input error (Soft failure) AL28 9: Reception monitoring (representatives of 1 to 16) (Soft failure) AL31 10: Transmission timeout between modules (Soft failure) AL32 11: RS-485 setting error (Soft failure) AL33 12: Communication setting error between modules (Soft failure) AL34 13 to 15: undefined 16: Adjacent ring disconnection (Soft failure) AL

310 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Alarm information 3 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2832H) (6832H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Base EEPROM read write error (Hard failure) AL87 2: Base EEPROM error (Soft failure) AL88 3: Base/module communication setting mismatch (Soft failure) AL53 4: Base/module communication setting mismatch (Soft failure) AL54 5: Base verification error (Hard failure) AL55 6 to 16: undefined Alarm information 4 RAM address: (2833H) EEPROM address: (6833H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : CJ1 error (Soft failure) AL71 2: CJ2 error (Soft failure) AL72 3: CJ3 error (Soft failure) AL73 4: CJ4 error (Soft failure) AL74 5: undefined 6: undefined 7: EEPROM not initialized (Hard failure) AL83 8: MAC address error (Hard failure) AL84 9: RAM read write error (Hard failure) AL85 10: EEPROM read write error (Hard failure) AL86 11: RAM error (parameter data) (Soft failure) AL94 12: RAM error (adjustment data) (Soft failure) AL95 13: undefined 14: EEPROM error (parameter data) (Soft failure) AL97 15: EEPROM error (adjustment data) (Soft failure) AL98 16: ROM error (Hard failure) AL

311 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Instrument internal computation result Internal computation result 1 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2970H) (6970H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Internal event status 1 EV01 2: Internal event status 2 EV02 3: Internal event status 3 EV03 4: Internal event status 4 EV04 5: Internal event status 5 EV05 6: Internal event status 6 EV06 7: Internal event status 7 EV07 8: Internal event status 8 EV08 9: Internal event status 9 EV09 10: Internal event status 10 EV10 11: Internal event status 11 EV11 12: Internal event status 12 EV12 13: Internal event status 13 EV13 14: Internal event status 14 EV14 15: Internal event status 15 EV15 16: Internal event status 16 EV16 Internal computation result 2 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2971H) (6971H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Internal event status 17 EV17 2: Internal event status 18 EV18 3: Internal event status 19 EV19 4: Internal event status 20 EV20 5: Internal event status 21 EV21 6: Internal event status 22 EV22 7: Internal event status 23 EV23 8: Internal event status 24 EV24 9 to 16: undefined 12-83

312 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Internal computation result 3 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2972H) (6972H) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Heater burnout detection CT1 2: Heater burnout detection CT2 3: Heater burnout detection CT3 4: Heater burnout detection CT4 5: Overcurrent detection CT1 6: Overcurrent detection CT2 7: Overcurrent detection CT3 8: Overcurrent detection CT4 9: Short-circuit detection CT1 10: Short-circuit detection CT2 11: Short-circuit detection CT3 12: Short-circuit detection CT4 13 to 16: undefined LSB Internal computation result 5 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2974H) (6974H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Terminal status DI1 2: Terminal status DI2 3: Terminal status DI3 4: Terminal status DI4 5 to 16: undefined Internal computation result 13 RAM address: EEPROM address: (297CH) (697CH) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Terminal status OUT1 2: Terminal status OUT2 3: Terminal status OUT3 4: Terminal status OUT4 5: Terminal status DO1 6: Terminal status DO2 7: Terminal status DO3 8: Terminal status DO4 9 to 16: undefined 12-84

313 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Internal computation result 21 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2984H) (6984H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Results of logical operation 1 2: Results of logical operation 2 3: Results of logical operation 3 4: Results of logical operation 4 5: Results of logical operation 5 6: Results of logical operation 6 7: Results of logical operation 7 8: Results of logical operation 8 9: Results of logical operation 9 10: Results of logical operation 10 11: Results of logical operation 11 12: Results of logical operation 12 13: Results of logical operation 13 14: Results of logical operation 14 15: Results of logical operation 15 16: Results of logical operation 16 Internal computation result 42 (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] or later) RAM address: (2999H) EEPROM address: (6999H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : MFB1 G line break 2: MFB2 G line break 3: undefined 4: undefined 5: MFB1 Y line break 6: MFB2 Y line break 7: undefined 8: undefined 9: MFB1 T/multiline break 10: MFB2 T/multiline break 11: undefined 12: undefined 13: MFB1 input error (AL21) 14: MFB2 input error (AL23) 15: undefined 16: undefined 12-85

314 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Internal computation result 43 (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] or later) RAM address: (299AH) EEPROM address: (699AH) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : MFB1 is under adjustment 2: MFB2 is under adjustment 3: undefined 4: undefined 5: MFB1 estimation in progress 6: MFB2 estimation in progress 7: undefined 8: undefined 9: undefined 10: undefined 11: undefined 12: undefined 13: MFB1 adjustment error (AL22) 14: MFB2 adjustment error (AL24) 15: undefined 16: undefined Internal computation result 44 (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] or later) RAM address: (299BH) EEPROM address: (699BH) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : MFB1 OPEN 2: MFB2 OPEN 3: undefined 4: undefined 5: MFB1 CLOSE 6: MFB2 CLOSE 7: undefined 8: undefined 9: undefined 10: undefined 11: undefined 12: undefined 13: undefined 14: undefined 15: undefined 16: undefined 12-86

315 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Internal computation result 54 (ROM version 3.00 [1_0_3] or later) RAM address: (29A5H) EEPROM address: (69A5H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : undefined 2: undefined 3: Adjacent ring disconnection (AL38) 4: Non-adjacent ring disconnection 5: undefined 6: undefined 7: undefined 8: undefined 9: undefined 10: undefined 11: undefined 12: undefined 13: undefined 14: undefined 15: undefined 16: undefined Internal computation result 55 RAM address: EEPROM address: (29A6H) (69A6H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : Results of reception monitoring 1 2: Results of reception monitoring 2 3: Results of reception monitoring 3 4: Results of reception monitoring 4 5: Results of reception monitoring 5 6: Results of reception monitoring 6 7: Results of reception monitoring 7 8: Results of reception monitoring 8 9: Results of reception monitoring 9 10: Results of reception monitoring 10 11: Results of reception monitoring 11 12: Results of reception monitoring 12 13: Results of reception monitoring 13 14: Results of reception monitoring 14 15: Results of reception monitoring 15 16: Results of reception monitoring

316 Chapter 12. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA User-defined bit User-defined bits 1 to 16 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2760H) (6760H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : User-defined bit 1 2: User-defined bit 2 3: User-defined bit 3 4: User-defined bit 4 5: User-defined bit 5 6: User-defined bit 6 7: User-defined bit 7 8: User-defined bit 8 9: User-defined bit 9 10: User-defined bit 10 11: User-defined bit 11 12: User-defined bit 12 13: User-defined bit 13 14: User-defined bit 14 15: User-defined bit 15 16: User-defined bit 16 User-defined bits 17 to 32 RAM address: EEPROM address: (2771H) (6771H) LSB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b : User-defined bit 17 2: User-defined bit 18 3: User-defined bit 19 4: User-defined bit 20 5: User-defined bit 21 6: User-defined bit 22 7: User-defined bit 23 8: User-defined bit 24 9: User-defined bit 25 10: User-defined bit 26 11: User-defined bit 27 12: User-defined bit 28 13: User-defined bit 29 14: User-defined bit 30 15: User-defined bit 31 16: User-defined bit

317 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Comments on the table Monitor/Communications Profile Monitor/Loop Mode Monitor/Monitor Monitor/Remaining Delay Time Monitor/Computation Result Monitor/User-defined Bit Monitor/User-defined Number Bit/ Bit Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Communications/Ethernet Communications Communications/RS-485 Communications Basic/Setup Basic/Loop (Input) Basic/Loop Basic/Loop Output Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Basic/Loop Output (Cascade) Basic/Position Proportioning Basic/Position Proportioning Adjustment Input-output/PV Input Input-output/Continuous Output Input-output / OUT/DO Output Input-output/Zener Barrier Adjustment Input-output/CT Input SP/SP Group Selection SP/LSP SP/RSP SP/SP Configuration Event/Event Settings (Operating Points) Event/Event Configuration PID/PID Function/Linearization Table Function/Internal Contact IN Function/Logical Operation Function/Energy Conservation Function/MV Branching Output Function/Reception Monitoring Function/UFLED Settings Other/Instrument Information Other/PV Tag Name Other/OUT Tag Name Other/Option Tag Name Other/Tag for All Loops

318 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Comments on the table Meaning of user levels 0 : Displayed in simple, standard or multiple functions 1 : Displayed in standard or multiple functions 2 : Displayed in multiple functions NX-D15, NX-D25, NX-D35 No symbol : Supported : Not supported Meaning of the decimal point position in the Remarks field PID_PV: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the loop (basic) bank (loop PV/SV decimal point position). PV: Determined by the settings for PV1 to 4 in the PV input bank (decimal point position). RAMP: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the SP configuration bank (SP ramp unit). OUT: Determined by the settings for outputs 1 to 4 in the continuous output bank (output decimal point position). EV: Determined by the settings for event Nos. 1 to 24 in the event configuration bank (decimal point position). PID: Determined by the settings for loops 1 to 4 in the loop (extended) bank (integral time/derivative time decimal point position). TBL: Determined by the settings for Linearizations 1 through 8 in the Linearization table bank ("breakpoint decimal point position"). 13-2

319 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Communications Profile Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 SP Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 1 MV % 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 SP Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 2 MV % 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 SP Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 3 MV % 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 SP Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (device ) 4 MV % 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 LSP SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 Manual MV to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (operation) 1 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 LSP SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 Manual MV to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (operation) 2 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 LSP SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 Manual MV to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (operation) 3 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 LSP SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 Manual MV to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 AT cancel/execute 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 * Monitor Comm. (operation) 4 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 * The communication profile item "AT cancel/execute" is the same as "AT stop/start". 13-3

320 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Communications Profile Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current derivative time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current manual to % 50.0 % 0 reset Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current output low limit to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current output high to % % 0 limit Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 0 Decimal point position for cooling 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current derivative time for cooling 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current MV to % 0.0 % 0 low limit for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 1 Current MV high limit for cooling to % % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current derivative time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current manual to % 50.0 % 0 reset Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current output low limit to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current output high to % % 0 limit Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 0 Decimal point position for cooling 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current derivative time for cooling 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current MV to % 0.0 % 0 low limit for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 2 Current MV high limit for cooling to % % 0 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

321 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Communications Profile Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current derivative time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current manual to % 50.0 % 0 reset Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current output low limit to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current output high to % % 0 limit Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 0 Decimal point position for cooling 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current derivative time for cooling 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current MV low limit to % 0.0 % 0 for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 3 Current MV high limit for cooling to % % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current proportional 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current integral time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current derivative time 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current manual to % 50.0 % 0 reset Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current output low limit to % 0.0 % 0 Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current output high to % % 0 limit Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV 0.1 to % 5.0 % 0 Proportional band Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 0 Decimal point position Integral time 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 30 s 0 Decimal point position Derivative time 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV to % 0.0 % 0 low limit for cooling Monitor Comm. (current PID) 4 Current MV high limit for cooling to % %

322 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Loop Mode Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Monitor Loop mode 1 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 1 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 1 AT stop/start 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 1 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 2 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 2 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 2 AT stop/start 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 2 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Monitor Loop mode 3 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 3 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 3 AT stop/start 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 3 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 4 RUN/READY 0: RUN 1: READY 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 4 AUTO/MANUAL 0: AUTO 1: MANUAL 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 4 AT stop/start 0: AT stop 1: AT start 0 0 Monitor Loop mode 4 LSP/RSP 0: LSP 1: RSP

323 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Monitor Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information 1 0 See Alarm information 1 (page 12-81) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information 2 0 See Alarm information 2 (page 12-81) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information 3 0 See Alarm information 3 (page 12-82) Monitor Alarm 1 Alarm information 4 0 See Alarm information 4 (page 12-82) Monitor Basic 1 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 1 SP 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 1 MV 0 Monitor Basic 1 Heat MV 0 Monitor Basic 1 Cool MV 0 Monitor Basic 1 AT progress 0: Stopped 1 to 8: AT progress 0 number Monitor Basic 1 SP group selection 0 Monitor Basic 1 PID group selection 0 Monitor Basic 1 PV (input channel) 0 Decimal point position = PV Monitor Basic 2 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 2 SP 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 2 MV 0 Monitor Basic 2 Heat MV 0 Monitor Basic 2 Cool MV 0 Monitor Basic 2 AT progress 0: Stopped 1 to 8: AT progress 0 number Monitor Basic 2 SP group selection 0 Monitor Basic 2 PID group selection 0 Monitor Basic 2 PV (input channel) 0 Decimal point position = PV Monitor Basic 3 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 3 SP 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 3 MV 0 Monitor Basic 3 Heat MV 0 Monitor Basic 3 Cool MV 0 Monitor Basic 3 AT progress 0: Stopped 1 to 8: AT progress 0 number Monitor Basic 3 SP group selection 0 Monitor Basic 3 PID group selection 0 Monitor Basic 3 PV (input channel) 0 Decimal point position = PV Monitor Basic 4 PV (loop) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 4 SP 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV Monitor Basic 4 MV 0 Monitor Basic 4 Heat MV 0 Monitor Basic 4 Cool MV 0 Monitor Basic 4 AT progress 0: Stopped 1 to 8: AT progress 0 number Monitor Basic 4 SP group selection 0 Monitor Basic 4 PID group selection 0 Monitor Basic 4 PV (input channel) 0 Decimal point position = PV Monitor MFB 1 MFB opening % 0 Monitor MFB 2 MFB opening %

324 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Monitor Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Monitor Monitor (CT) 1 CT1 measured current A 0 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 1 CT1 measured current A 0 when output OFF Monitor Monitor (CT) 2 CT2 measured current A 0 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 2 CT2 measured current A 0 when output OFF Monitor Monitor (CT) 3 CT3 measured current A 0 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 3 CT3 measured current A 0 when output OFF Monitor Monitor (CT) 4 CT4 measured current A 0 when output ON Monitor Monitor (CT) 4 CT4 measured current A 0 when output OFF Monitor AO percent 1 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 2 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 3 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 4 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 5 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 6 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 7 AO percent data % 0 Monitor AO percent 8 AO percent data % 0 Monitor OUT/DO terminal 1 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 2 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 3 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 4 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 5 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 6 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 7 OUT/DO terminal, 0 ON/OFF data Monitor OUT/DO terminal 8 OUT/DO terminal, ON/OFF data 0 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

325 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Remaining Delay Time Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Monitor Remaining delay time 1 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 2 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 3 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 4 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 5 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 6 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 7 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 8 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 9 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 10 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 11 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 12 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 13 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 14 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 15 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 16 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 17 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 18 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 19 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 20 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 21 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 22 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 23 Remaining delay time Monitor Remaining delay time 24 Remaining delay time Initial value Unit Display Level s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

326 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/Computation Result Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 1 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 2 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 3 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 5 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 13 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 21 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 42 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 43 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 44 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 54 (bitmap) Monitor Computation result 1 Instrument internal computation result 55 (bitmap) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 See Instrument internal computation result 1 (page 12-83) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 2 (page 12-83) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 3 (page 12-84) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 5 (page 12-84) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 13 (page 12-84) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 21 (page 12-85) 0 Internal computation result 42 (See P ) 0 Internal computation result 43 (See P ) 0 Internal computation result 44 (See P ) 0 Internal computation result 54 (See P ) 0 See Instrument internal computation result 55 (page 12-87) NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

327 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/User-defined Bit Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 1 to User-defined bit 1 to 16 (See P ) Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 1 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 2 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 3 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 4 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 5 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 6 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 7 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 8 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 9 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 10 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 11 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 12 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 13 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 14 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 15 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 16 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 17 to User-defined bit 17 to 32 (See P ) Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 17 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 18 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 19 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 20 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 21 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 22 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 23 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 24 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 25 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 26 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 27 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 28 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 29 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 30 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 31 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 Monitor User-defined bit 1 User-defined bit 32 0: OFF 1: ON 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

328 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Monitor/User-defined Number Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 1 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 2 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 3 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 4 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 5 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 6 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 7 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 8 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 9 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 10 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 11 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 12 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 13 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 14 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 15 Monitor User-defined number 1 User-defined number 16 Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Single-precision floating-point range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

329 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Bit/ Bit Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1024 to 1151) (1152 to 1279) Initial value Unit 1 Always 0 (Off) 0 1 Always 1 (On) 0 1 Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event 24 0 Display Level 1 CT1 heater line break detection 0 1 CT2 heater line 0 break detection 1 CT3 heater line 0 break detection 1 CT4 heater line 0 break detection 1 CT1 overcurrent 0 detection 1 CT2 overcurrent 0 detection 1 CT3 overcurrent 0 detection 1 CT4 overcurrent 0 detection 1 CT1 short-circuit 0 detection 1 CT2 short-circuit 0 detection 1 CT3 short-circuit 0 detection 1 CT4 short-circuit 0 detection 1 DI1 terminal status 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

330 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Bit/ Bit Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range (1152 to 1279) (1152 to 1279) (1152 to 1279) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1280 to 1407) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) Initial value Unit 1 DI2 terminal status 0 1 DI3 terminal status 0 1 DI4 terminal status 0 Display Level 1 OUT1 terminal status 0 1 OUT2 terminal 0 status 1 OUT3 terminal 0 status 1 OUT4 terminal 0 status 1 DO1 terminal status 0 1 DO2 terminal status 0 1 DO3 terminal status 0 1 DO4 terminal status 0 1 User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit 28 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

331 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Bit/ Bit Folder name bit bit bit bit Bank name code Item name Setting range (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1408 to 1535) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) Initial value Unit 1 User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit User-defined bit Results of logical operation 1 1 Results of logical operation 2 1 Results of logical operation 3 1 Results of logical operation 4 1 Results of logical operation 5 1 Results of logical operation 6 1 Results of logical operation 7 1 Results of logical operation 8 1 Results of logical operation 9 1 Results of logical operation 10 1 Results of logical operation 11 1 Results of logical operation 12 1 Results of logical operation 13 1 Results of logical operation 14 1 Results of logical operation 15 1 Results of logical operation 16 1 RS-485 status (normal transmission of 1 frame) 1 Loop 1 RUN/READY mode 1 Loop 2 RUN/READY mode 1 Loop 3 RUN/READY mode 1 Loop 4 RUN/READY mode 1 Loop 1 AUTO/MANUAL status 1 Loop 2 AUTO/MANUAL status 1 Loop 3 AUTO/MANUAL status 1 Loop 4 AUTO/MANUAL status 1 Loop 1 AT stop/start status 1 Loop 2 AT stop/start status 1 Loop 3 AT stop/start status 1 Loop 4 AT stop/start status 1 Loop 1 RSP status 1 Loop 2 RSP status 1 Loop 3 RSP status 1 Loop 4 RSP status 1 Loop 1 SP ramp-up in progress 1 Loop 2 SP ramp-up in progress Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

332 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Bit/ Bit Folder name bit bit bit bit bit Bank name code Item name Setting range (1536 to 1663) (1536 to 1663) (1664 to 1791) (1664 to 1791) (1664 to 1791) (1664 to 1791) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 Loop 3 SP ramp-up in progress 0 1 Loop 4 SP 0 ramp-up in progress 1 Loop 1 SP 0 ramp-down in progress 1 Loop 2 SP 0 ramp-down in progress 1 Loop 3 SP 0 ramp-down in progress 1 Loop 4 SP 0 ramp-down in progress 1 All typical alarms 0 (logical OR of all alarms be displayed) 1 AD1 fault (AL11) 0 1 AD2 fault (AL12) 0 1 AD3 fault (AL13) 0 1 AD4 fault (AL14) 0 1 PV1 high limit error (AL01) 0 1 PV2 high limit error 0 (AL03) 1 PV3 high limit error 0 (AL05) 1 PV4 high limit error 0 (AL07) 1 PV1 low limit error 0 (AL02) 1 PV2 low limit error 0 (AL04) 1 PV3 low limit error 0 (AL06) 1 PV4 low limit error 0 (AL08) 1 CJ1 error (AL71) 0 1 CJ2 error (AL72) 0 1 CJ3 error (AL73) 0 1 CJ4 error (AL74) 0 1 MFB1 G line break 0 1 MFB2 G line break 0 1 MFB1 Y line break 0 1 MFB2 Y line break 0 1 MFB1 T/multiline break 0 1 MFB2 T/multiline 0 break 1 MFB1 input error 0 (AL21) 1 MFB2 input error 0 (AL23) 1 MFB1 is under 0 adjustment 1 MFB2 is under 0 adjustment 1 MFB1 estimation in 0 progress 1 MFB2 estimation in 0 progress 1 MFB1 adjustment 0 error (AL22) 1 MFB2 adjustment 0 error (AL24) 1 MFB1 OPEN 0 1 MFB2 OPEN 0

333 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Bit/ Bit Folder name bit Bank name code Item name Setting range (1792 to 1919) (1792 to 1919) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) (1920 to 2047) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 MFB1 CLOSE 0 1 MFB2 CLOSE 0 1 Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring Reception monitoring CT1 input error 0 (AL25) 1 CT2 input error 0 (AL26) 1 CT3 input error 0 (AL27) 1 CT4 input error 0 (AL28) 1 Parameter error 0 (AL94/AL97) 1 Adjustment data 0 error (AL95/AL98) 1 EEPROM not initialized 0 (AL83) 1 ROM error (AL99) 0 1 RAM read/write error (AL85) 0 1 EEPROM read/write 0 error (AL86) 1 Reception monitors (AL31) 1 Transmission time-out 0 between modules (AL32) 1 Writing to EEPROM 0 1 Supervisor module transmission timeout 1 RS-485 setting error (AL33) 1 Adjacent ring disconnection (AL38) 1 Non-adjacent ring disconnection 1 Base/module communication setting mismatch (AL53) 1 Base-body model No. mismatch (AL 54) 1 Base verification error (AL55)

334 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name Setting range numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2048 to 2175) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2176 to 2303) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) Initial value Unit 1 Always User-defined number 1 1 User-defined number 2 1 User-defined number 3 1 User-defined number 4 1 User-defined number 5 1 User-defined number 6 1 User-defined number 7 1 User-defined number 8 1 User-defined number 9 1 User-defined number 10 1 User-defined number 11 1 User-defined number 12 1 User-defined number 13 1 User-defined number 14 1 User-defined number 15 1 User-defined number 16 Display Level PID MV1 0.0 % 0 1 PID MV2 0.0 % 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 PID MV3 0.0 % 0 1 PID MV4 0.0 % 0 1 PV1 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 PV2 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 PV3 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 PV4 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 AI1 0 Decimal point position = PV 13-18

335 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name Setting range numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2304 to 2431) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 1 AI2 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 AI3 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 AI4 0 Decimal point position = PV 1 Loop 1 PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 Loop 2 PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 Loop 3 PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 Loop 4 PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 1 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 2 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor 3 1 Zener barrier adjustment monitor Loop 1 SP (in use) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 Loop 2 SP (in use) 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 Loop 3 SP (in use) 0 1 Loop 4 SP (in use) 0 1 Loop 1 SP (final value) 1 Loop 2 SP (final value) 1 Loop 3 SP (final value) 1 Loop 4 SP (final value) 1 SP output of loop 0 1 SP output of loop 0 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 1 SP output of loop 0 1 SP output of loop 0 1 Loop 1 MV 0.0 % 0 1 MV of loop % 0 1 MV of loop %

336 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name Setting range numerical code (2304 to 2431) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 MV of loop % 0 1 Loop 1 MV for heating 0.0 % 0 1 Loop 2 heat MV 0.0 % 0 1 2: Loop 3 heat MV 0.0 % 0 1 2: Loop 4 heat MV 0.0 % 0 1 Loop 1 MV for cooling 0.0 % 0 1 3: Loop 2 cool MV 0.0 % 0 1 3: Loop 3 cool MV 0.0 % 0 1 3: Loop 4 cool MV 0.0 % 0 1 MFB1 amount of opening (estimated) 1 MFB2 amount of opening (estimated) 1 MFB1 degree of opening (actual value) 1 MFB2 degree of opening (actual value) 1 CT1 measured current when output ON 1 CT2 measured current when output ON 1 CT3 measured current when output ON 1 CT4 measured current when output ON 1 CT1 measured current when output OFF 1 CT2 measured current when output OFF 1 CT3 measured current when output OFF 1 CT4 measured current when output OFF - % 0 - % 0 - % 0 - % A A A A A A A A

337 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name Setting range numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2432 to 2559) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) 1 Loop 1 deviation (PV - SP) 1 Loop 2 deviation (PV - SP) 1 Loop 3 deviation (PV - SP) 1 Loop 4 deviation (PV - SP) 1 Event 1 timer remaining time 1 Event 2 timer remaining time 1 Event 3 timer remaining time 1 Event 4 timer remaining time 1 Event 5 timer remaining time 1 Event 6 timer remaining time 1 Event 7 timer remaining time 1 Event 8 timer remaining time 1 Event 9 timer remaining time 1 Event 10 timer remaining time 1 Event 11 timer remaining time 1 Event 12 timer remaining time 1 Event 13 timer remaining time 1 Event 14 timer remaining time 1 Event 15 timer remaining time 1 Event 16 timer remaining time 1 Event 17 timer remaining time 1 Event 18 timer remaining time 1 Event 19 timer remaining time 1 Event 20 timer remaining time 1 Event 21 timer remaining time 1 Event 22 timer remaining time Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

338 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Numerical Code/ Numerical Code Folder name numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code numerical code Bank name code Item name Setting range numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2560 to 2687) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) numerical code (2688 to 2815) 1 Event 23 timer remaining time 1 Event 24 timer remaining time 1 MV for position proportioning 1 1 MV for position proportioning 2 1 CT1 Time proportioning current 1 CT2 Time proportioning current 1 CT3 Time proportioning current 1 CT4 Time proportioning current Initial value Unit Display Level s 0 s 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D % % A A A A

339 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Communications/Ethernet Communications Folder name Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 1 0 to Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 2 0 to Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 3 0 to Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 4 0 to Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 5 0 to Ethernet communications 1 MAC address 6 0 to Unit Display Level Remarks Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address 1 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address 2 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address 3 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address 4 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address net mask 1 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address net mask 2 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address net mask 3 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 address net mask 4 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 default gateway 1 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 default gateway 2 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 default gateway 3 Ethernet communications 1 IPv4 default gateway 4 Ethernet communications 1 CPL/TCP port number Ethernet communications 1 MODBUS/TCP port number 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to 501 and 503 to 1023 are generally used at times. Avoid using them as much as possible. Do not use the same value as the MODBUS/ TCP port number. 0 to Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 0 to 501 and 503 to 1023 are generally used at times. Avoid using them as much as possible. Do not use the same value as the CPL/TCP port number. NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

340 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Communications/RS-485 Communications Folder name Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Communications Bank name code Item name Setting range RS-485 communication 1 Communications type RS-485 communication 1 Station address setting RS-485 communication 1 Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 1: 9600 bps 2: bps 3: bps 4: bps 5: bps Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0: CPL 1: MODBUS/ACSII 2: MODBUS/RTU to : Communication function disabled 2 0 RS-485 communication 1 Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits 1 0 RS-485 communication 1 Data format (parity) 0: Even parity 0 0 1: Odd parity 2: No parity RS-485 communication 1 Data format 0: 1 stop bit 0 0 Stop bits 1: 2 stop bit RS-485 communication 1 Minimum response 1 to 250 ms 3 ms 0 time NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

341 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Setup Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Basic Setup 1 SP system group 1 to Basic Setup 1 Start delay at power 0 to 60 s 2 s 1 ON Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 1 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 2 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 3 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 4 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 5 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 6 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 7 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 8 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 9 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 10 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 11 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 12 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 13 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 14 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 15 Basic Setup 1 Advanced function 0 to password 16 Basic Setup 1 Loop type 0: 1 loops 1: 2 loops 2: 1 loops * 1 Changes in settings take effect after powering off and back on 5: 2 loops (1 loop with RSP) 8: 2 loops (RSP) + MV branching output 9: 2 loops 21: 3 loops 22: 4 loops 23: 3 loops + MV branching output 24: 4 loops + MV branching output 26: 4 loops (RSP) + MV branching output 27: 1 loop (internal cascade) 28: 1 loop (internal cascade with RSP) + +2 loop 29: loop (internal cascade) Basic Setup 1 Release all latches 0: Continue latch 1: Release 0 1 * NX-D15/25=22 NX-D35=1 latch NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

342 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop (Input) Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned PV 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned RSP 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 1 Assigned AI For the NX-D15 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI4 For the NX-D25/35 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned PV 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned RSP 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 2 Assigned AI For the NX-D15 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI4 For the NX-D25/35 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned PV 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned RSP 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 3 Assigned AI For the NX-D15 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI4 For the NX-D25/35 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned PV 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical code Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned RSP 0: Default 1: PV1 2: PV2 3: PV3 4: PV to 3071: numerical codes Basic Input assignment 4 Assigned AI For the NX-D15 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI4 For the NX-D25/35 0: Default 1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3 4: AI to 3071: numerical code Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

343 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Folder name Initial value 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Bank name code Item name Setting range Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Loop PV/SP decimal point position Unit Display Level 1 1 Remarks Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) 0 0 Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Control algorithm For NX-D15 0: PID-A 0 1 For NX-D25/35 0: PID-A 2: PID-B Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Range low limit for proportional band to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Range high limit for proportional band to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 1 AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) 0 1 Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Heating/Cooling to % 0.0 % 1 control dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 1 Initial output of PID control to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Loop PV/SP decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point 1 1 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) 0 0 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Control algorithm For NX-D15 0: PID-A 0 1 For NX-D25/35 0: PID-A 2: PID-B Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Range low limit for proportional band to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Range high limit for proportional band to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 2 AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) 0 0 Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Heating/Cooling to % 0.0 % 1 control dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 2 Initial output of PID control to % 0.0 % 1 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

344 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Loop PV/SP decimal 0: No decimal point 1 1 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 0 0 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Control algorithm For NX-D15 0: PID-A 0 1 For NX-D25 0: PID-A 2: PID-B Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Range low limit for to U Decimal point position proportional band = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Range high limit for to U Decimal point position proportional band = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 3 AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) 0 0 Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Heating/Cooling to % 0.0 % 1 control dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 3 Initial output of PID to % 0.0 % 1 control Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Loop PV/SP decimal 0: No decimal point 1 1 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Control action 0: Reverse action (heating) 0 0 1: Direct action (cooling) 2: Heat/Cool 4: Reverse action (ON/OFF) 5: Direct action (ON/OFF) Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Control algorithm For NX-D15 0: PID-A For NX-D25 0: PID-A 2: PID-B 0 1 Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Range low limit for to U Decimal point position proportional band = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Range high limit for to U Decimal point position proportional band = PID_PV Basic Loop control (basic) 4 AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1: Fast (response to disturbance) 2: Stable (minimal up/down PV fluctuation) 0 0 Basic Loop (basic) 4 Heating/Cooling to % 0.0 % 1 control dead zone Basic Loop control (basic) 4 Initial output of PID control to % 0.0 %

345 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Folder name Initial value 0: Automatic 1: No initialization 2: With initialization (when an SP differing from the current Bank name code Item name Setting range Basic Loop (extended) 1 PID control initialization Basic Loop (extended) 1 Integration time/ derivative time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 1 Output operation at changing Auto/ Manual Basic Loop (extended) 1 Preset MANUAL value one is input) 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 0: Bumpless 1: Preset Unit Display Level to % 0.0 % 0 Remarks Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV increase change limit 0.00: No limit 0.01 to %/s 0.00 %/s 0 Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV decrease change 0.00: No limit 0.00 %/s 0 limit 0.01 to %/s Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV low limit during to % 0.0 % 1 AT Basic Loop (extended) 1 MV high limit during AT to % % 1 Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone action selection 0: Not used 1: Select when SP 0 1 2: Select when PV Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 1 Zone hysteresis to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 2 PID control initialization 0 0 Basic Loop (extended) 2 Integration time/ derivative time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 2 Output operation at changing Auto/ Manual Basic Loop (extended) 2 Preset MANUAL value 0: Automatic 1: No initialization 2: With initialization (when an SP differing from the current one is input) 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 0: Bumpless 1: Preset to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV increase change limit 0.00: No limit 0.01 to %/s 0.00 %/s 0 Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV decrease change 0.00: No limit 0.00 %/s 0 limit 0.01 to %/s Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV low limit during to % 0.0 % 1 AT Basic Loop (extended) 2 MV high limit during AT to % % 1 Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone action selection 0: Disabled 1: Select when SP 0 1 2: Select when PV Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 2 Zone hysteresis to U Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

346 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Basic Loop (extended) 3 PID control initialization Basic Loop (extended) 3 Integration time/ derivative time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 3 Output operation at changing Auto/ Manual Basic Loop (extended) 3 Preset MANUAL value Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV increase change limit Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV decrease change limit Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV low limit during AT Basic Loop (extended) 3 MV high limit during AT Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone action selection 0: Automatic 1: No initialization 2: With initialization (when an SP differing from the current one is input) 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D : Bumpless 1: Preset to % 0.0 % : No limit 0.01 to %/s 0.00 %/s : No limit 0.00 %/s to %/s to % 0.0 % to % % 1 0: Disabled 1: Select when SP 2: Select when PV 0 1 Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 3 Zone hysteresis to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 4 PID control initialization 0: Automatic 1: No initialization 2: With initialization (when an SP differing from the current one is input) 0 0 Basic Loop (extended) 4 Integration time/ derivative time decimal point positio Basic Loop (extended) 4 Output operation at changing Auto/ Manual Basic Loop (extended) 4 Preset MANUAL value Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV increase change limit Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV decrease change limit Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV low limit during AT Basic Loop (extended) 4 MV high limit during AT Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone action selection 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 0 1 0: Bumpless 1: Preset to % 0.0 % : No limit 0.01 to %/s 0.00 %/s : No limit 0.00 %/s to %/s to % 0.0 % to % % 1 0: Not used 1: Select when SP 2: Select when PV 0 1 Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone to U Decimal point position = PID_PV Basic Loop (extended) 4 Zone hysteresis to U Decimal point position = PID_PV 13-30

347 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 Just-FiTTER settling 0.00 to band Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 Just-FiTTER overshoot 0 to suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 1 SP lag factor 0.0 to Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 Just-FiTTER settling 0.00 to band Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 Just-FiTTER overshoot 0 to suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 2 SP lag factor 0.0 to Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 Just-FiTTER settling 0.00 to band Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 Just-FiTTER overshoot 0 to suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 3 SP lag factor 0.0 to Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to proportional band Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to integral time Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 AT adjustment factor, 0.00 to derivative time Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 Just-FiTTER settling 0.00 to band Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 Just-FiTTER overshoot 0 to suppression factor Basic Loop (algorithm) 4 SP lag factor 0.0 to

348 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Output Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 1 (Heat) Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at READY (Cool) to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Selection of MV if PV 0: Continue control operation 0 0 is abnormal 1: Output MV if PV is abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Output at PV error to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 1 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 1 (Heat) Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at READY (Cool) to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Selection of MV if PV 0: Continue control operation 0 0 is abnormal 1: Output MV if PV is abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Output at PV error to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 2 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 1 (Heat) Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at READY (Cool) to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Selection of MV if PV 0: Continue control operation 0 0 is abnormal 1: Output MV if PV is abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Output at PV error to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 3 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY to % 0.0 % 1 (Heat) Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at READY (Cool) to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Selection of MV if PV 0: Continue control operation 0 0 is abnormal 1: Output MV if PV is abnormal Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Output at PV error to % 0.0 % 0 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 % 1 Basic Loop output (MV) 4 Fixed value output to % 0.0 %

349 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 1 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 2 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

350 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Basic IDLE/SV com error op 3 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 4 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 5 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output type 0: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 0 2 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

351 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/IDLE/SV com error op Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 6 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 7 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 0 2 1: ON Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output type 0: Preset (operation during 0 2 IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 1: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 2: Preset (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) 3: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Preset (communication error operation) 4: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Through (communication error operation) 5: Bumpless (operation during IDLE)/ Bumpless (communication error operation) Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output (%) to % 0 % 2 Basic IDLE/SV com error op 8 Output (ON/OFF) 0: OFF 1: ON 0 2 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

352 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Loop Output (Cascade) Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 SP scaling method Fixed at SP-based PV-based Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 Output scaling low to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 Output scaling high to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 1 SP output filter 0.0 to s 0.0 s 2 Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 SP scaling method Fixed at SP-based PV-based Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 Output scaling low to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 Output scaling high to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 2 SP output filter 0.0 to s 0.0 s 2 Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 SP scaling method Fixed at SP-based PV-based Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 Output scaling low to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 Output scaling high to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 3 SP output filter 0.0 to s 0.0 s 2 Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 SP scaling method Fixed at SP-based PV-based Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 Output scaling low to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 Output scaling high to limit Basic Loop output (cascade) 4 SP output filter 0.0 to s 0.0 s 2 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

353 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Position Proportioning Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Basic Position proportioning 1 Output type 0: Stop time proportional control 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7 to 2047: undefined 2048 to 071: depending the standard numerical code Basic Position proportioning 1 Control method selection 0: MFB control + estimated position control 1: 1MFB control + close upon line break 2: Estimated position control 3: Estimated position control + position adjustment at power-on Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D Basic Position proportioning 1 Dead zone 0.5 to 25.0 % 10 % 0 Basic Position proportioning 1 Long life 0: Control oriented 0 0 1: Service life oriented Basic Position proportioning 1 Loop assignment 1: Loop : Loop 2 Basic Position proportioning 1 Linearization table 0: Disabled 0 1 group definition 1 to 8: Group number Basic Position proportioning 2 Output type 0: Stop time proportional 0 0 control 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7 to 2047: undefined 2048 to 071: depending the standard numerical code Basic Position proportioning 2 Control method 0: MFB control + estimated 0 0 selection position control 1: 1MFB control + close upon line break 2: Estimated position control 3: Estimated position control + position adjustment at power-on Basic Position proportioning 2 Dead zone 0.5 to 25.0 % 10 % 0 Basic Position proportioning 2 Long life 0: Control oriented 0 0 1: Service life oriented Basic Position proportioning 2 Loop assignment 1: Loop 1 2: Loop Basic Position proportioning 2 Linearization table group definition 0: Disabled 1 to 8: Group number

354 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Basic/Position Proportioning Adjustment Folder name Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Bank name code Item name Setting range Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Position proportioning adjustment Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 1 Auto-tuning 0: Stop 1: Start Fully closed FB value 0 to Fully open FB value 0 to Full opening time 5.0 to s 0 s 1 2 Auto-tuning 0: Stop 1: Start Fully closed FB value 0 to Fully open FB value 0 to Full opening time 5.0 to s 0 s

355 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/PV Input Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput PV input 1 Range type * See the range table 88 0 See 4-2 How to Set the Input Type (page 4-3). PV input 1 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 1 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point PV input 1 Temperature unit 0: Celsius ( C) 1: Fahrenheit ( F) 0 0 2: Kelvin (K) PV input 1 Alarm setting low to U 1 Decimal point position limit = PV PV input 1 Alarm setting high to U Decimal point position limit = PV Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput 0: Use internal compensation 1: Do not use internal compensation to U Decimal point position = PV to U Decimal point position = PV 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0 % 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput PV input 2 Range type * See the range table 88 0 See 4-2 How to Set the Input Type (page 4-3). PV input 2 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 1 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point PV input 2 Temperature unit 0: Celsius ( C) 1: Fahrenheit ( F) 0 0 2: Kelvin (K) PV input 2 Alarm setting low to U 1 Decimal point position limit = PV PV input 2 Alarm setting high to U Decimal point position limit = PV Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput 0: Use internal compensation 1: Do not use internal compensation to U Decimal point position = PV to U Decimal point position = PV 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0 % 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks PV input 1 Cold junction compensation PV input 1 Linear scaling low limit PV input 1 Linear scaling high limit PV input 1 Square root extraction dropout PV input 1 Filter 0.00 to s 0.00 s 0 PV input 1 Bias to U Decimal point position = PV PV input 1 Ratio to PV input 1 Linearization table definition 0: Disabled 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 7: Group 7 8: Group PV input 2 Cold junction compensation PV input 2 Linear scaling low limit PV input 2 Linear scaling high limit PV input 2 Square root extraction dropout PV input 2 Filter 0.00 to s 0.00 s 0 PV input 2 Bias to U Decimal point position = PV PV input 2 Ratio to PV input 2 Linearization table definition 0: Disabled 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 7: Group 7 8: Group NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

356 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/PV Input Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput PV input 3 Range type * See the range table * 0 See 4-2 How to Set the Input Type (page 4-3). PV input 3 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 1 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point PV input 3 Temperature unit 0: Celsius ( C) 1: Fahrenheit ( F) 0 0 2: Kelvin (K) PV input 3 Alarm setting low to U 1 Decimal point position limit = PV PV input 3 Alarm setting high to U Decimal point position limit = PV Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput 0: Use internal compensation 1: Do not use internal compensation to U Decimal point position = PV to U Decimal point position = PV 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0 % 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput PV input 4 Range type * See the range table * 0 See 4-2 How to Set the Input Type (page 4-3). PV input 4 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1 0 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point PV input 4 Temperature unit 0: Celsius ( C) 1: Fahrenheit ( F) 0 0 2: Kelvin (K) PV input 4 Alarm setting low to U 1 Decimal point position limit = PV PV input 4 Alarm setting high to U Decimal point position limit = PV Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput 0: Use internal compensation 1: Do not use internal compensation to U Decimal point position = PV to U Decimal point position = PV 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0 % 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks PV input 3 Cold junction compensation PV input 3 Linear scaling low limit PV input 3 Linear scaling high limit PV input 3 Square root extraction dropout PV input 3 Filter 0.00 to s 0.00 s 0 PV input 3 Bias to U Decimal point position = PV PV input 3 Ratio to PV input 3 Linearization table definition 0: Disabled 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 7: Group 7 8: Group PV input 4 Cold junction compensation PV input 4 Linear scaling low limit PV input 4 Linear scaling high limit PV input 4 Square root extraction dropout PV input 4 Filter 0.00 to s 0.00 s 0 PV input 4 Bias to U Decimal point position = PV PV input 4 Ratio to PV input 4 Linearization table definition 0: Disabled 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4 5: Group 5 6: Group 6 7: Group 7 8: Group 8 * Non-position proportional models 88, Position proportional models NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

357 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/Continuous Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Continuous output 1 Loop/channel definition Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Continuous output 2 Loop/channel definition Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Continuous output 1 Output range Analog current output 0: 4 to 20 ma, 1: 0 to 20 ma Analog voltage output 0: 1 to 5 V, 1: 0 to 5 V 2: 0 to10 V, 3: 2 to 10 V Continuous output 1 Output type 0: 0 % (fixed) 1: MV 2: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: PV (loop) 5: SP 6: Deviation (PV - SP) 7: PV (input channel) : numerical codes Continuous output 1 Output decimal point position Continuous output 1 Output scaling low limit Continuous output 1 Output scaling high limit Continuous output 2 Output range Analog current output 0: 4 to 20 ma 1: 0 to 20 ma Analog voltage output 0: 1 to 5 V 1: 0 to 5V 2: 0 to 10V 3: 2 to 10V Continuous output 2 Output type 0: 0 % (fixed) 1: MV 2: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: PV (loop) 5: SP 6: Deviation (PV - SP) 7: PV (input channel) : numerical codes Continuous output 2 Output decimal point position Continuous output 2 Output scaling low limit Continuous output 2 Output scaling high limit Unit Display Level Remarks 0: Invalid 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel 4 5: Channel 5 6: Channel 6 7: Channel 7 8: Channel : No decimal point 1 0 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point to U Decimal point position = OUT to U Decimal point position = OUT : Invalid 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel 4 5: Channel 5 6: Channel 6 7: Channel 7 8: Channel : No decimal point 1 0 1: 1 digits after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digit after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point to U Decimal point position = OUT to U Decimal point position = OUT NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

358 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/Continuous Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Continuous output 3 Loop/channel definition Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Continuous output 4 Loop/channel definition Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Continuous output 3 Output range Analog current output 0: 4 to 20 ma, 1: 0 to 20 ma Analog voltage output 0: 1 to 5 V, 1: 0 to 5 V 2: 0 to10 V, 3: 2 to 10 V Continuous output 3 Output type 0: 0 % (fixed) 1: MV 2: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: PV (loop) 5: SP 6: Deviation (PV - SP) 7: PV (input channel) : numerical codes Continuous output 3 Output decimal point position Continuous output 3 Output scaling low limit Continuous output 3 Output scaling high limit Continuous output 4 Output range Analog current output 0: 4 to 20 ma, 1: 0 to 20 ma Analog voltage output 0: 1 to 5 V, 1: 0 to 5 V 2: 0 to10 V, 3: 2 to 10 V Continuous output 4 Output type 0: 0 % (fixed) 1: MV 2: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 3: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: PV (loop) 5: SP 6: Deviation (PV - SP) 7: PV (input channel) : numerical codes Continuous output 4 Output decimal point position Continuous output 4 Output scaling low limit Continuous output 4 Output scaling high limit * If NX-D15/D25 is 1, then NX-D35 is 0. Unit Display Level 0 0 * 0 Remarks 0: Invalid 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 2: Loop 2 / Channel 2 3: Loop 3 / Channel 3 4: Loop 4 / Channel 4 5: Channel 5 6: Channel 6 7: Channel 7 8: Channel : No decimal point 1 0 1: 1 digits after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digit after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point to U Decimal point position = OUT to U Decimal point position = OUT 0 0 * 0 0: Invalid 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel 4 5: Channel 5 6: Channel 6 7: Channel 7 8: Channel : No decimal point 1 0 1: 1 digits after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digit after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point to U Decimal point position = OUT to U Decimal point position = OUT NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

359 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output / OUT/DO Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value OUT/DO output 1 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 1 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 1 Time proportional 0: Control oriented operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented Unit Display Level OUT/DO output 1 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 1 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 1 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 0 OUT/DO output 2 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit 4 0 OUT/DO output 2 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 2 Time proportional 0: Control oriented 0 0 operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented OUT/DO output 2 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 2 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 2 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

360 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output / OUT/DO Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value OUT/DO output 3 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 3 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 3 Time proportional 0: Control oriented operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented Unit Display Level OUT/DO output 3 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 3 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 3 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 OUT/DO output 4 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit 10 0 OUT/DO output 4 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 4 Time proportional 0: Control oriented 0 0 operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented OUT/DO output 4 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 4 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 4 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

361 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output / OUT/DO Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value OUT/DO output 5 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 5 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 5 Time proportional 0: Control oriented operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented Unit Display Level OUT/DO output 5 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 5 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 5 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 0 OUT/DO output 6 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 6 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 6 Time proportional 0: Control oriented 0 0 operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented OUT/DO output 6 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 6 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 6 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

362 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output / OUT/DO Output Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value OUT/DO output 7 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 7 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 7 Time proportional 0: Control oriented operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented Unit Display Level OUT/DO output 7 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 7 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 7 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 OUT/DO output 8 Output type 0: OFF 1: Loop 1 MV 2: Loop 1 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 3: Loop 1 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 4: Loop 2 MV 5: Loop 2 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 6: Loop 2 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 7: Loop 3 MV 8: Loop 3 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 9: Loop 3 cool MV (for heat/cool control) 10: Loop 4 MV 11: Loop 4 heat MV (for heat/ cool control) 12: Loop 4 cool MV (for heat/ cool control) 13: Closing output for position proportional output 1 14: Opening output for position proportional output 1 15: Closing output for position proportional output 2 16: Opening output for position proportional output to 2047: bit OUT/DO output 8 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) OUT/DO output 8 Time proportional 0: Control oriented 0 0 operation type 1: Actuator-life oriented OUT/DO output 8 Min. ON/OFF time 0 to 300 ms 10 ms 0 OUT/DO output 8 Time proportional 0.1 to s 2.0 s 0 cycle OUT/DO output 8 Phase shift 0 to ms 0 ms 2 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

363 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/Zener Barrier Adjustment Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Zener barrier adjst. 1 Command to store adjusted values 0: Stop adjustment 1: Write adjusted value 99: Clear adjusted values Initial value Unit Display Level 0 2 Zener barrier adjst. 1 Adjustment factor to Ω 0 Ω 2 Zener barrier adjst. 2 Command to store adjusted values 0: Stop adjustment 1: Write adjusted value 99: Clear adjusted values 0 2 Zener barrier adjst. 2 Adjustment factor to Ω 0 Ω 2 Zener barrier adjst. 3 Command to store adjusted values 0: Stop adjustment 1: Write adjusted value 99: Clear adjusted values Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D Zener barrier adjst. 3 Adjustment factor to Ω 0 Ω 2 Zener barrier adjst. 4 Command to store adjusted values 0: Stop adjustment 1: Write adjusted value 99: Clear adjusted values 0 2 Zener barrier adjst. 4 Adjustment factor to Ω 0 Ω

364 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/CT Input Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput CT input 1 Number of CT power 1 to line passes CT input 1 Heater burnout 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 detection current value CT input 1 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as overcurrent CT input 1 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as shortcircuit CT input 1 Hysteresis 0.0 to A 5.0 A 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput CT input 2 Number of CT power 1 to line passes CT input 2 Heater burnout 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 detection current value CT input 2 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as overcurrent CT input 2 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as shortcircuit CT input 2 Hysteresis 0.0 to A 5.0 A 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value CT input 1 CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement (clamp meter mode) 1: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT1 2: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT2 3: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT3 4: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT4 CT input 1 Waiting time for CT measurement Unit Display Level to 300 ms 30 ms 0 CT input 1 Number of CT turns 100 to CT input 1 Delay time 0 to s 0.0 s 1 CT input 1 Condition for restoring status before measurement 1024 to 2047: bit CT input 2 CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement 0 0 (clamp meter mode) 1: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT1 2: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT2 3: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT3 4: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT4 CT input 2 Waiting time for CT 30 to 300 ms 30 ms 0 measurement CT input 2 Number of CT turns 100 to CT input 2 Delay time 0 to s 0.0 s 1 CT input 2 Condition for restoring status before measurement 1024 to 2047: bit CT input 3 CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement 0 0 (clamp meter mode) 1: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT1 2: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT2 3: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT3 4: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT4 CT input 3 Waiting time for CT 30 to 300 ms 30 ms 0 measurement CT input 3 Number of CT turns 100 to Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

365 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Input-output/CT Input Folder name Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput CT input 3 Number of CT power 1 to line passes CT input 3 Heater burnout 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 detection current value CT input 3 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as overcurrent CT input 3 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as shortcircuit CT input 3 Hysteresis 0.0 to A 5.0 A 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput CT input 4 Number of CT power 1 to line passes CT input 4 Heater burnout 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 detection current value CT input 4 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as overcurrent CT input 4 Minimum current 0.0 to A 0.0 A 1 defined as shortcircuit CT input 4 Hysteresis 0.0 to A 5.0 A 1 Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Inputoutput Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value CT input 3 Delay time 0 to s 0.0 s 1 CT input 3 Condition for restoring status before measurement 1024 to 2047: bit CT input 4 CT operation 0: Continuous current measurement 0 0 (clamp meter mode) 1: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT1 2: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT2 3: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT3 4: Detection of heater burnout for terminal OUT4 CT input 4 Waiting time for CT 30 to 300 ms 30 ms 0 measurement CT input 4 Number of CT turns 100 to CT input 4 Delay time 0 to s 0.0 s 1 CT input 4 Condition for restoring status before measurement CT input 1 Continuous current measurement cycle CT input 2 Continuous current measurement cycle CT input 3 Continuous current measurement cycle CT input 4 Continuous current measurement cycle Unit Display Level 1024 to 2047: bit to s to s to s to s 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

366 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS SP/SP Group Selection Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value SP SP group selection 1 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 SP SP group selection 2 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 SP SP group selection 3 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.) 1 0 SP SP group selection 4 SP group selection 1 to SP system group (4 max.)

367 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS SP/LSP Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 SP LSP 1 LSP1 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP2 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP3 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 1 LSP4 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 1 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP1 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP2 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP3 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 2 LSP4 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 2 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP1 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP2 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP3 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 3 LSP4 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 3 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP1 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP2 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP3 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) SP LSP 4 LSP4 SP low limit to SP high limit U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP LSP 4 PID group definition 1 to (for LSP) 13-51

368 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS SP/RSP Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 SP RSP 1 RSP 1 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP RSP 1 PID group definition 1 to (for RSP) SP RSP 2 RSP 1 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP RSP 2 PID group definition 1 to (for RSP) SP RSP 3 RSP 1 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP RSP 3 PID group definition 1 to (for RSP) SP RSP 4 RSP 1 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP RSP 4 PID group definition 1 to (for RSP) 13-52

369 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS SP/SP Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 SP SP configuration 1 SP low limit to U 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 1 SP high limit to U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 2 SP low limit to U 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 2 SP high limit to U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 3 SP low limit to U 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 3 SP high limit to U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 4 SP low limit to U 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 4 SP high limit to U Decimal point position = PID_PV SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp unit 0: No decimal point/s 0 1 1=No decimal point/min, 2=No decimal point/h, 3=0.1/s, 4=0.1/ min, 5=0.1/h, 6=0.01/s, 7=0.01/ min, 8 : 0.01/h, 9=0.001/s, 10=0.001/min, 11=0.001/h SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-up for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-down for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 1 RSP tracking 0: Tracking OFF 1: Tracking ON 0 2 SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-up for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 1 SP ramp-down for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 1 PV start for LSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 1 PV start for RSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp unit 0: No decimal point/s 0 1 1=No decimal point/min, 2=No decimal point/h, 3=0.1/s, 4=0.1/ min, 5=0.1/h, 6=0.01/s, 7=0.01/ min, 8 : 0.01/h, 9=0.001/s, 10=0.001/min, 11=0.001/h SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-up for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-down for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 2 RSP tracking 0: Tracking OFF 1: Tracking ON 0 2 SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-up for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 2 SP ramp-down for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 2 PV start for LSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 2 PV start for RSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp unit 0: No decimal point/s 0 1 1=No decimal point/min, 2=No decimal point/h, 3=0.1/s, 4=0.1/ min, 5=0.1/h, 6=0.01/s, 7=0.01/ min, 8 : 0.01/h, 9=0.001/s, 10=0.001/min, 11=0.001/h SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-up for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-down for 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position LSP = RAMP SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-up for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 3 SP ramp-down for 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position RSP = RAMP SP SP configuration 3 RSP tracking 0: Tracking OFF 1: Tracking ON 0 2 SP SP configuration 3 PV start for LSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 3 PV start for RSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent PV start

370 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS SP/SP Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp unit 0: No decimal point/s 0 1 1=No decimal point/min, 2=No decimal point/h, 3=0.1/s, 4=0.1/ min, 5=0.1/h, 6=0.01/s, 7=0.01/ min, 8 : 0.01/h, 9=0.001/s, 10=0.001/min, 11=0.001/h SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-up for LSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-down for 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position LSP = RAMP SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-up for RSP 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position = RAMP SP SP configuration 4 SP ramp-down for 0 U (No ramp) 1 to U 0 1 Decimal point position RSP = RAMP SP SP configuration 4 RSP tracking 0: Tracking OFF 1: Tracking ON 0 2 SP SP configuration 4 PV start for LSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent 0 1 PV start SP SP configuration 4 PV start for RSP 0: Allow PV start 1: Prevent PV start

371 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Settings (Operating Points) Folder name Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Bank name code Item name Setting range Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 1 Event main setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 1 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 2 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 2 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 3 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 3 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 4 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 4 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 5 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 5 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 6 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 6 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 7 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 7 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 8 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 8 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 9 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 9 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 10 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 10 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 11 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 11 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 12 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 12 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 13 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 13 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 14 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 14 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 15 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 15 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 16 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 16 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 17 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 17 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 18 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 18 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 19 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 19 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 20 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

372 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Settings (Operating Points) Folder name Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Bank name code Item name Setting range Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Event setting (operating point) Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 20 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV 21 Event main setting to U Decimal point position = EV 21 Event sub-setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 22 Event main setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 22 Event sub-setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 23 Event main setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 23 Event sub-setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 24 Event main setting to+32000u Decimal point position = EV 24 Event sub-setting to U Decimal point position = EV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

373 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 1 Operation type 0: No event 1: PV high limit 2: PV low limit 3: PV high and low limits 4: Deviation high limit 5: Deviation low limit 6: Deviation high and low limits 7: Deviation high limit (final SP basis) 8: Deviation low limit (final SP basis) 9: Deviation high and low limits (final SP basis) 10: SP high limit 11: SP low limit 12: SP high and low limits 13: MV high limit 14: MV low limit 15: MV high and low limits 16: MFB1 opening high and low limits 17: MFB2 opening high and low limits 18: AI high limit 19: AI low limit 20: AI high and low limits 26: numerical code (high limit) 27: numerical code (low limit) 28: numerical code (high and low limits) 29: PV change rate 31: High limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV1) 32: High limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV2) 33: High limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV3) 34: High limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV4) 35: Low limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV1) 36: Low limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV2) 37: Low limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV3) 38: Low limit of deviation between channels (specified by PV4) 39: High and low limits of deviation between channels (specified by PV1) 40: High and low limits of deviation between channels (specified by PV2) 41: High and low limits of deviation between channels (specified by PV3) 42: High and low limits of deviation between channels (specified by PV4) 43: High limit of deviation between channels (PV1 standard numerical codes) 44: High limit of deviation between channels (PV2 standard numerical codes) 45: High limit of deviation between channels (PV3 standard numerical codes) 46: High limit of deviation between channels (PV4 standard numerical codes) 47: Low limit of deviation between channels (PV1 standard numerical codes) 48: Low limit of deviation between channels (PV2 standard numerical codes) 49: Low limit of deviation between channels (PV3 standard numerical codes) 50: Low limit of deviation between channels (PV4 standard numerical codes) 51: High and low limits of deviation between channels (PV1 standard numerical codes) 52: High and low limits of deviation between channels (PV2 standard numerical codes) 53: High and low limits of deviation between channels (PV3 standard numerical codes) 54: High and low limits of deviation between channels (PV4 standard numerical codes) 61: Alarm (status) 62: READY (status) 63: MANUAL (status) 64: RSP (status) 65: During AT (status) 66: SP ramp (status) 67: Control action (status) Event Event config. 1 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number Initial value Unit Display Level Event Event config. 1 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 1 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 1 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

374 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 1 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 1 Hysteresis 0 to U Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 1 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 1 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 2 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 2 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 2 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 2 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 2 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 2 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 2 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 2 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 2 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 3 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 3 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 3 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 3 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 3 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 3 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 3 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 3 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 3 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 4 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 4 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 4 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 4 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 4 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

375 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 4 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 4 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 4 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 4 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 5 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 5 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 5 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 5 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 5 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 5 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 5 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 5 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 5 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 6 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 6 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 6 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 6 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 6 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 6 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 6 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 6 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 6 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 7 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 7 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 7 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 7 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 7 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

376 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 7 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 7 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 7 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 7 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 8 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 8 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 8 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 8 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 8 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 8 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 8 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 8 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 8 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 9 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 9 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 9 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 9 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 9 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 9 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 9 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 9 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 9 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 10 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 10 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 10 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 10 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 10 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

377 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 10 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 10 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 10 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 10 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 11 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 11 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 11 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 11 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 11 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 11 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 11 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 11 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 11 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 12 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 12 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 12 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 12 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 12 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 12 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 12 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 12 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 12 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 13 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 13 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1 / Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 13 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 13 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 13 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

378 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 13 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 13 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 13 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 13 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 14 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 14 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 14 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 14 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 14 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 14 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 14 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 14 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 14 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 15 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 15 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 15 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 15 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 15 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 15 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 15 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 15 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 15 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 16 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 16 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 16 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 16 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 16 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

379 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 16 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 16 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 16 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 16 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 17 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 17 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 17 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 17 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 17 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 17 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 17 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 17 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 17 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 18 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 18 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 18 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 18 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 18 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 18 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 18 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 18 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 18 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 19 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 19 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 19 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 19 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 19 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

380 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 19 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 19 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 19 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 19 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 20 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 20 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 20 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 20 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 20 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 20 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 20 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 20 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 20 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 21 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 21 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 21 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 21 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 21 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 21 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 21 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 21 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 21 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 22 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 22 Loop/channel 0 to U 1 0 definition Event Event config. 22 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 22 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 22 EVENT state at READY 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

381 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Event/Event Configuration Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Event Event config. 22 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Initial value Unit Display Level 0 0 Remarks Event Event config. 22 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 22 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 22 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 23 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 23 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 23 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 23 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 23 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 23 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 23 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 23 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 23 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 24 Operation type Same as Event Event Event config. 24 Loop/channel definition 1: Loop 1/Channel 1 2: Loop 2/Channel 2 3: Loop 3/Channel 3 4: Loop 4/Channel to 3071: number 1 0 Event Event config. 24 Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 0 Event Event config. 24 Standby 0: No standby 1: Standby 0 0 2: Standby + standby when the SP is modified Event Event config. 24 EVENT state at 0: Continuation 1: Forced OFF 0 0 READY Event Event config. 24 decimal point position 0: No decimal point 1: 1 digit 0 0 after the decimal point 2: 2 digits after the decimal point 3: 3 digits after the decimal point 4: 4 digits after the decimal point Event Event config. 24 Hysteresis 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = EV Event Event config. 24 ON delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 Event Event config. 24 OFF delay 0.0 to s 0.0 s 0 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

382 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value PID PID 1 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Integral time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Derivative time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit 1 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit 1 Unit Display Level to % 0.0 % to % % 0 Remarks 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool side 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 1 PID PID 1 Differential 1 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 1 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Integral time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Derivative time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit 2 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit to % 0.0 % to % % s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool side 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 2 PID PID 1 Differential 2 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

383 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value PID PID 1 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Integral time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Derivative time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit 3 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit 3 Unit Display Level to % 0.0 % to % % 0 Remarks 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool side 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 3 PID PID 1 Differential 3 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 1 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Integral time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Derivative time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 1 Output (MV) low limit 4 PID PID 1 Output (MV) high limit to % 0.0 % to % % s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 1 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 1 Derivative time for cool side 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 1 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 1 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 4 PID PID 1 Differential 4 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

384 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value PID PID 2 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Integral time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Derivative time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit 1 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit 1 Unit Display Level to % 0.0 % to % % 0 Remarks 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool side 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 1 PID PID 2 Differential 1 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 2 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Integral time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Derivative time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit 2 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit to % 0.0 % to % % s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool side 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 2 PID PID 2 Differential 2 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

385 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value PID PID 2 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Integral time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Derivative time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit 3 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit 3 Unit Display Level to % 0.0 % to % % 0 Remarks 120 s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool side 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 3 PID PID 2 Differential 3 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 2 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Integral time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Derivative time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 2 Output (MV) low limit 4 PID PID 2 Output (MV) high limit to % 0.0 % to % % s 0 Decimal point position = PID 30 s 0 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 2 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 Decimal point position side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) = PID PID PID 2 Derivative time for cool side 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s 1 Decimal point position = PID PID PID 2 Output low limit for cool side to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 2 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 4 PID PID 2 Differential 4 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

386 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 PID PID 3 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Integral time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 1 PID PID 3 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 1 PID PID 3 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool side 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to 110.0% 0.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool side 1 PID PID 3 Output high limit for to 110.0% % 1 cool side 1 PID PID 3 Differential 1 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 3 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Integral time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 2 PID PID 3 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 2 PID PID 3 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side 2 PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool side 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to 110.0% 0.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool side 2 PID PID 3 Output high limit for to 110.0% % 1 cool side 2 PID PID 3 Differential 2 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 13-70

387 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 PID PID 3 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Integral time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 3 PID PID 3 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 3 PID PID 3 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool side 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to 110.0% 0.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool side 3 PID PID 3 Output high limit for to 110.0% % 1 cool side 3 PID PID 3 Differential 3 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 3 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Integral time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Derivative time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 3 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 4 PID PID 3 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 4 PID PID 3 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 3 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Integral time for cool side 4 PID PID 3 Derivative time for cool side 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to 110.0% 0.0 % 1 PID PID 3 Output low limit for cool side 4 PID PID 3 Output high limit for to 110.0% % 1 cool side 4 PID PID 3 Differential 4 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 13-71

388 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 PID PID 4 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Integral time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 1 PID PID 4 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 1 PID PID 4 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool side 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool side 1 PID PID 4 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 1 PID PID 4 Differential 1 0 ~ U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 4 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Integral time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 2 PID PID 4 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 2 PID PID 4 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side 2 PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool side 2 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool side 2 PID PID 4 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 2 PID PID 4 Differential 2 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 13-72

389 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS PID/PID Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D35 PID PID 4 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Integral time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 3 PID PID 4 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 3 PID PID 4 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s 1 side to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool side 3 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool side 3 PID PID 4 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 3 PID PID 4 Differential 3 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV PID PID 4 Proportional band to % 5.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Integral time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 120 s to s (integral operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Derivative time 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, 30 s 0 or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) PID PID 4 Output (MV) low to % 0.0 % 0 limit 4 PID PID 4 Output (MV) high to % % 0 limit 4 PID PID 4 Manual reset to % 50.0 % 0 PID PID 4 Proportional band for cool side to % 5.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Integral time for cool side 4 PID PID 4 Derivative time for cool side 4 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 120 s 1 0 to s, 0.0 to s, or 0.00 to s (derivative operation at 0, 0.0 or 0.00) 30 s to % 0.0 % 1 PID PID 4 Output low limit for cool side 4 PID PID 4 Output high limit for to % % 1 cool side 4 PID PID 4 Differential 4 0 to U 5 0 Decimal point position = PID_PV 13-73

390 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 1 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

391 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 2 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

392 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 3 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

393 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 4 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

394 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 5 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

395 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 6 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

396 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 7 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

397 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Linearization Table Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint decimal point position 0 to Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint A to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL Function Linearization table 8 Breakpoint B to Decimal point position = TBL NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

398 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 1 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 1 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 1 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 1 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 2 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 2 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 2 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 2 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 3 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 3 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 3 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 3 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

399 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 4 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 4 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 4 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 4 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 5 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 5 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 5 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 5 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 6 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 6 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 6 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 6 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

400 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 7 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 7 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 7 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 7 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 8 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 8 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit Function Internal contact IN 8 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 8 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 9 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 9 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 9 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 9 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

401 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 10 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 10 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 10 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 10 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 11 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 11 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 11 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 11 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 12 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 12 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 12 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 12 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

402 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 13 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 13 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 13 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 13 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 14 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 14 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 14 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 14 Weighting 0 to Function Internal contact IN 15 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 15 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 15 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 15 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

403 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Internal Contact IN Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Internal contact IN 16 Operation type 1: SP group selection 2: PID group selection 3: Fixed value group selection 5: OUT linearization use group selection 6: Selection of group using linearization for position proportioning 9: AI group definition 21: RUN/READY mode selection 22: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 23: LSP/RSP mode selection 24: AT start/stop selection 41: Control operation direct/ reverse selection 42: SP RAMP permit/prohibit selection 46: Timer stop/start selection 47: Release all latches Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 0 0 * NX-D15 cannot set "3: Fixed value group selection" or "5: OUT linearization use group selection". Function Internal contact IN 16 Input type 1024 to 2047: bit 0 Function Internal contact IN 16 Loop/channel definition 0 to 24: (Meaning varies depending on operation type) 1 0 See Loop/channel definition setup (page 6-8) Function Internal contact IN 16 Weighting 0 to NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

404 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 1 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 1 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 1 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 1 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 1 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 1 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 1 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 2 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 2 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 2 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 2 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 2 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 2 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 2 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 3 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 3 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 3 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 3 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 3 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 3 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 3 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

405 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 4 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 4 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 4 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 4 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 4 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 4 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 4 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 5 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 5 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 5 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 5 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 5 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 5 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 5 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 6 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 6 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 6 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 6 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 6 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 6 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 6 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

406 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 7 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 7 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 7 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 7 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 7 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 7 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 7 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 8 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 8 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 8 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 8 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 8 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 8 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 8 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 9 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 9 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 9 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 9 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 9 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 9 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 9 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

407 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 10 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 10 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 10 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 10 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 10 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 10 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 10 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 11 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 11 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 11 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 11 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 11 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 11 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 11 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 12 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 12 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 12 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 12 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 12 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 12 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 12 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

408 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 13 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 13 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 13 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 13 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 13 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 13 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 13 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 14 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 14 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 14 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 14 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 14 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 14 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 14 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 0 1 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) Function Logical operation 15 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 15 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 15 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 15 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 15 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 15 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 15 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

409 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Logical Operation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Logical operation 16 Calculation type 1: Calculation 1: (A and B) or 1 1 (C and D) 2: Calculation 2: (A or B) and (C or D) 3: Calculation 3: (A or B or C or D) 4: Calculation 4: (A and B and C and D) Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment A 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment B 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment C 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 16 Input assignment D 1024 to 2047: bit Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit B 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit C 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 16 Inverted input bit D 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 16 ON delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 16 OFF delay time 0.0 to s 0.0 s 1 Function Logical operation 16 Inversion 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 1 Function Logical operation 16 Latch 0: No latch 1: Latch when ON 2: Latch when OFF (except OFF before power ON) 0 1 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

410 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Energy Conservation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Function Energy conservation 1 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 1 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 1 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 1 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 2 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 2 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 2 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 2 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 3 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 3 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 3 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 3 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 4 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 4 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 4 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 4 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 5 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 5 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 5 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 5 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 6 Energy conservation time proportional operation Initial value Unit Display Level 0: Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning : Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning : Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning : Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning : Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning : Not used 1: Used 0 2 Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

411 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Energy Conservation Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Energy conservation 6 Energy conservation 0 to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 delay time Function Energy conservation 6 Master/slave 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 selection Function Energy conservation 6 Time proportional slave channel 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning Function Energy conservation 7 Energy conservation 0: Not used 1: Used 0 2 time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 7 Energy conservation 0 to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 delay time Function Energy conservation 7 Master/slave selection 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 Function Energy conservation 7 Time proportional slave channel Function Energy conservation 8 Energy conservation time proportional operation Function Energy conservation 8 Energy conservation delay time Function Energy conservation 8 Master/slave selection Function Energy conservation 8 Time proportional slave channel 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning 8 Unit Display Level 0 2 0: Not used 1: Used to 1000 ms 10 ms 2 0: Master 1: Other than master 0 2 1: Time proportioning 1 2: Time proportioning 2 3: Time proportioning 3 4: Time proportioning 4 5: Time proportioning 5 6: Time proportioning 6 7: Time proportioning 7 8: Time proportioning Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

412 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/MV Branching Output Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function MV Branching Output 1 Loop assignment 0: Not used 1: Loop : Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 Function MV Branching Output 1 Ratio 0.01 to Function MV Branching Output 1 Bias to % 0.00 % 2 Function MV Branching Output 2 Loop assignment 0: Not used 1: Loop : Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 Function MV Branching Output 2 Ratio 0.01 to Function MV Branching Output 2 Bias to % 0.00 % 2 Function MV Branching Output 3 Loop assignment 0: Not used 1: Loop : Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 Function MV Branching Output 3 Ratio 0.01 to Function MV Branching Output 3 Bias to % 0.00 % 2 Function MV Branching Output 4 Loop assignment 0: Not used 1: Loop : Loop 2 3: Loop 3 4: Loop 4 Function MV Branching Output 4 Ratio 0.01 to Function MV Branching Output 4 Bias to % 0.00 % 2 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

413 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Reception monitoring 1 Address (l) 0 to Unit Display Level Remarks Function Reception monitoring 1 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 1 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 1 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 1 Mode 0: Without reception 0 1 monitoring 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 2 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 2 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 2 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 2 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 2 Mode 0: Without reception 0 1 monitoring 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 3 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 3 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 3 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 3 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 3 Mode 0: Without reception 0 1 monitoring 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 4 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 4 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 4 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 4 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 4 Mode 0: Without reception 0 1 monitoring 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 5 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 5 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 5 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 5 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 5 Mode 0: Without reception 0 1 monitoring 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 6 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 6 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 6 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 6 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 6 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 1: With reception monitoring 0 1 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

414 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Reception monitoring 7 Address (l) 0 to Unit Display Level Remarks Function Reception monitoring 7 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 7 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 7 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 7 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 8 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 8 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 8 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 8 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 8 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 9 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 9 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 9 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 9 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 9 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 10 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 10 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 10 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 10 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 10 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 11 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 11 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 11 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 11 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 11 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 12 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 12 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 12 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 12 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 12 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 1: With reception monitoring 0 1 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

415 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/Reception Monitoring Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Function Reception monitoring 13 Address (l) 0 to Unit Display Level Remarks Function Reception monitoring 13 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 13 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 13 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 13 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 14 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 14 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 14 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 14 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 14 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 15 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 15 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 15 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 15 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 15 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 0 1 1: With reception monitoring Function Reception monitoring 16 Address (l) 0 to Function Reception monitoring 16 Address (h) 0 to When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 16 Time-out (l) 0 to s 180 s 1 Function Reception monitoring 16 Time-out (h) Fixed at When writing, write 0 Function Reception monitoring 16 Mode 0: Without reception monitoring 1: With reception monitoring 0 1 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

416 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/UFLED Settings Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks Other UFLED settings 1 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit Representative alarm F0 lighting Other UFLED settings 1 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F0 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 2 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit Event 1 F1 lighting Other UFLED settings 2 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F1 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 3 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *1 1 Event 2 F2 lighting Other UFLED settings 3 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F2 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 4 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *2 1 Event 3 F3 lighting Other UFLED settings 4 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F3 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 5 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *3 1 Event 4 F4 lighting Other UFLED settings 5 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F4 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 6 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *4 1 Event 5 F5 lighting Other UFLED settings 6 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 1 1 F5 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 7 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *5 1 Event 6 F6 lighting Other UFLED settings 7 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit *6 1 F6 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 8 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit *7 1 Event 7 F7 lighting Other UFLED settings 8 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) *8 1 F7 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

417 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Function/UFLED Settings Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Other UFLED settings 9 Conditions for lighting Initial value Unit Display Level Remarks 1024 to 2047: bit RS-485 status F8 (normal transmission of 1 frame) Other UFLED settings 9 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 3 1 F8 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) Other UFLED settings 10 Conditions for 1024 to 2047: bit Parameter error F9 lighting Other UFLED settings 10 Lighting status 0: Off 1: Lit 2: Lit (reverse video) 3: Fast blink 4: Fast blink (conditional reverse video) 5: Slow blink 6: Slow blink (conditional reverse video) 3 1 F9 *1 Position proportional models: 1900 (MFB1 OPEN) Otherwise: 1089 (Event 2) *2 Position proportional models: 1904 (MFB1 CLOSE) Otherwise: 1090 (Event 3) *3 Position proportional models: 1901 (Position proportioning 2 OPEN) Otherwise: 1091 (Event 4) *4 Position proportional models: 1905 (Position proportioning 2 CLOSE) Otherwise: 1092 (Event 5) *5 Position proportional models: 1888 (MFB1 estimation in progress) Otherwise: 1093 (Event 6) *6 Position proportional models: 5 Otherwise: 1 *7 Position proportional models: 1889 (Position proportioning 2 estimation in progress) Otherwise: 1094 (Event 7) *8 Position proportional models: 5 Otherwise: 1 NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

418 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Other/Instrument Information Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM ID 0 Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM 0 Version 1 Other Instrument info. 1 F/W ROM 0 Version 2 Other Instrument info. 1 Module-compatible 0 version Other Instrument info. 1 Module version (major, minor) 0 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

419 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Other/PV Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 1 PV1 0 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 2 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 3 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 4 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 5 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 6 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 7 Other PV tag name 1 Tag name 8 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 1 PV2 0 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 2 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 3 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 4 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 5 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 6 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 7 Other PV tag name 2 Tag name 8 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 1 PV3 0 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 2 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 3 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 4 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 5 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 6 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 7 Other PV tag name 3 Tag name 8 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 1 PV4 0 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 2 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 3 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 4 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 5 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 6 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 7 Other PV tag name 4 Tag name 8 Unit Display Level Remarks NX- NX- NX- D15 D25 D

420 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Other/OUT Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 1 OUT1 0 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 2 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 3 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 4 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 5 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 6 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 7 Other OUT tag name 1 Tag name 8 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 1 OUT2 0 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 2 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 3 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 4 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 5 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 6 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 7 Other OUT tag name 2 Tag name 8 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 1 OUT3 0 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 2 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 3 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 4 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 5 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 6 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 7 Other OUT tag name 3 Tag name 8 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 1 OUT4 0 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 2 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 3 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 4 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 5 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 6 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 7 Other OUT tag name 4 Tag name 8 Unit Display Level Remarks

421 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Other/Option Tag Name Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Display Level Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 1 OPTION1 0 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 2 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 3 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 4 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 5 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 6 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 7 Other Option tag name 1 Tag name 8 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 1 OPTION2 0 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 2 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 3 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 4 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 5 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 6 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 7 Other Option tag name 2 Tag name 8 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 1 OPTION3 0 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 2 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 3 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 4 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 5 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 6 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 7 Other Option tag name 3 Tag name 8 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 1 OPTION4 0 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 2 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 3 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 4 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 5 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 6 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 7 Other Option tag name 4 Tag name 8 Remarks

422 Chapter 13. LIST OF PARAMETER SETTINGS Other/Tag for All Loops Folder name Bank name code Item name Setting range Initial value Unit Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 1 LOOP1 0 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 2 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 3 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 4 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 5 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 6 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 7 Other Tag for all loops 1 Tag name 8 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 1 LOOP2 0 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 2 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 3 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 4 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 5 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 6 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 7 Other Tag for all loops 2 Tag name 8 Display Level Remarks Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 1 LOOP3 0 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 2 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 3 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 4 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 5 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 6 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 7 Other Tag for all loops 3 Tag name 8 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 1 LOOP4 0 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 2 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 3 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 4 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 5 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 6 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name 7 Other Tag for all loops 4 Tag name

423 Chapter 14. TROUBLESHOOTING WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Doing so may result in an electric shock. Alarm codes and corrective actions Alarm codes and countermeasures in case of abnormal operation of this controller. Alarm code Failure Problem Cause Corrective action AL01 AL02 AL03 AL04 Soft Soft Soft Soft PV1 high limit error PV1 low limit error PV2 high limit error PV2 low limit error Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Incorrect settings for input voltage, current, or resistance. Input exceeding high and low limit settings for alarm. AD error AL05 Soft PV3 high limit error AL06 Soft PV3 low limit error AL07 Soft PV4 high limit error AL08 Soft PV4 low limit error Check the PV wiring. Check the input voltage, current, and resistance. If there is an AD error, replace the module. AL11 Soft AD1 fault AD fault If the module does not return to normal after the power is turned off and on again, replace it. AL12 Soft AD2 fault 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) AL13 Soft AD3 fault AL14 Soft AD4 fault AL21* 3 Soft MFB1 input error MFB1 line break or input error Wiring check for MFB1 input Check the motor resistance specification. AL21* 3 Soft MFB1 adjustment error MFB1 adjustment failure 4-8, How to Set Position Proportional Output (page 4-19) AL23* 3 Soft MFB2 input error MFB2 line break or input error Wiring check for MFB1 input Check the motor resistance specification. AL24* 3 Soft MFB2 adjustment error MFB2 adjustment failure 4-8, How to Set Position Proportional Output (page 4-19) AL25 Soft CT1 input error CT input over range Check the CT input. AL26 Soft CT2 input error Incorrect setting for CT input Change the CT input setting. AD error If there is an AD error, replace the module. AL27 Soft CT3 input error 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) AL28 Soft CT4 input error AL31 Reception monitors 1 16 No data write access to the set address within the set period. AL32 Transmission timeout between modules There is no response from the partner module. Check the module status. Check the settings. AL33* 1 Soft RS-485 setting error RS-485 setting error Write the data again and turn the power off on again. AL34* 3 Soft Communication setting error between modules There is a communication setting mismatch between modules. AL38* 3 Soft Adjacent ring disconnection Break in the ring connection between modules AL53* 3 Soft Base/module communication setting mismatch AL54* 3 Soft Base/module model No. mismatch There is a mismatch between the base and module communication settings. There is a mismatch between the base and module model numbers. Reconfigure the settings for communication between modules using the loader. Check the communication connection. Replace the module. 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) Button functions* 4 Button functions* 4 AL55* 3 Hard Base verification error Data write to the base is not possible. If the module does not return to normal after the power is turned off and on again, replace it. 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) 14-1

424 Chapter 14. Troubleshooting Alarm code Failure Problem Cause Corrective action AL71 Soft CJ1 error Abnormal terminal temperature Check the ambient temperature. AD error If there is an AD error, replace the module. AL72 Soft CJ2 error 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) AL73 Soft CJ3 error AL74 Soft CJ4 error AL83 Hard EEPROM not initialized EEPROM read error If the module does not return to normal after the power is turned off and on again, replace it. AL84* 1 Hard MAC address error MAC address error 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) AL85 Hard RAM read/write error RAM read/write error AL86 Hard EEPROM read/write error EEPROM read/write error AL87 Hard Base EEPROM read write error Base EEPROM read write error AL88 Soft Base EEPROM error In the case of ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] or earlier, base/module model No. mismatch. In the case of ROM version 2.02 [1_0_2] or earlier, incorrect base EEPROM. Button operation* 2 * 4 If the module does not return to normal after the power is turned off and on again, replace it. AL94 Soft RAM error (parameter data) RAM error If the module does not return to normal after the power is turned off and on again, replace it. AL95 Soft RAM error (adjustment data) 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2) AL97 Soft EEPROM error EEPROM read error Parameter error AL98 Soft RAM error (adjustment data) AL99 Hard ROM error Faulty ROM (memory) [Hard]: If the error is hard, the FAIL LED is lit. [Soft] : If the error is soft, the FAIL LED blinks slowly. *1. ROM versions 2.00 [1_0_1] and later *2. ROM versions 2.02 [1_0_2] and earlier *3. ROM versions 3.00 [1_0_3] and later n Button functions (page 5-4) Note 7-17, Reception Monitoring and Communication Timeout (page 7-28) Handling Precautions The mode changes to IDLE in the following cases: AL88 (base EEPROM error), AL53 (base-body communication settings mismatch), and AL54 (base-body model No. mismatch). 14-2

425 Chapter 14. Troubleshooting If a touch panel (etc.) does not respond after module replacement. If a module communicating with devices like touch panels using the CPL/TCP or the MODBUS/TCP protocol is replaced with another, the replacement module may be unable to communicate with the devices. In this case, either temporarily turn off the power to devices like touch panels, or wait for automatic recovery. Note After module replacemeßnt, the new module requires configuration. 15-2, Module Replacement (page 15-2). Major host devices and estimated time required for the automatic recovery ARF100/200 series: about 5 minutes Azbil system products: about 10 minutes (Harmonas, Harmonas-DEO, PREXION, EneSCOPE etc.) Digital Electronics Corporation GP series graphic operator interfaces: about 20 minutes Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GOT series graphic operator interfaces: about 20 minutes Reason for loss of communications Host devices using CPL/TCP or MODBUS/TCP automatically read MAC addresses from modules and regularly update them in order to identify each module. After module replacement, the MAC address of the replaced module may remain in the host devices. In such a case, they attempt to communicate using the old address. For this reason, when receiving command messages from host devices, the new module judges that the MAC address in the messages is not its MAC address, even though the IP address is the same, and discards the received messages. Thus communications cannot be established. For normal communications to resume, time is required to rewrite the MAC address in the host devices. The amount of time varies depending on the host device. If the module can no longer communicate with a device using the MODBUS/TCP protocol The module can communicate with devices using the the CPL/TCP or the MODBUS/TCP protocol. However, in the following cases, they communications may not be possible. In such cases, turn off the power to the devices and module, or wait for 3 minutes for automatic recovery. Cases where communication fails When the host device is subject to repeated short interruptions When network devices (hub, etc.) between the host device and the module experience repeated short power outages or disconnections. Reason for loss of communications Since the module retains data from its communication partners for a certain time, if the host devices experience repeated short interruptions, the module sometimes perceives different devices before and after the interruption. As a result, the module may mistakenly conclude that the number of host communications exceeds the limit (2) and refuse to accept further communications. 14-3

426

427 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL 15-1 Maintenance and Inspection WARNING Before removing, mounting or wiring the NX-D15/25/35, be sure to turn OFF the power to the module and any connected devices. Not doing so may result in an electric shock. CAUTION Make sure that there are no loose connections. Failure to do so might cause overheating or device failure. When discarding the NX-D15/25/35, dispose of it as industrial waste, following local regulations. Cleaning Part replacement Fuse replacement : When removing dirt from the instrument, wipe it off with a soft cloth rag. : Do not replace any parts of this module. : When replacing the fuse connected to the electric wiring, always use the fuse that is recommended for your power unit. 15-1

428 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL 15-2 Module Replacement CAUTION Before replacing modules, be sure to turn off the power. Not doing so might cause device failure. Do not use screw terminal block models together with screwless terminals, or conversely, use screwless terminals with screw terminal block models, as correct measurement will not be possible. This section explains replacement methods when installing or operating this unit. Replace the entire base section (using Ethernet communications) Replace the entire base section (using a loader cable) Replacing leaving the base section as-is Module Replacement Replace the base section? Leave the base section as-is Replace the base section as well Replace leaving the base section as-is (page 15-12). Used Are you usig the Data transfer between modules function or the supervisor module? Not used Connect SLP-NX via Ethernet? Use a loader cable Use Ethernet Replace the entire base section (using Ethernet communications) (page 15-3). Replace the entire base section (using a loader cable) (page 15-7). Work complete Handling Precautions When changing the module model No. before or after the replacement, use the SLP-NX Smart Loader Package to change the No. or create a new project. For modules using a Data Transfer Function between Modules, or which are controlled by the supervisor module, write all settings in a single batch for all modules registered to the project. 15-2

429 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL Replace the entire base section (using Ethernet communications) When replacing modules, it is recommended to also replace terminal sections and base sections along with the module. The following explains the procedure for replacing modules using Ethernet communications. Handling Precautions This explanation is for environments where the network environment of this device matches the network log file for the SLP-NX Smart Loader Package. For details of the network log file, Chapter 5. "ACTUAL MODULE COMMUNICATION SETTING" in the Network Instrumentation Module Smart Loader Package SLP-NX User's Manual, CP-UM-5636E. When writing to all modules in a single batch, the parameters in the project files of modules that are not being replaced will also be overwritten. To prevent this happen, use the latest version of the project file. Note The following is an example. It is not the only way to make the change. (1) (2) Check that the power is off. Replace the module. (2) Install (1) Remove Note Chapter 2, INSTALLATION (3) (4) Turn the power on. Start the SLP-NX and open the existing project files that have been saved. 15-3

430 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (5) Display mappings in the SLP-NX project window. (6) Click the [Acquisition of actual module configuration] at the Individual Mapping screen. > The [Actual module configuration] window is displayed. Open the [Actual module configuration] window, then click the (7) [Execute] button for [Scanning of actual module configuration]. 15-4

431 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (8) When a scan of the actual module configuration is performed, [Error in scanning of actual module configuration] is displayed. Click the [OK] button to close the error report. When the module is replaced with that for maintenance whose settings have been all set, [Error in scanning of actual module configuration] is not displayed, so advance to procedure (11). (9) Carry out the following operation to copy communication settings, etc. from the mapping information in the project window to the actual module configuration window. (9)-1 Select the chain of the module to be replaced (9)-2 Select all modules to be mapped while pressing the [SHIFT] key. (9)-3 Drag and drop the selected modules to the actual module configuration modules 2 Module selection 3 Drag&Drop 1 Chain selection > Consequently, the mapping information in the project window will be copied to the actual module configuration window. Project Window Actual module configuration window 15-5

432 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (10) In the actual module configuration window, select the chains and modules to be targeted, and click the [Write] button. > The communications settings are written to the modules. (11) When [Confirmation of communication setting overwriting] is displayed, click the [Yes] button. (12) When [Build project] is displayed, click the [No] button. Handling Precautions If [ Yes] is clicked in [Build project], the content of the project file used to read module parameters after replacement will be updated. (13) Write parameters for the relevant modules selected from the SLP-NX project window. 15-6

433 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL Handling Precautions For modules using a Data Transfer Function between Modules, or which are controlled by the supervisor module, write all settings for all modules registered to the project in a single batch Replace the entire base section (using a loader cable) When replacing modules, it is recommended to also replace terminal sections and base sections along with the module. The following shows the procedure for replacing modules using a loader cable. Note The following is an example. It is not the only way to make the change. (1) (2) Check that the power is off. Replace the module. (2) Install (1) Remove Note Chapter 2, INSTALLATION (3) (4) Turn the power on. Start the SLP-NX and open the existing project files that have been saved. 15-7

434 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (5) Display mappings in the SLP-NX project window. (6) Click the [Acquisition of actual module configuration] at the Individual Mapping screen. > The [Actual module configuration] window is displayed. In the [Actual module configuration] window, click the (7) [Execute] button for [Scanning of actual module configuration]. 15-8

435 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (8) When a scan of the actual module configuration is performed, [Error] is displayed. Click the [OK] button to close the error report. When the module is replaced with that for maintenance whose settings have been all set, [Error] is not displayed, so advance to procedure (14). (9) When [Confirmation of Mapping Retry] is displayed, click the [No] button. (10) The [Errr] message displayed in (8) for confirmation may appear again. Click the [OK] button to close the error report. (11) Carry out the following operation to copy communication settings, etc. from the mapping information in the project window to the actual module configuration window. (11)-1 Select the chain of the module to be replaced (11)-2 Select the mapping module (11)-3 Drag and drop the selected modules to the actual module configuration modules. 2 Module selection 1 Chain selection 3 Drag&Drop 15-9

436 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL Consequently, the mapping information in the project window will be copied to the actual module configuration window. Project Window Actual module configuration window (12) From the actual module configuration window, select the chains and modules to be targeted, and click the [Write] button. > The communications settings are written to the modules. (13) When [Writing of chain information, address information, and communication settings] is displayed, click the [Yes] button. (14) When [Confirmation of communication setting overwriting] is displayed, click the [No] button

437 Chapter 15. MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, AND DISPOSAL (15) When [Build project] is displayed, click the [No] button. Handling Precautions If [ Yes] in [Build project] is clicked, the content of the project file used to read module parameters after replacement will be updated. (16) Write parameters for the relevant modules selected from the SLP-NX project window. Handling Precautions For modules using a Data Transfer Function between Modules, or which are controlled by the supervisor module, write all settings for all modules registered to the project in batch